W6400UG Us PDF

TOP
Chapter 1
Chapter 1 Basic Procedures Basic Procedures
Chapter 2
Chapter 2 Using a Variety of Media Using a Variety of
Media
Chapter 3
Chapter 3 Printing Methods for Different Printing Methods for
User’s Guide
Different Objectives
Objectives
Chapter 4
Chapter 4 Maintaining the Printer Maintaining the
Printer
Chapter 5
Quick Menu Chapter 5 Using the Printer in a Net- Using the Printer in a
Network Environ-
Loading Roll Media work Environment ment
Unexpected Printing Results Chapter 6

Chapter 6 Troubleshooting Troubleshooting
Handling Jams
Responding to Error Messages
Chapter 7
When Ink Runs Out Chapter 7 Operation of the Function Operation of the
Function Menus
List of Operation Panel Settings Menus
Printer Driver imagePROGRAF Print Plug-In for Photoshop Guide
Windows Macintosh
imagePROGRAF HDI Driver Guide

Contents
Windows
Media Configuration Tool Guide

i How to Use This Guide
Windows Macintosh
Index
How to Use This Guide
TOP
How to Use This Guide Chapter 1

Basic Procedures
How to Use the Top Page
• Move to top page, chapter contents pages, contents pages, and indexed pages. Chapter 2
• Move to the previous/next page. Using a Variety of
• Return to the previous screen. Media
Chapter 3
Printing Methods for
Chapter 4
• Move to each chapter contents Maintaining the
Printer
page.
Chapter 5
• Move to frequently used topics. Using the Printer in a
Network Environ-
ment
Chapter 6
Troubleshooting
Chapter 7
Operation of the
Function Menus
• Move to the page that describes • Windows Macintosh Click either button to browse Contents
how to use this guide. each item of the solutions manual for the selected op-
erating system.
ii How to Use the Chapter Contents Pages Index

How to Use This Guide
TOP
How to Use the Chapter Contents Pages

Chapter 1
• Move to top page, chapter contents pages, contents pages, and indexed pages. Basic Procedures
• Move to the previous/next page.
• Return to the previous screen.
Chapter 2
Using a Variety of
Media
• Click the contents page to move to

the topic pages. Chapter 3
Chapter 4
Maintaining the
Printer
• Click on the ❒ checkbox, then click
the Start Print button to print the
pages of the selected topics. The Chapter 5
print job starts immediately after Using the Printer in a
Network Environ-
you click the Start Print button. ment
Chapter 6
Troubleshooting
Chapter 7
Operation of the
Function Menus
Important
• Clicking the Start Print button begins printing on the printer speci-
• Other
fied in Set as Default Printer. We recommend that you specify the
Click on blue text to move to the refer- Contents
printer you want to print on in Set as Default Printer and print on
A4 size plain paper. enced pages.
iii How to Use the Top Page Index

TOP
Chapter 1 Basic Procedures

Chapter 1
Basic Procedures
Click on the checkbox to print the section contents.
Printer Part Names .....................................................................................1-2
Printer Main Unit .................................................................................................... 1-2 Chapter 2
Switching the Printer On and Off ................................................................1-7 Using a Variety of
Switching the Printer On ........................................................................................ 1-7 Media
Switching the Printer Off ........................................................................................ 1-8
Online and Offline .................................................................................................. 1-9 Chapter 3
What’s On the Operation Panel? ..............................................................1-11 Printing Methods for
Viewing the Display ............................................................................................. 1-11 Different Objectives
Using the Operation Panel Buttons ..................................................................... 1-12
Reading Operation Panel Lamps ........................................................................ 1-14
Chapter 4
Function Menus ........................................................................................1-15 Maintaining the
How to Perform Function Menu Settings ............................................................. 1-17 Printer
Menu Settings Summary Tables ......................................................................... 1-19
Printer Driver ............................................................................................1-32 Chapter 5
Printer Driver Features ........................................................................................ 1-32 Using the Printer in a
Main Sheet .......................................................................................................... 1-35 Network Environ-
Page Setup Sheet .............................................................................................. 1-37 ment
Layout Sheet ....................................................................................................... 1-38
Maintenance Sheet .............................................................................................. 1-39 Chapter 6
Printing .....................................................................................................1-40 Troubleshooting
Printing From Windows ....................................................................................... 1-40
Printing from a Macintosh .................................................................................... 1-42
Canceling a Print Job ...............................................................................1-46 Chapter 7
Canceling a Print Job from Windows ................................................................... 1-46 Operation of the
Canceling a Print Job from Macintosh ................................................................. 1-47 Function Menus
Options .....................................................................................................1-52
Consumables ...........................................................................................1-53
Specifications ...........................................................................................1-56
Basic Environmental Performance ...........................................................1-59 Contents
How to Use the Chapter Start Print → Before clicking the Start Print button
1- 1 Contents Pages Index
Printer Part Names
TOP
Printer Part Names Chapter 1

Basic Procedures
d Maintenance Cartridge
Printer Main Unit The cartridge that vacuums and collects excess ink.
Chapter 2
When you see the message prompt that tells you to
Front View Using a Variety of
replace the maintenance cartridge, replace the cartridge. Media
(→ P.4-16)
a
f e Maintenance cartridge cover Chapter 3
b g Open this cover to replace the maintenance cartridge. Printing Methods for
(→ P.4-16)
c
f Operation panel
Chapter 4
d
Provides the display panel and the operation panel but- Maintaining the
h
tons. For more details, please refer to “Using the Opera- Printer
e
tion Panel Buttons” (→ P.1-12).
i
g Right cover Chapter 5
Using the Printer in a
Open to replace ink tanks. Network Environ-
j
h Stand (optional outside the U.S.A.) ment
This is a table designed specially for this printer. Casters Chapter 6
a Upper cover are attached to the legs to make it easy to move. Troubleshooting
Remove this cover to install the printhead, to load media, i Output stacker (provided with optional stand)
or to remove sheets of paper jammed in the printer.
A cloth tray that catches print media ejected from the
(→ P.4-11, P.6-35) Chapter 7
printer. Operation of the
b Cutting groove Function Menus
j Stopper
When you cut the media manually, the cut is done along
The part that locks the casters of the printer stand.
this groove.
c Output assist guides
Guides the media output and keeps if from floating out of Contents
position. Pull this guide out before printing.
1- 2 Index
Printer Part Names
TOP
Back View Interface connection point on the back
Chapter 1
Basic Procedures
a a
b
Chapter 2
c
Using a Variety of
d
Media
e
f
Chapter 3
g a Expansion board slot Printing Methods for
b
Provided for network interface or IEEE1394 expansion Different Objectives
a Release lever
board. Remove the two screws and insert the board.
The lever that releases the media. Push this lever toward (→ Quick Start Guide) Chapter 4
the back to release pressure when you load media, when Maintaining the
b USB port Printer
you need to shift the paper manually, or when you must
clean inside the printer. This is the communication port for USB 2.0 Hi-Speed.
Connect the USB cable here to connect the printer to the Chapter 5
b Lift handles computer via USB. (→ Quick Start Guide) Using the Printer in a
Grasp the handles provided on the left and right side to Network Environ-
lift or move the printer. ment
c Power connector Chapter 6
Provides a connection point for the printer power cord. Troubleshooting
d Roll holder slot

This groove guides the roll holder. (→ P.2-26) Chapter 7
e Holder stopper Operation of the
Function Menus
The part that fastens the roll media to the roll holder.
(→ P.2-26)
f Roll holder
The holder where the roll media is loaded. (→ P.2-26) Contents
g Accessory pocket
Holds the printer instructions, tools for assembly, and
extra ink tanks.
1- 3 Index
Printer Part Names
TOP
Inside the Upper Cover f Upper cover stopper
This arm prevents the upper cover from falling. To close Chapter 1
the upper cover, just lift and hold the stopper up then Basic Procedures
close the upper cover.
f
Chapter 2
Using a Variety of
Media
Chapter 3
a
Chapter 4
b
Maintaining the
c Printer
d
e
Chapter 5
a Carriage rail Using the Printer in a
Network Environ-
The carriage moves on this rail. ment
b Paper restraint
Chapter 6
An important part for paper feed. The plate keeps the Troubleshooting
paper straight in the paper path.
c Platen
The printhead moves across the platen when it prints. A Chapter 7
Operation of the
suction port is provided on the front surface to prevent Function Menus
the media from floating out of position.
d Borderless print ink groove
Receives ink that drains from the edges of the media
during borderless printing. Contents
e Media guideline
Media is set so it is parallel to this guideline when roll
media is loaded. (→ P.2-26)
1- 4 Index
Printer Part Names
TOP
Carriage (Inside Upper Cover) f Printhead height adjustment lever
Use to adjust the height of the printhead. You will need to Chapter 1
adjust the height of the printhead for high quality printing, Basic Procedures
a
or depending on the media you use. (→ P.2-40)
f
g Carriage
The important part that moves the printhead during print- Chapter 2
Using a Variety of
b g ing. Media
c
d Chapter 3
e Different Objectives
a Carriage cover Chapter 4

Maintaining the
This cover protects the carriage. Open this cover to Printer
replace the printhead. (→ P.4-23)
b Printhead lock cover Chapter 5
This cover locks and holds the printhead in place. Raise Using the Printer in a
Network Environ-
this cover to release the printhead lock. (→ P.4-26) ment
c Replaceable Printhead
Chapter 6
The major component equipped with the print nozzles. Troubleshooting
The printer is shipped without the printhead installed;
you must install the printhead after unpacking the printer.
(→ Quick Start Guide) Chapter 7
Operation of the
d Printhead lock lever
Function Menus
This is the lever that locks the printhead lock cover.
Open this lever to open the printhead cover. (→ P.4-26)
e Cutter Blade
The cutter unit that cuts print media automatically. Contents
(→ P.4-29)
1- 5 Index
Printer Part Names
TOP
Inside the Right Front Cover
Chapter 1
a Basic Procedures
b
c
d g
e h
f i Chapter 2
j Using a Variety of
k Media
l
a Y Ink Tank Cover Chapter 3

b M Ink Tank Cover Different Objectives
c PM Ink Tank Cover
Chapter 4
d C Ink Tank Cover Maintaining the
e PC Ink Tank Cover Printer
f Bk/MBk Ink Tank Covers
These covers lock and protect the ink tanks. Open this Chapter 5
cover to replace an ink tank. Network Environ-
g Y Ink Tank ment
h M Ink Tank Chapter 6
Troubleshooting
i PM Ink Tank
j C Ink Tank
k PC Ink Tank Chapter 7
Operation of the
l Bk/MBk Ink Tanks Function Menus
These are the ink tanks. The ink tanks are not installed in
the printer when you unpack it; you must install them
when you set up the printer.
Contents
1- 6 Index
Switching the Printer On and Off
TOP
Switching the Printer On and Off Chapter 1

Basic Procedures
Follow the procedure below to switch the printer on and off. Processing to prepare the printer starts after the
Online lamp and Message lamp start flashing. After
Note preparation processing is completed and media is
Chapter 2
loaded, the Online lamp light, and the printer is
z Now we will show you examples of how to use the Using a Variety of
ready to print. Media
printer for normal operations after it has been set up. If
you are not finished setting up the printer, first follow Data Online
Information Power
the instructions in the Quick Start Guide to confirm the Message Bk

Cleaning Chapter 3
(3 sec.)
setup and operation of the printer. Stop/Eject

(1 sec.) Online
z If the printer is connected to a Macintosh computer via Offline
a USB cable and the computer has been shut down, Menu
when the printer is switched on the computer may also If no print media is loaded in the printer when the Chapter 4
Maintaining the
switch on. printer is switched on, Offline is displayed and the Printer
If this occurs disconnect the USB cable. (You may be printer waits for you to load media in the printer.
able to solve the problem by connecting the printer and Information Power
Chapter 5
Macintosh via a USB hub.) Data
Message
Online
Load Roll Media
Cleaning Using the Printer in a
Network Environ-
(3 sec.)
Stop/Eject
(1 sec.) Online
ment
Switching the Printer On Offline
Menu
Chapter 6
If the Message lamp is flashing, read the message Troubleshooting
Switch on the printer before you execute a print job from the
computer. on the printer operation display and take the
appropriate action. “Responding to Error Messages”
1 (→ P.6-2) Chapter 7
Press the Power button. Operation of the
If the display or Online lamp do not light, check the Function Menus
Information Power power cord connections at the printer and the power
Data
Message
Cleaning
supply and make sure that they are secure.
(→ Quick Start Guide)
(3 sec.)
Stop/Eject
(1 sec.) Online
Offline
Menu
Contents
1- 7 Index
TOP
Switching the Printer Off 2 Press and hold down the Power button until
you see Shut Down.. in the display then Chapter 1
When you are finished using the printer, follow this release the button. Basic Procedures
procedure to switch the printer off.
Information Power
Data Shut Down..
Message Please Wait..
Important Cleaning
(3 sec.) Chapter 2
Stop/Eject
Using a Variety of
z Never switch the printer off, and never unplug its
(1 sec.) Online
Media
power cord during a print job. This could damage the Offline
Menu
printer.
Please Wait.. is displayed for a few seconds, then Chapter 3
z Remove the roll from the printer if you do not intend to Printing Methods for
the printer goes off.
print from the roll for a long period. Leaving the roll Different Objectives
media at the standby position for an extended period
could cause poor feeding. Chapter 4
1
Maintaining the
Look at the display and confirm that a print Printer
job is not in progress.
Chapter 5
Information Power Using the Printer in a
Data
Message
Online
Bk Network Environ-
Cleaning
(3 sec.)
Stop/Eject
ment
(1 sec.) Online
Chapter 6
Offline
Menu Troubleshooting
If you see an error message displayed, follow the

procedure to correct the problem, and make sure the
print job has completed. Chapter 7
Operation of the
If a print job is in progress, wait for the print job to Function Menus
complete before switching off the printer.
Contents
1- 8 Index
TOP
Online and Offline Note Chapter 1

When the Printer Is Operating z Use the Use Power Save and Sleep Timer settings Basic Procedures
on the printer operation panel to set the sleep mode
This printer has three operation modes: online, offline
on/off timing. When Use Power Save is set On, you
and menu mode. Each mode is described below.
can use the Sleep Timer to set the length of time until Chapter 2
z Online mode Using a Variety of
the printer enters sleep mode. (→ P.1-28)
The printer immediately processes a print job sent z If the printer remains idle for more than 15 minutes Media
from the computer. with the cover closed (if no print jobs are received or if
z Offline mode Chapter 3
no operation panel buttons are pressed), the printer
The printer receives a job from the computer but the automatically enters the sleep mode to conserve Printing Methods for
job is held in the standby status without processing it. Different Objectives
energy. Only the Online lamp remains on while the
While the printer is offline, you can load or cut media printer is in the sleep mode; the display and other
manually, access the carriage, and perform other pro- Chapter 4
lamps remain off. The printer awakens from the sleep
cedures. Maintaining the
mode as soon as it receives a print job or if you press Printer
The printer also goes offline automatically any time the
any button on the operation panel. The printer requires
printer cannot start processing a print job, such as
about 5 seconds to recover from the sleep mode.
when there is no print media loaded, when an error Chapter 5
occurs, and so on. Using the Printer in a
z Menu mode Network Environ-
ment
The menu mode displays the function menus on the
printer display. Press the buttons on the operation Chapter 6
panel to set or execute the functions in the menus. Troubleshooting
Like the offline line mode, this mode places all jobs in
standby status.
Chapter 7
Operation of the
Function Menus
Contents
1- 9 Index
TOP
How to Switch Modes z Offline Mode
Press the Online button to switch the operation mode. Information Power Chapter 1
Data
Basic Procedures
1
Offline
Message Feed Paper
Cleaning
(3 sec.)
Press the Online button then select the Stop/Eject

(1 sec.) Online
operation mode. Offline

Menu Chapter 2
Every time you press the Online button, the mode Using a Variety of
With Offline displayed on the operation panel, the
selection changes in this order: Online > Offline > Media
Online lamp goes off.
MAIN MENU.
z Menu mode Chapter 3
Online Status Offline Status Function Menu Display Mode Printing Methods for
MAIN MENU Different Objectives
Head Cleaning
Online Offline MAIN MENU Cleaning
(3 sec.)
Bk Feed Paper Head Cleaning Stop/Eject
(1 sec.) Online
Chapter 4
When Paper Is Not Maintaining the
Loaded or Error
Has Occurred Printer
While MAIN MENU is displayed on the operation
Paper Loaded panel, you can use the arrow keys ([ ] [ ] [ ] [ ])
Chapter 5
and the OK key to operate the function menus. Using the Printer in a
z Online mode Network Environ-
Information Power
ment
Data Online
Message Bk
Cleaning
Chapter 6
Troubleshooting
(3 sec.)
Stop/Eject
(1 sec.) Online
Offline
Menu
With Online displayed on the operation panel, the Chapter 7

Online lamp lights. Operation of the
Function Menus
If no media is loaded, or if a message is displayed on
the operation panel, the printer will not enter the online
mode even when you press the Online button. Every
time you remove the cause of a printer error, the
printer will automatically enter the online mode. Contents
1- 10 Index
What’s On the Operation Panel?
TOP
What’s On the Operation Panel? Chapter 1

Basic Procedures
The printer operation panel of this printer provides a display Print Job Processing
(a), 10 buttons (b) and 5 lamps (c).
z “Viewing the Display” (→ P.1-11) Printing...
Chapter 2
z “Using the Operation Panel Buttons” (→ P.1-12) Using a Variety of
z “Reading Operation Panel Lamps” (→ P.1-14) Media
z Line 1:
a Information Power
The first line of the display indicates the current
Data processing status of the printer. Chapter 3
Message Printing Methods for
Cleaning c z Line 2: Different Objectives
(3 sec.)
Stop/Eject
(1 sec.) Online
Displays the job name and other information.
b Function Menu mode Chapter 4
Offline
Maintaining the
Menu Printer
MAIN MENU
Media Type ↓
Viewing the Display Chapter 5

z Line 1:
The display indicates the current status of the printer. Network Environ-
Displays the name of the menu and menu items. ment
z Line 2:
Standby Chapter 6
Displays each item for selection on the menu.
Troubleshooting
Online A right arrow at the right end of the line indicates that
Bk there are more items.
A down arrow at the right end of the line indicates that
z Line 1: Chapter 7
there are more sublevels. When both cases exist, you Operation of the
The first line of the display indicates the current operat- will see a down arrow and right arrow displaying alter- Function Menus
ing status of the printer. nately.
z Line 2:
The abbreviation for the currently installed black ink Note
tank (Bk for Photo Black Ink, MBk for Matte Black Ink)
is displayed at the left. (→ P.2-2)
z For more details about the function menus, please Contents
refer to “How to Perform Function Menu Settings”
The level of the ink supply in each ink tank is displayed (→ P.1-17)
in the center, and the remaining capacity of the mainte-
nance cartridge is displayed at the right.
1- 11 Index
TOP
Current Selection Using the Operation Panel Buttons
Chapter 1
Media Type The buttons on the operation panel are used for the Basic Procedures
= Plain Paper
functions described below.
z Line 1: Information Power
Data
a Chapter 2
Displays the items on the menu. Message
Using a Variety of
Cleaning
z Line 2: (3 sec.)
Media
Stop/Eject
Displays the item or value of the setting. (1 sec.) Online
A setting prefixed with an equals sign (=) indicates the b

Chapter 3
current selection. Offline
Menu Printing Methods for
a Power button
Note Press this button to switch the printer on and off.
z For more details about the function menus, please z Printer off: Chapter 4
refer to “How to Perform Function Menu Settings” Maintaining the
Press to switch the printer on. Printer
(→ P.1-17) z Printer on:
Press for at least 1 second to display Shut Down.. and
Message Display switch the printer off. Chapter 5
ERROR E02501
b Online button Network Environ-
Rep. Y Ink Tank Press this button to switch printer offline and online and ment
the menu display. Chapter 6
Printing stops and the Message lamp starts flashing z Printer online: Troubleshooting
when the printer requires servicing. Perform the appro- Press to switch the printer to offline.
priate procedure when this occurs. z Printer offline:
In some cases you can continue printing once a mes- Press to switch the menu display. Chapter 7
sage notifies you that the printer needs servicing. When z Menu display: Operation of the
the Message lamp lights, press any button to extinguish Cancels the menu operation mode and switches to the Function Menus
the lamp and the message. online mode. Also temporarily suspends a maintenance
cartridge error so you can switch the printer to online
Note mode after a maintenance cartridge error displays. How-
z For more details about what to do when an error
ever, you cannot switch to the online mode when other Contents
messages are displayed or when paper is not set.
message appears, see Chapter 6 “Responding to
z Job processing:
Error Messages” (→ P.6-2).
Puts the printer in the pause mode. The current print
job pauses temporarily.
1- 12 Index
TOP
Information Power Information Power

Data
e
Data
Chapter 1
Message
Message
Cleaning Cleaning Basic Procedures
(3 sec.) (3 sec.)
Stop/Eject
(1 sec.) Online
Stop/Eject
(1 sec.) Online i
c f g j Chapter 2
d Offline h Offline
Menu Menu Using a Variety of
Media
c Paper Source button g [ ] button
z Online, Offline, Menu Display Status: z Printer offline:
Chapter 3
Press and hold for 1 second or more to switch Press and hold for 1 second to move the carriage to
between Roll Media and Cut Sheet as the feed source. the center of the platen. Different Objectives
However, this switching cannot be performed if the z Menu display:
upper cover, right cover, or release lever is open. Operates as a function select button to display the pre-
Chapter 4
d OK button vious candidate (menu item or value) for selection. Maintaining the
z Setting value display: h [ ] button Printer
Selects the value or setting, or executes the function, z Printer offline:
currently displayed on the operation panel. Does manual feeding from the roll automatically when Chapter 5
you are using the roll as the feed source. Using the Printer in a
e Information button Network Environ-
z Menu display:
Displays the submenus. The information about ink, the ment
Press this button to open the next menu level below.
maintenance cartridge, media, and printhead height,
i [ ] button Chapter 6
printhead service life, and parts service life displays in a Troubleshooting
prescribed order on a rolling display. Pressing and hold- z Printer offline:
ing this button for 3 seconds also starts Head Cleaning Manually reverse feeds paper onto the roll.
A. (→ P.4-38) z Menu display:
Chapter 7
The length of the media remaining also displays if the Press to return one level up and display the previous Operation of the
function that checks the amount of media remaining on menu item. Function Menus
the roll is switched on. j [ ] button
f Stop/Eject button z Printer offline:
z Online, Offline, Menu Display Status: Press and hold for 1 second to move the carriage to
Press and hold for over 1 second to cancel printing, ink the center of the platen. Contents
drying, or eject the media. z Menu display:
z Pause Status: Operates as a scroll button to display the next candi-
Press and hold for over 1 seconds to cancel a paused date (menu item and value) for selection.
1- 13
job and eject the media. Index
TOP
d Cut Sheet lamp
Reading Operation Panel Lamps z On:
Chapter 1
The lamps on the operation panel indicate the following Cut sheet is selected as the paper source. Basic Procedures
states. e Online lamp
z On:
a Information Power
The printer is online or the printer is processing a print Chapter 2
Data
Message job or sleeping. Using a Variety of
b Cleaning Media
(3 sec.) z Off:
Stop/Eject
c (1 sec.) Online
The printer is offline or in pause mode, in menu display
Chapter 3
mode, is initializing immediately after power on, or has
d Printing Methods for
Offline e been switched off. Different Objectives
Menu
a Data lamp
Chapter 4
z Flashing: Maintaining the
The printer is printing, receiving or processing a print Printer
job.
When the printer is not printing, this indicates that a job Chapter 5
has been stopped and the printer is in the pause Using the Printer in a
mode, the printer is has received data that it cannot Network Environ-
process, or the firmware is being updated. ment
z Off: Chapter 6
There are no jobs in the printer. Troubleshooting
b Message lamp
z On:
Chapter 7
A warning is displayed on the operation panel.
Operation of the
z Flashing: Function Menus
An error has occurred.
z Off:
The printer is operating normally, or the printer is
switched off. Contents
c Roll Media lamp
z On:
Roll media is selected as the paper source.
1- 14 Index
Function Menus
TOP
Function Menus Chapter 1

Basic Procedures
You can use the operation panel to access and use all the
functions built into the printer. You can use the menus to
perform system settings, set up options, clean the Chapter 2
printhead, perform test prints and other functions. You can Using a Variety of
press the Information button at any time to view the Media
submenus and read information about the ink levels, media,
and height of the printhead. Chapter 3
Printer Function Priorities
The settings done on the printer operation panel reset all
Chapter 4
the default settings and are applied to all print jobs. How- Maintaining the
ever, if the same settings are done with the printer driver Printer
then the printer driver settings have priority when print
jobs are executed. Chapter 5
Function Menu Flow Summaries Network Environ-
The following illustration shows you how the items of the ment
function menus are organized. Press [ ] or [ ] to dis- Chapter 6
play the next item, press [ ] to display the next level Troubleshooting
below, or press [ ] to return to the previous level. You
can also press the OK button to enter the settings for
each menu item. Chapter 7
Operation of the
Function Menus
Contents
1- 15 Index
Basic Procedures
Using a Variety of
Network Environ-
Contents
Operation of the
Troubleshooting
Function Menus
Maintaining the
Index
TOP
Chapter 1
Chapter 2
Chapter 3
Chapter 4
Chapter 5
Chapter 6
Chapter 7
Printer
Media
ment
*8 Displayed only when Manual is selected as the IP Mode.

*2 Not displayed during maintenance cartridge warning. *7 Displayed only when Automatic is selected as the IP Mode.
*6 Displayed only when Network board is installed.
Counter Cut Count

Job Log Coverage
Error Log Interface
MAC Address Media Type
Ext. Interface Print Size
RAM Print Time
Print End Time
Information Version
Print Start Time
Nozzle Check
Job Status
Menu Map
Page Count
Print Job Log
User Name
Media Details
Document Name
Test Print Status Print
Reset MediaType
Language
Date Format
*5 Displayed only when Print Length is selected as the Feed Priority.
*4 Displayed only when Band Joint is selected as the Feed Priority.
Time Zone Y Ink Tank

Length Unit M Ink Tank
Use Power Save PM Ink Tank
*1 Displayed only when media is loaded.
Sleep Timer
C Ink Tank
Stop Ink Check
PC Ink Tank
Nozzle Check
*3 Displayed only during printing.
Bk Ink Tank
Roll Length Set
Chk Remain.Roll Med.type Wrning
Keep Media Size Head Ht. Wrning
Best Head Hght (L/M/H)

Change Cutter Buzzer
Head Height (L/M/H)

System Setup Warning
MAC Address
*6 *6 *2 *2
Move Printer Spanning Tree

Maintenance Replace P.head Ethernet Type
Init. Settings Comm.Mode
Ethernet Driver Auto Detect
Print Service
*6
AppleTalk
Frame Type Default G/W
*6
NetWare NetWare Subnet Mask
Remaining : (Paper Remaining) m

*7 *8
IP Setting IP Address
*6
TCP/IP
Protocol RARP
Interface Setup EOP Timer IP Mode BOOTP
TCP/IP DHCP
Color Calib. K
## Printable
Color Calib. C
Color Calib. M
Color Calib. Y
Color Calib. PC
Color Calib. PM
Color Calib. Return Defaults
Width : (Paper Width)

Fine Tuning
*4 *5
Advanced Adj.
z Sub Menus (Information Button)

Adjust Length
Adjust Band Standard Adj.
(Media Type)
Feed Priority Auto Print
Adjust Printer Auto Head Adj. Standard Adj.
Advanced Adj.
*3
Rep. Ink Tank Return Defaults

*2
Width Detection
ChangeBkInkType
Skew Check Lv.
MAIN MENU
SUB MENU
Med.Detail Set. (Media Type) Correct Smear
Function Menus
CutDustReduct.
*1
Media Type
Cut Speed
z MAIN MENU
Standard Cutter
VacuumStrngth
Chng Head Hght Media Thickness
Far End RllMrgn
Force Cutting
Head Cleaning B NearEnd RllMrgn
Head Cleaning Head Cleaning A Scan Wait Time
Drying_Time
Information
Online
1- 16
Function Menus
TOP
How to Perform Function Menu Set- 2 Press the Online button then select MAIN
MENU. Chapter 1
tings Basic Procedures
When you do the function menu settings, press Online to MAIN MENU
Head Cleaning
Cleaning
display the menus, then use the [ ], [ ], [ ], [ ], and (3 sec.)

Stop/Eject
(1 sec.) Online
Chapter 2
OK buttons to operate the menus. Using a Variety of
Media
Making Settings
Here we will show you how set the sleep timer as an
example of how to use the operation panel buttons.
3 Press the [ ] or [ ] button to select Chapter 3
System Setup then press [ ]. Printing Methods for
Note Data Main Menu
Information Power
System Setup
z Confirm that Use Power Save is switched on. The
Message
Cleaning
(3 sec.)
Chapter 4
sleep timer cannot be set while Use Power Save is
Stop/Eject
(1 sec.) Online Maintaining the
Printer
switched off. Offline
Menu
1 If the printer is off, press the Power button to The next level of the menu is displayed.
Chapter 5
4
switch the printer on. Network Environ-
Press [ ] or [ ] to select Sleep Timer ment
After a few seconds Online is displayed in the
operation panel and the Online lamp lights. then press [ ]. Chapter 6
Troubleshooting
Information Power
Information Power Data System Setup
Data Message Sleep Timer
Message Cleaning
Cleaning (3 sec.)
(3 sec.) Stop/Eject
Stop/Eject
(1 sec.) Online
(1 sec.) Online Chapter 7
Operation of the
Function Menus
Offline
Offline Menu
Menu
The setting value for the selected item appears.
Contents
1- 17 Index
Function Menus
TOP
5 Press the [ ] or [ ] button to select the
desired setting then press the OK button. Chapter 1
Basic Procedures
Information Power
Data Sleep Timer
Message 10 min.
Cleaning
(3 sec.)
Stop/Eject
Chapter 2
(1 sec.) Online
Offline
Using a Variety of
Menu
Media
The selected value is prefixed with an equals sign
(=). Chapter 3
6
Press the Online button to display Online.
Data Online
Information Power
Chapter 4
Message Bk
Cleaning
Maintaining the
Printer
(3 sec.)
Stop/Eject
(1 sec.) Online
Offline
Menu
Chapter 5
The Online lamp lights and the printer is ready to Network Environ-
print. ment
Chapter 6
Troubleshooting
Chapter 7
Operation of the
Function Menus
Contents
1- 18 Index
Function Menus
TOP
Menu Settings Summary Tables

Chapter 1
Each menu has the functions described below. A setting value marked with an asterisk (*) is the initial setting for that menu Basic Procedures
item.
MAIN MENU Chapter 2

Using a Variety of
Menu Item Setting Values Function Media
Head Cleaning Head Cleaning A Cleans the printhead.

Chapter 3
Head Cleaning B Performs stronger cleaning than Head Printing Methods for
Cleaning A. Different Objectives
Force Cutting No, Yes Executes a roll cut at the current position.
However, if the media is cut within 10 cm Chapter 4
from the leading edge the media still feeds Maintaining the
the prescribed distance before the cut is Printer
performed. This menu item is displayed only
while Roll Media is selected for printing. Chapter 5
If the feed distance is very small, the cut is Using the Printer in a
not performed. Network Environ-
Chng Head Hght No, Yes Adjusts the height of the Printhead. (→ P.2- ment
40) Chapter 6
Media Type Plain Paper*, CAD Plain Paper, Plain Selects the type setting for media. Only the Troubleshooting
Paper HQ, Recycled Coated, Coated names of the types of media that can be
Paper, HW Coated, Premium Matte, used with the set Bk ink are displayed.
Ex HW Coated, Glossy Photo, Semi- (→ P.2-4) Chapter 7
Gl Photo, HW Glossy Photo, HW Operation of the
SemiGl Photo, Syn. Paper, Adh. Syn. Function Menus
Paper, Backlit Film, Flame-Res.
Cloth, Proofing Paper, News Proof 1,
News Proof 2, News Proof 3, FineArt
Photo, FneArt HW Photo, FineArt Contents
Txtr, Canvas Semi-Gl, JPN Paper
Washi, Colored Coated, CAD Trace
Paper, CAD Matte Film, Special 1-5
1- 19 Index
Function Menus
TOP
Menu Item Setting Values Function
Med. Detail Set Chapter 1
Media Type Plain Paper*, CAD Plain Paper, Plain These are the names of media that you can Basic Procedures
Paper HQ, Recycled Coated, Coated select. Only the names of the types of media
Paper, HW Coated, Premium Matte, that can be used with the set ink tank are
Ex HW Coated, Glossy Photo, Semi- displayed. Chapter 2
Gl Photo, HW Glossy Photo, HW Using a Variety of
SemiGl Photo, Syn. Paper, Adh. Syn. Media
Paper, Backlight Film, Flame-Res.
Cloth, Proofing Paper, News Proof 1, Chapter 3
News Proof 2, News Proof 3, FineArt Printing Methods for
Photo, FneArt HW Photo, FineArt Different Objectives
Txtr, Canvas Semi-Gl, JPN Paper
Washi, Colored Coated, CAD Trace Chapter 4
Paper, CAD Matte Film, Special 1-5 Maintaining the
Drying Time Off, 30 sec., 1 min., 3 min., 5 min, 10 An ink drying time interval for each media is Printer
min., 30 min., 60 min. set to allow enough time for a printout to dry
before the next sheet prints. Chapter 5
Scan Wait Time Off, 1 sec., 3 sec., 5 sec., 7 sec., 9 The printhead can be set to pause after one Using the Printer in a
sec. pass (a scan) and wait for the ink to dry (this Network Environ-
allows for the absorption properties of ment
different media). However, the printing time Chapter 6
will be much longer. Troubleshooting
NearEnd RllMrgn 20mm, 5mm This sets the amount of white space to
ensure the quality of printing at the leading
edge.
Chapter 7
Operation of the
Important Function Menus
z If set to 5 mm, the print quality at the
leading edge, or the accuracy of feeding,
may deteriorate, or the surface of the print
may be scratched. Also, ink may stick to Contents
the leading edge.
1- 20 Index
Function Menus
TOP
Far End RollMrgn 10mm, 5mm Sets the amount of white space to ensure Chapter 1
the quality of printing at the trailing edge. Basic Procedures
Important
z If set to 5 mm, the print quality at the Chapter 2
leading edge, or the accuracy of feeding, Using a Variety of
may deteriorate, or the surface of the print Media
may be scratched. Also, ink may stick to
the leading edge. Chapter 3
Media Thickness Thick, Standard, Thin Selects the ideal thickness for the media Printing Methods for
type. The printhead alert will display based Different Objectives
on the value of this setting.
VacuumStrngth Weak, Standard, Strong, Strongest Sets the amount of suction on the media on Chapter 4
the platen. Maintaining the
Printer
Standard Cutter Enable, Disable Determines whether the standard, flat blade
cutter is enabled.
Cut speed Standard, Fast Sets the speed of the cutter cutting the Chapter 5
media. Selecting Fast for film and other Network Environ-
media that easily generates cutting dust will ment
reduce the amount of dust.
Chapter 6
CutDustReduct Off*, On When printing on film or other media that Troubleshooting
creates a large amount of dust during
cutting, a line is printed at cutting position to
reduce the amount of scattered dust.
Correct Smear Off*, On Select for media when the printing results is Chapter 7
Operation of the
easily scratched. Function Menus
Contents
1- 21 Index
Function Menus
TOP
Skew Check Lv. Standard*, Loose, Off When you are printing on Japanese washi Chapter 1
paper or other media of non-standard width, Basic Procedures
you can lower the amount of skew detected
or switch this function off. However, if you
switch this function Off, you could cause a
paper jam if the sheet is not loaded perfectly Chapter 2
Using a Variety of
straight.
Media
Important
Chapter 3
z If media is set at a skewed angle while Off, Printing Methods for
this could cause jams or fouling the platen. Different Objectives
Width Detection On*, Off, Media Size? The Width Detection function can be
switched to Off only when printing on cut Chapter 4
sheets. You can switch width detection off for Maintaining the
Japanese washi or other media of non- Printer
standard widths. If you switch this function
Off, then Media Size? is displayed and you
can enter the width of the media. Chapter 5
Return Defaults No, Yes This function restores the media type Network Environ-
settings to their default values. ment
ChangeBkInkType No, Yes You can switch the black ink tanks based on
the requirements of the print job for different Chapter 6
types of black ink. Troubleshooting
Rep. Ink Tank No, Yes When you must change an ink tank during a
print job, the required processing is done so
you can change the ink tank. This menu is Chapter 7
displayed during printing only. Operation of the
Function Menus
Adjust Printer
Auto Head Adj. Adjusts the printhead. (→ P.4-40)
Advanced Adj. No, Yes Prints the pattern used to adjust nozzle
gaps, print direction, and color gaps; the
printer reads the printed pattern and does Contents
the adjustments automatically based on the
results of the printout.
1- 22 Index
Function Menus
TOP
Standard Adj. No, Yes Prints the adjustment pattern used to adjust Chapter 1
the position of the printhead, reads the Basic Procedures
results of the pattern, and then automatically
adjusts the values for printhead positioning.
Auto Print On*, Off You can set Advanced Adj. to print Chapter 2
automatically immediately after the printhead Using a Variety of
is replaced. Media
Feed Priority Band Joint*, Print Length Sets the priority for the precision of media
feed. Select Print Length when you want
Chapter 3
the media to feed accurately. When Print Printing Methods for
Length is selected, color may blur slightly in Different Objectives
the direction of carriage scanning.
Adjust Band Adjusts the amount of line feed for each type
of media. (→ P.4-42) Chapter 4
Maintaining the
Standard Adj. No, Yes The printer prints this pattern and uses it to Printer
adjust the amount of feed; it scans the
printout and automatically adjusts the values
for each type of media. Chapter 5
Advanced Adj. No, Yes Use with media other than Canon media or Network Environ-
media not approved for output with the ment
printer. The adjustment value is set
automatically when the printer reads the Chapter 6
printed pattern. However, this requires more Troubleshooting
time than Standard Adj. and consumes
more ink.
Fine Tuning -3 ~ 0* ~ +3 Allows manual entry of a value to fine adjust Chapter 7
the band adjustment of the media selected Operation of the
for printing. Function Menus
Adjust Length -0.70 ~ 0.00* ~ 0.70% Adjusts the amount of stretching and
shrinking for each media type. To set a
longer feed for a media that stretches easily,
adjust the value to the plus (+) side, or adjust
it to the minus (-) side to set a shorter feed
Contents
for a media that shrinks easily. This menu is
displayed only when Print Length is
selected for Feed Priority.
1- 23 Index
Function Menus
TOP
Color Adj. Chapter 1
Return Defaults Off*, On This restores all color settings at once to 2, Basic Procedures
the factory default setting.
Color Adj. PM 1, 2*, 3 You can adjust the density of PM 1, 2*, 3 Y,
Color Adj. PC 1, 2*, 3 M, C, K, PM, PC one by one and perform the Chapter 2
corrections. Using a Variety of
Color Adj. Y 1, 2*, 3
The settings can be performed in the range 1 Media
Color Adj. M 1, 2*, 3
to 3 (the standard factory default setting is
Color Adj. C 1, 2*, 3 2). Set to 1 for a light adjustment or set to 3 Chapter 3
Color Adj. K 1, 2*, 3 for a dark adjustment. Printing Methods for
Interface Setup Different Objectives
EOP Timer 10 sec., 30 sec., 1 min., 2 min., Sets the job timeout setting for the printer.
5 min., 10 min.*, 30 min., 60 min. Chapter 4
Maintaining the
TCP/IP Sets the TCP/IP protocol for the network Printer
interface. After setting each TCP/IP item,
select Store Setting to save the settings and
enable them. This menu is displayed only Chapter 5
when the network interface is installed.
Network Environ-
(→ P.5-12) ment
TCP/IP On The setting for TCP/IP protocol is locked On.
This setting cannot be changed. Chapter 6
Troubleshooting
IP Mode Manual*, Automatic This setting determines whether the IP
address is set automatically or entered
manually.
Chapter 7
Protocol Sets the type of server when the printer is Operation of the
DHCP Off*, On set for automatic entry of the IP address. Function Menus
BOOTP
RARP
IP Setting Sets the printer network information if a fixed
IP address has been set. Contents
IP Address 0.0.0.0* ~ 255.255.255.255 Allows entry of the IP address assigned to
Subnet Mask the printer, network subnet mask, and
Default G/W default gateway.
1- 24 Index
Function Menus
TOP
NetWare Sets the network interface for NetWare Chapter 1
protocol. After setting each TCP/IP item, Basic Procedures
select Store Setting to save the settings and
enable them. This menu is displayed only
when the network interface is installed. Chapter 2
(→ P.5-35) Using a Variety of
Off*, On Determines whether NetWare protocol is Media
NetWare
used.
Frame Type Auto Detect, Ethernet 2, Ethernet Selects the frame type to use. Chapter 3
802.2*, Ethernet 802.3, Ethernet Printing Methods for
SNAP Different Objectives
Print Service Bindary Pserver, RPrinter, NDS Selects the print service.
Pserver*, NPrinter Chapter 4
AppleTalk On, Off*, Determines whether AppleTalk protocol is Maintaining the
used. After setting each TCP/IP item, select Printer
Store Setting to save the settings and enable
them. This menu is displayed only when the Chapter 5
network interface is installed. (→ P.5-30) Using the Printer in a
Ethernet Driver Sets the method of communication for the Network Environ-
ment
network interface board. After setting each
TCP/IP item, select Store Setting to save Chapter 6
the settings and enable them. This menu is Troubleshooting
displayed only when the network interface is
installed. (→ P.5-6)
Auto Detect On*, Off Automatically recognizes the LAN Chapter 7
communication protocol. If set to Off, the Operation of the
communication method or Ethernet type are Function Menus
enabled.
Comm. Mode Half Duplex*, Full Duplex Selects the LAN communication method.
Ethernet Type 10 Base-T*, 100 Base-TX Selects the LAN communication speed.
Spanning Tree Not Use*, Use This selection determines whether the LAN Contents
spanning tree signal is received.
MAC Address Displays the MAC address of the network
interface board.
1- 25 Index
Function Menus
TOP
Store Setting OK? Chapter 1
Init. Settings OK? Resets all of the Interface Setup settings to Basic Procedures
their factory defaults.
Maintenance
Replace P.head No, Yes Sets the printer in the replace printhead Chapter 2
mode. This menu is not displayed while the Using a Variety of
maintenance cartridge capacity warning is Media
displayed. (→ P.4-23)
Move Printer No, Yes Sets the printer to the mode that enables you Chapter 3
to carry out the procedures required before Printing Methods for
transporting the printer to another location. Different Objectives
This menu is not displayed while the
maintenance cartridge capacity warning is Chapter 4
displayed. (→ P.4-32) Maintaining the
System Setup Printer
Warning
Buzzer On*, Off Sets the buzzer function. When set to On, Chapter 5
the buzzer sounds when an error occurs. Using the Printer in a
Network Environ-
Head Ht. Wrning On*, Off, Check Head Hght Determines whether a prompt is issued
ment
when the printhead is not at the correct
height for the print media. Chapter 6
Med.type Wrning On*, Off Determines whether a warning is issued Troubleshooting
when the media loaded in the printer does
not match the media specified for the print
job. Chapter 7
Operation of the
Change Cutter No, Yes Prepares the printer so the cutter can be Function Menus
replaced when replacement is necessary.
After replacement, you can reset the number
of cuts.
Contents
1- 26 Index
Function Menus
TOP
Keep Media Size Off*, On When switched to On, the print job executes Chapter 1
with the media size specified for the data. Basic Procedures
Depending on the size of the margins, some
of the data may be cut off.
When set to Off, the job will print without Chapter 2
cutting off part of the image at the top or Using a Variety of
bottom. However, the printout will be Media
extended by the lengths of the top and
bottom margins. Chapter 3
Important Different Objectives
z When On, part of the image may be cut off.
(→ P.7-5) Chapter 4
When set to Off, the image inside 5 mm Maintaining the
from the top, bottom, left, and right edges Printer
will be printed clearly as the recommended
printing area. However, the printout will be Chapter 5
extended by the lengths of the top and Using the Printer in a
bottom margins. Network Environ-
ment
Chk Remain. Roll Off, On* When On, the bar code prints when the roll
is removed in order to monitor the amount of Chapter 6
media remaining on each roll. Troubleshooting
When Off, the bar code is not printed when
the roll is removed. If this is set to Off, the
edge will be cut off regardless of the roll Chapter 7
paper loading position. Operation of the
Function Menus
Contents
1- 27 Index
Function Menus
TOP
Roll Length Set ## m (meter selected for Length When the roll supply remaining detection Chapter 1
Unit), ## feet (feet/inch selected for function is On, the printer sets the media length Basic Procedures
Length Unit), Manual Setting, when the roll media loaded has no bar code.
Unknown This is displayed only when Chk Remain. Roll
is On. Some Length Units are displayed in Chapter 2
meters, and others in feet depending on the Using a Variety of
setting. Also, if Manual Setting is selected you Media
can enter the length directly.
If Unknown is selected, the roll supply remains Chapter 3
function is switched Off. Printing Methods for
Nozzle Check 1 page, 10 pages*, Nozzle check Allows you to set the number of patterns to Different Objectives
print when a nozzle clogs during an
automatic check. Chapter 4
Stop Ink Check Bk Ink Tank Switches off the ink level detection function. Maintaining the
PC Ink Tank (→ P.4-8) Printer
C Ink Tank
PM Ink Tank Chapter 5
M Ink Tank Using the Printer in a
Y Ink Tank Network Environ-
ment
Sleep Timer 5 min., 10 min., 15 min.*, 20 min., Sets the amount of time the printer remains
30 min., 40 min., 50 min., 60 min. idle before it enters sleep mode. Chapter 6
Use Power Save On, Off Sets up the printer sleep mode function. If Troubleshooting
set to On the printer enters the Sleep Timer
mode to reduce its power consumption and
conserve energy if the covers are closed and Chapter 7
the printer is neither operated nor receives a Operation of the
print job after the prescribed time has Function Menus
elapsed. If set to Off, sleep mode is
disabled. (→ P.1-9)
Length Unit meter*, feet/inch Sets the units used to display the length of
the roll sheet on the display. The units for the Contents
roll length display and the roll supply
remains display are separate.
1- 28 Index
Function Menus
TOP
Time Zone 0:London (GMT) You can select a representative city in the Chapter 1
+1:Paris,Rome appropriate time zone, along with the Basic Procedures
+2:Athens,Cairo selection of the GMT time difference.
+3:Moscow
+4:Eerevan,Baku
+5:Islamabad Chapter 2
+6:Dacca
+7:Bangkok Using a Variety of
+8:Hong Kong Media
+9:Tokyo,Seoul
+10:Canberra
+11NewCaledonia Chapter 3
+12:Wellington Printing Methods for
-12:Eniwetok Different Objectives
-11:Midway is.
-10Hawaii(AHST)
-9:Alaska(AKST) Chapter 4
-8:Oregon (PST) Maintaining the
-7:Arizona(MST) Printer
-6:Texas (CST)
-5:NewYork(EST)
-4:Santiago Chapter 5
-3:Buenos Aires Using the Printer in a
-2: Network Environ-
-1:Cape Verde ment
Date Format yyyy/mm/dd Sets the display format for the date.
dd/mm/yyyy Chapter 6
Troubleshooting
mm/dd/yyyy
Language English*, Français, Deutsch, Italiano, Sets the display format for the date.
Español
Reset MediaType No, Yes Media Configuration Tool can be used to Chapter 7
restore the content of changed settings to Operation of the
their factory defaults. Function Menus
Test Print
Status Print Prints the printer information and setting
values.
Menu Map Prints a list of all the items on the MAIN MENU. Contents
Print Job Log Prints a list of information about printed jobs,
including media size and type, amount of ink
consumed, etc.
1- 29
Nozzle Check Prints the nozzle check pattern. Index
Function Menus
TOP
Media Details Prints a list of media type settings. Chapter 1
Information Basic Procedures
Version Displays the version numbers for the printer
unit and the firmware.
RAM Displays the memory capacity of the printer. Chapter 2
Ext. Interface Displays the name of the interface that can Using a Variety of
be used at the expansion slot. Media
MAC Address Displays the MAC address of the printer in
the network. This menu is displayed only Chapter 3
when the network interface is installed. Printing Methods for
Error Log Displays the most recent error message. Different Objectives
Job Log Displays at the end information about the
print job. Chapter 4
Document Name Displays the name of the document in the Maintaining the
print job. Printer
User Name Displays the job user name.
Page Count Displays the number of pages in the print Chapter 5
job. Using the Printer in a
Network Environ-
Job Status Displays the result of the print job
ment
processing.
Print Start Time Displays the time that the print job was Chapter 6
started. Troubleshooting
Print End Time Displays the time that the print jobs ended.
Print Time Displays the time elapsed for the print job.
Print Size Displays the size of the media used in the Chapter 7
print job. Operation of the
Function Menus
Media Type Displays name of the media type used in the
print job.
Interface Displays the name of the job interface.
Coverage Displays the ink density of each color used in
the job. Contents
Counter
Cut Count Displays the number of cuts by the cutter.
You can reset this counter after the cutter
1- 30
has been replaced. Index
Function Menus
TOP
Sub Menus
Chapter 1
Menu Item Setting Values Function Basic Procedures
Ink: Displays in the center the ink capacity in 7

steps (100%, 80%, 60%, 40%, 20%, 0%)
and no ink. Chapter 2
Using a Variety of
Media
100% 80% 60% 40% 20% 0%
(100~90%) (90~70%) (70~50%) (50~30%) (30~6.9%) (6.9~0%) Chapter 3
Displays in seven levels the capacity of ink Different Objectives
that the maintenance cartridge can still
absorb. Chapter 4
Maintaining the
Printer
~700ml ~600ml ~500ml ~400ml ~300ml ~200ml 200ml~0ml
(7dot) (6dot) (5dot) (4dot) (3dot) (2dot) (1dot)
Chapter 5
Width: X X: Media Width The width of the media is shown on the top Using the Printer in a
Y Y: Media Type line, and the type of media is shown on the Network Environ-
bottom line. ment
Remaining: Xm X: Roll Remains When the roll media supply detection is On, Chapter 6
YY Printable Y: Sheets printable with remaining this displays the length of the media that Troubleshooting
ink. remains on the roll. Also, while the ink
remains alert is displayed the number of
sheets that can be printed is also displayed. Chapter 7
Head Height X X: Current printhead position (L, M, H) When the Head Ht. Wrning is On, an alert is Operation of the
Best Head Hght Y Y: Best position for media (L, M, H) issued if the current height of the printhead is Function Menus
lower than the ideal height for the media.
Contents
1- 31 Index
Printer Driver
TOP
Printer Driver Chapter 1

Basic Procedures
The computer uses the printer driver to send the print job to
the printer. This section describes the functions of the
printer driver. Chapter 2
Using a Variety of
Media
Printer Driver Features
Banner Printing Chapter 3
The printer driver presents the items that allow you to Printing Methods for
perform the settings for the media type, print quality, page Different Objectives
size, and other important settings. Also, the printer provides
You can make long printouts up to 15.24
a variety of easy-to-use functions which are described meters long for vertical or horizontal Chapter 4
below. For more details about operation procedures, please Maintaining the
banners for hanging (18 m with Mac OS X Printer
refer to Chapter 3 “Printing Methods for Different or later). (→ P.3-30, P.3-94)
Objectives” and the printer online Help.
Chapter 5
Network Environ-
ment
Enlarged/ Chapter 6
Reduced Troubleshooting
Printing
Borderless You can print and have the image
Printing automatically enlarged or reduced to fit on Chapter 7
the width of the media on the roll. You can Operation of the
make prints easily that fill the entire width Function Menus
The printer can do borderless printing at of the media. (→ P.3-6, P.3-65)
the four edges of the media as shown in
the photo. (→ P.3-13, P.3-77)
Contents
1- 32 Index
Printer Driver
TOP
Chapter 1
Basic Procedures
Multiple Page
Printing Chapter 2
Using a Variety of
You can reduce the size of the image and Preview Display Media
print multiple copies on one sheet. Use
this feature to save paper when you need Displays a graphic representation of what
to only confirm the content. Chapter 3
the printout will look like by showing the Printing Methods for
(→ P.3-24, P.3-89) effects of the printer driver settings. This Different Objectives
allows you to confirm what the print job
will look like before you print it.
(→ P.3-5, P.3-64) Chapter 4
Maintaining the
Printer
Chapter 5
Poster Printing Using the Printer in a
Color Network Environ-
Adjustment ment
You enlarge an image and have it print in
sections on several sheets. This is Chapter 6
convenient when you need to paste Troubleshooting
You can use the printer driver to adjust the
together sheets to form one large poster. tones of the colors in your printed
(→ P.3-26, P.3-92) materials. (→ P.3-42, P.3-107)
Chapter 7
Operation of the
Function Menus
Printing with Custom Sizes

Watermarks
Contents
You can stamp your printouts with You an register custom sizes for paper
watermarks or transparent overlays. and other media. (→ P.3-51, P.3-121)
(→ P.3-28)
1- 33 Index
Printer Driver
TOP
Chapter 1
Basic Procedures
Default POP Ad Poster Photo Photo Long CAD
Settings (from digital (from Format
camera) scanner) (Banner)
Print
Preferences Settings that match the purpose of the
Chapter 2
document are registered. You can easily Using a Variety of
perform print jobs that meet the purpose Media
of the job. Also, you can register the
content of the settings under a name that
you give it. (→ P.3-2, P.3-59) Chapter 3
Printhead Printhead Adjusting

Chapter 4
Cleaning Adjustment Line Feed Maintaining the
Printer
Maintenance Chapter 5
Photo Black Matte Black
Network Environ-
ment
Nozzle check pattern prints, printhead
cleanings, printhead adjustment, and feed Chapter 6
adjustments can all be performed on the Troubleshooting
computer screen.
(→ P.4-36, P.4-38, P.4-40, P.4-42)
Chapter 7
Operation of the
Function Menus
Contents
1- 34 Index
Printer Driver
TOP
Main Sheet Standard:

Chapter 1
The Main sheet provides the following settings. These settings are best for printing
Basic Procedures
documents that contain text, images,
and graphics mixed together.
POP Ad:
Best selection for printing sharp, bright Chapter 2
posters for store advertising. Using a Variety of
Poster: Media
Best selection for printing a photograph
centered in a poster. Chapter 3
Photograph Printing Methods for
(captured with digital camera): Different Objectives
Print Best for printing photographs taken with
Preferences a digital camera.
Photographs (captured with a scanner): Chapter 4
Maintaining the
Best selection when you need faithful
Printer
reproduction of color photos captured
with a scanner.
Long Format (Banner): Chapter 5
Best for long print jobs with mixed text Using the Printer in a
and illustrations in hanging vertical or Network Environ-
horizontal banners. ment
CAD: Chapter 6
Best choice when you want to print fine, Troubleshooting
sharp lines in architectural or
engineering plans.
Use this setting to set the paper or
Chapter 7
media type. A print job is performed to Operation of the
match the special characteristics of the Function Menus
Media Type
media. If this setting does not match the
type of media loaded in the printer, this
will cause poor print quality.
Contents
1- 35 Index
Printer Driver
TOP
High: Color:
This print mode places priority on Uses all the inks to print the job in color.
Chapter 1
quality. Monochrome (Photo):
Basic Procedures
Standard: Provides stable monochrome photo
Prints the printout with normal quality. printing with minimal tone change and
Draft: enables detailed adjustment of gray
Print Quality This print mode places priority on scale gradations and color tones. Chapter 2
speed. Monochrome: Using a Variety of
Custom Settings: Color Mode Converts all print data to grayscale and Media
The job is printed with the processing prints using only the black ink.
method selected by the user. The Solid Color: Chapter 3
Highest selection prints with the best Solid colors are printed differently so Printing Methods for
possible quality. they stand out, light color lines print Different Objectives
With Print Quality selected under sharp.
Custom Settings, the processing Black Only:
All areas other than white are printed in Chapter 4
methods for Print Quality, Resolution, Maintaining the
Enhance Text With Photos, and black.
Set Printer
Halftones can be set. The items that Manual Allows manual adjustment of color
can be selected and their settings are Color balance, saturation, brightness, and
different, depending on the media type Settings contrast. Chapter 5
and ink type. Using the Printer in a
Open Preview After executing the print job, check the Network Environ-
When Print Job image of the on the screen and then ment
Starts execute the print.
Follow the procedure below to start the Chapter 6
Status Monitor Troubleshooting
Status Monitor.
Displays the version number of the
Version Info.
printer driver.
Chapter 7
Returns the settings on the sheets to
Defaults Operation of the
their initial (default) settings. Function Menus
Contents
1- 36 Index
Printer Driver
TOP
Enlarged/ Allows you to enlarge or reduce printing.
Page Setup Sheet Reduced You can select one of the following
Chapter 1
The Page Setup sheet provides the following settings. Printing methods to do this.
Basic Procedures
Automatically sets the enlargement/
Fit Media
reduction proportionally to match the
Size
size selected for the Media Size.
Chapter 2
Automatically sets the enlargement/ Using a Variety of
Fit Roll
reduction proportionally to match the Media
Paper Width
size selected for the Roll Paper Width.
Allows you to scale the size of the image
Scaling Chapter 3
manually in the range 5% to 600%. Printing Methods for
Allows you to specify the actual size of Different Objectives
Media Size
the media where the job will print.
Allows you to select either portrait or Chapter 4
Orientation
landscape printing. Maintaining the
Rotate Page 90 Automatically rotates the image 90 Printer
degrees degrees when print job would result in a
(Conserve printout with the length smaller than the Chapter 5
Paper) width. This saves paper. Using the Printer in a
Specifies whether roll media, roll media Network Environ-
Media Source
Sets the size of the page for the print (banner), or cut sheets will be used. ment
Page Size
data. Roll Paper Specifies the width of the roll paper to be Chapter 6
Prints the image with no margin at the Width used. Troubleshooting
Borderless four edges of the sheet. There are Specifies whether the sheet is cut after
Printing limitations on the width and type of Auto Cut...
printing.
media. (→ P.2-4, P.3-13, P.3-77) Allows you to define free sizes other Chapter 7
Size Options than the standard sizes so you can print Operation of the
do long prints. Function Menus
Contents
1- 37 Index
Printer Driver
TOP
When the image to be printed is smaller
Layout Sheet No Spaces at
than the media, you can set the printer it
Top or Bottom Chapter 1
The Print Layout sheet provides the following settings. does not feed and there is no margin at
(Conserve Basic Procedures
the top or bottom. This conserves roll
Paper)
paper.
Copies Specifies the number of copies to print.
Chapter 2
If the print results are not what you Using a Variety of
Special Settings expect, you can change how the print Media
job is processed.
Chapter 3
Chapter 4
Maintaining the
Printer
Chapter 5
This feature allows you to print several Network Environ-
pages up on the same sheet or break up ment
Page Layout
an enlarged image by printing it over Chapter 6
several sheets for a large poster. Troubleshooting
Overlays a watermark on the printed
image. You can freely make your own
watermarks (text, text enclosed in
Watermark Chapter 7
boxes, transparent text) positioned
Operation of the
freely on the page, give them a name, Function Menus
and register them.
When the image to be printed is smaller
Print Centered than the sheet, you can print the image
centered so the margins are even.
Rotate 180 This feature rotates the image 180
Contents
degrees degrees.
1- 38 Index
Printer Driver
TOP
Maintenance Sheet
Chapter 1
The Maintenance sheet provides the following settings. Basic Procedures
Chapter 2
Using a Variety of
Media
Chapter 3
Chapter 4
Maintaining the
Printer
Chapter 5
Network Environ-
ment
Open the Status Monitor and display the
Utility sheet. This allows you to perform Chapter 6
nozzle check pattern prints, printhead Troubleshooting
Utility cleaning, printhead position adjustment,
and feed adjustment.
The Status Print item is on the
Chapter 7
Information tab of the Status Monitor. Operation of the
Use this setting to set the type of black Function Menus
Update Ink ink. Click the Acquire Status button to
Information set the printer to operate with the black
ink tank mounted in the printer.
Contents
1- 39 Index
Printing
TOP
Printing Chapter 1
Basic Procedures
Follow the procedure below to start a print job. Operating the Printer
Printing From Windows

1 In the software application, select Print from Chapter 2
Using a Variety of
the File menu. Media
To print a job from a Windows software application, use the
Print command in the File menu.
Chapter 3
z The Windows printer driver for this printer can be used
with Windows Server 2003, Windows XP, Windows Chapter 4
2000, Windows Me, Windows 98, and Windows NT Maintaining the
Printer
4.0. The printer driver is not compatible with Windows
95. (→ Quick Start Guide)
z Before you start a print job on the computer, close any Chapter 5
software applications running in the background. The Print window opens. Network Environ-
2
Another program running in the background could ment
break the flow of print data and temporarily stop the Make sure the name of the printer is Chapter 6
printer or cause poor print quality. displayed in the Select Printer box, perform Troubleshooting
the settings for the Page Range and
Note Number of Copies, then click the Print
z For more details about how to use the printer driver, button. Chapter 7
please refer to Chapter 3 “Printing Methods for Operation of the
Function Menus
Different Objectives”.
Contents
1- 40 Index
Printing
TOP
On the Main and Page Setup sheets, select the
Media Type, Media Source, Print Quality, Color
Chapter 1
Settings, and Scaling settings for the print job.
Basic Procedures
Chapter 2
Using a Variety of
Media
Chapter 3
Chapter 4
Maintaining the
Printer
Chapter 5
The print job starts. Network Environ-
ment
Important Chapter 6
z As soon as each sheet prints, remove it from the Troubleshooting
output stacker.
Note Chapter 7
Operation of the
z If the printer estimates that there is not enough ink Function Menus
available to perform a very long print or print several
copies of the same document, it will issue the “Not
Enough Ink” alert on the operation panel. In this case,
replace the ink tank where the ink supply is low and
print again. However, if you reinstall and use an ink
Contents
tank that is nearly empty this could cause print quality
to deteriorate. Never try to reinstall an ink tank once
you see the mark in the ink level display.
1- 41 Index
Printing
TOP
Printing from a Macintosh 1 From the Apple menu, select Chooser.

Chapter 1
To print a job from a Macintosh software application, first Basic Procedures
select the printer then use the Print command in the File
menu.
Chapter 2
Using a Variety of
Important Media
z Before you start a print job on the computer, close any
software applications running in the background.
Chapter 3
Another program running in the background could
break the flow of print data and temporarily stop the 2 Click the GARO Printer Driver icon in the Printing Methods for
printer or cause poor print quality. list on the left, then in the right list under
Destination select the name of the Chapter 4
Note connected printer. Maintaining the
Printer
z For more details about how to use the printer driver, Select the appropriate setting for the output
please refer to the online Help of the printer driver. destination: USB for a USB connection, IEEE1394
Chapter 5
for a FireWire connection, AppleTalk for a network
Selecting the Printer connection, or IP Print or IP Print (Auto).
Network Environ-
z For Mac OS 8.6/9.x ment
If you are using Mac OS 8.6 or Mac OS 9.x, select the Chapter 6
printer with the Chooser. This printer will not be dis- Troubleshooting
played in the list if it is not switched on, or if the printer
cable is disconnected. Start the print job after you con-
firm that the printer is in working order. Chapter 7
Operation of the
Function Menus
Note
z You may not be able to share the printer with a USB
connection. In such a case, connect the printer directly
to the computer through its USB or IEEE1394 port Contents
(option). If you want to share the printer, perform the
print job from a Windows computer.
1- 42 Index
Printing
TOP
z For Mac OS X
Important If you are using Mac OS X, user the printer setting utility Chapter 1
z If the printer is connected to a network, make sure that to select the printer from the Print Center. This printer will Basic Procedures
Active is selected for AppleTalk. not be displayed in the list if it is not switched on, or if the
z The network interface card used with this printer is not printer cable is disconnected. Start the print job after you
set before shipping for use with AppleTalk. On the confirm that the printer is in working order. Chapter 2
printer operation panel, select Interface Setup > Using a Variety of
The example here describes Mac OS X Ver. 10.3. The Media
AppleTalk > On. (→ P.5-30) icon name and graphic may be different for other ver-
z For an IP print connection, register the IP address sions.
under Registering IP Address and then select the Chapter 3
name of the printer under IP Print.
1 Select Finder, then select Utility or
3 Close the Chooser window and click the OK

Applications from the Go menu.
Chapter 4
button in the message window. Maintaining the
Printer
Chapter 5
Network Environ-
2
ment
Open the Utilities folder then open Printer Chapter 6
This completes the selection of the printer.
Setup Utility (Print Center). Troubleshooting
Chapter 7
Operation of the
Function Menus
Contents
1- 43 Index
Printing
TOP
3 If the name of the printer is not in the Printer
List, click the Add icon. Important Chapter 1
z For the AppleTalk connection, confirm these settings: Basic Procedures
If the printer is already displayed, go to Step 4.
System Preferences > Network > AppleTalk > Make
AppleTalk Active.
z The network interface card used with this printer is not Chapter 2
set before shipping for use with AppleTalk. On the Using a Variety of
printer operation panel, select Interface Settings > Media
AppleTalk > On. (→ P.5-30)
4
Chapter 3
In the connection menu select the Note
connection destination for the printer, select z This printer can be connected and operated with
the name of the printer from the list, then Zeroconf of Mac OS X. If you are using Mac OS X Ver. Chapter 4
click the Add button. 10.2.5 or later with a network connection using Maintaining the
Zeroconf functions selected on the Connection menu, Printer
Select the appropriate setting for the connection
destination: USB for a USB connection, Canon then you can select the name of this printer.
FireWire (GARO) for a IEEE1394 connection, or If you are using Mac OS 8.6, 9.x with the Canon Chapter 5
Canon IP (GARO), Zeroconf or AppleTalk for a imagePROGRAF printer driver for Macintosh installed, Using the Printer in a
you can also use the Zeroconf function to connect the Network Environ-
network connection.
ment
printer.
z This printer can be connected and operated with Chapter 6
Canon IP (GARO). Select Canon IP (GARO) on the Troubleshooting
Connection menu then enter the IP address and
printer name of this printer
z If the name of the printer is not displayed, check the Chapter 7
Operation of the
printer connection cable, and make sure that the Function Menus
printer and network device are both switched on.
Contents
1- 44 Index
Printing
TOP
Operating the Printer If you are using Mac OS X, set the Copies&Pages
panel and the Main panel.
1
Chapter 1
In the software application select Print from
the File menu. 3 Click the Print button.
Basic Procedures
The print job starts.

Chapter 2
Using a Variety of
Important Media
z As soon as each sheet prints, remove it from the
output stacker. Chapter 3
Note Different Objectives
z Before you start printing a long sheet or multiple
The Print window appears. copies, you should always check the ink supply levels Chapter 4
of the ink tanks. To confirm the ink supply level of the Maintaining the
2
Printer
Check the Printer box and make sure that ink tanks, on the Main panel click the Printer
the name of the printer is displayed. On the information button to display the levels. However, if
Chapter 5
Main panel select the settings for the Page, you reinstall an ink tank that is nearly out of ink and
Copies, Media Type, Media Source, Print use it this could cause the print quality to deteriorate. Network Environ-
Quality, and other settings. Do not re-install the ink tank marked in the ink supply ment
level display.
Chapter 6
Troubleshooting
Chapter 7
Operation of the
Function Menus
Contents
1- 45 Index
Canceling a Print Job
TOP
Canceling a Print Job Chapter 1

Follow this procedure to cancel a print job. 4 If the Data lamp is off and you cannot cancel
Basic Procedures
the print job, click the GARO Status Monitor

icon on the right end of the taskbar to open, Chapter 2
Canceling a Print Job from Windows and then on the Printer Status sheet select Using a Variety of
the print job that you want to cancel, then Media
1 In the Printers folder, double-click the icon

press the Cancel Job button.
Chapter 3
for the printer. Printing Methods for
2
Click the name of the job that you want to
cancel, click Printer in the menu bar and Chapter 4
Maintaining the
select Cancel All Documents. Printer
The print job is deleted.
Chapter 5
Network Environ-
ment
Chapter 6
Note Troubleshooting
z You can also cancel a print job in progress, or a job
3 If the print in progress display on the printer waiting to be printed, by selecting and canceling each
job on the on the Job sheet. Chapter 7
does not go off and online lamp is flashing, Operation of the
5
press and hold the Stop button for 1 sec. Function Menus
If the GARO Status Monitor is not installed,
Data
Information Power hold down the Power button for 1 second or
Message
Cleaning
(3 sec.)
more until the Shut Down.. is displayed,
Stop/Eject
(1 sec.) Online then switch the printer power off and on. Contents
Offline All of the print data currently processing in the printer
Menu
is lost after the printer is switched off. Any print job
The print job in progress is canceled. required must be restarted.
1- 46 Index
TOP
Canceling a Print Job from Macintosh 2 Select the print job to cancel, then click the
Printing Paused button. Chapter 1
The procedure to cancel a print job is different, depending Basic Procedures
on whether the job is printing in the background or the
foreground.
Chapter 2
Using a Variety of
Note Media
z On Mac OS X all jobs print in the background. Printing
cannot be performed in the foreground.
Chapter 3
Canceling a Background Print Job Different Objectives
During background printing you can check the status of
print jobs and cancel them. Follow this procedure to can- Chapter 4
cel a print job. Maintaining the
Printer
z For Mac OS 8.6/9.x The print queue (print processing) is suspended and
the Sending status display switches to Send. While
1 In the GARO Printer Extra folder installed

the print queue is paused, a red dot is displayed on
the right.
Chapter 5
Network Environ-
on the hard disk, click the GARO Once the printer enters the Ready to Send mode, ment
Printmonitor icon. select the Job icon is marked with the icon, and
Chapter 6
then press the Printing Paused button to delete the Troubleshooting
job. Continue from Step 4.
Chapter 7
Operation of the
Function Menus
Contents
1- 47 Index
TOP
3 With the job selected for deletion, click the
Printing Paused button again. Important Chapter 1
z After you have paused printing, you must select Basic Procedures
Resume Printing. Printing cannot be done while the
print queue is paused (with the red dot displayed).
5
Chapter 2
If the print in progress display on the printer Using a Variety of
Media
does not go off and online lamp is flashing,
press and hold the Stop button for 1 sec. Chapter 3
Information Power
Data Different Objectives
Message
Cleaning
(3 sec.)
Stop/Eject
(1 sec.) Online
Chapter 4
Offline
Menu
Maintaining the
The print job is deleted. Printer
The print job in progress is canceled.
4 Select Resume Printing from the File menu.
6 If the Data lamp goes off and you cannot
Chapter 5
Network Environ-
cancel the print job, hold down the Power ment
button for at least 1 second, release it after
Chapter 6
the Shut down.. message appears, then Troubleshooting
after the printer switches off, switch it on
again.
Chapter 7
All of the print data currently processing in the printer Operation of the
is lost after the printer is switched off. Any print job Function Menus
required must be restarted.
Contents
The printer re-enters print mode and is ready for
operation.
1- 48 Index
TOP
z Mac OS X 3 Select the name of the printer from the
The example here describes Mac OS X Ver. 10.3. The Printer List, then select Show Jobs from Chapter 1
icon name and graphic may be different for other ver- the Printers menu. Basic Procedures
sions.
1 Select Finder, then select Utilities or Chapter 2

Using a Variety of
Applications from the Go menu. Media
Chapter 3
The queue list for the printer is displayed.
4 Select the print job to cancel, then select

Chapter 4
Maintaining the
2 Open the Utilities folder then open Printer

Delete Job from the Jobs menu. Printer
Setup Utility (Print Center). Chapter 5

Network Environ-
ment
Chapter 6
Troubleshooting
Chapter 7
Operation of the
Function Menus
The print job in progress is canceled.
Important
z A print job that has already been sent to the printer Contents
cannot be canceled. If you want to cancel other
remaining jobs, cancel them with the GARO
Printmonitor.
1- 49 Index
TOP
z Select the name of the printer in the Printer Setup Canceling a Foreground Print Job
Utility (Print Center), select the name of the printer, If you are printing in the foreground with Mac OS 8.6/9.x, Chapter 1
click the Set icon, then open GARO Printmonitor for a Basic Procedures
a print processing dialog box remains open while the job
USB, FireWire, AppleTalk or Canon IP (GARO) prints. Follow this procedure to cancel a print job.
connection, connection, or open the Remote UI for a
Zeroconf connection.
Select the print job to delete, then click the Print 1 When the print-in-progress dialog box opens, Chapter 2
Using a Variety of
Cancel button to cancel the job. press and hold down the Command key and Media
press the period (.) key.
5 If the print in progress display on the printer Chapter 3
does not go off and online lamp is flashing, Different Objectives
press and hold the Stop button for 1 sec.
Information Power
The print job is canceled. Chapter 4
2
Data
Message
Maintaining the
Cleaning
Printer
(3 sec.)
Stop/Eject
(1 sec.) Online
If the print in progress display on the printer
does not go off and online lamp is flashing,
Offline
Chapter 5
Menu
press and hold the Stop button for 1 sec. Using the Printer in a
The print job in progress is canceled. Network Environ-
Information Power
ment
6
Data
Message
Cleaning
If the Data lamp goes off and you cannot Chapter 6

(3 sec.)
Stop/Eject
(1 sec.) Online
Troubleshooting
cancel the print job, hold down the Power Offline
button for at least 1 second to display Shut Menu
Down..., then after the printer switches off, The print job in progress is canceled. Chapter 7
switch it on again. Operation of the
Function Menus
All of the print data currently processing in the printer
required must be restarted.
Contents
1- 50 Index
TOP
3 If the Data lamp goes off and you cannot
cancel the print job, hold down the Power Chapter 1
button for at least 1 second to display Shut Basic Procedures
Down.., then after the printer switches off,
switch it on again.
Chapter 2
Information Power Using a Variety of
Data
Message
Shut Down..
Please Wait.. Media
Cleaning
(3 sec.)
Stop/Eject
(1 sec.) Online
Chapter 3
Offline
Menu Printing Methods for
All of the print data currently processing in the printer
Chapter 4
required must be restarted. Maintaining the
Printer
Chapter 5
Network Environ-
ment
Chapter 6
Troubleshooting
Chapter 7
Operation of the
Function Menus
Contents
1- 51 Index
Options
TOP
Options Chapter 1
Basic Procedures
The following options are provided for this printer. Roll Holder Sets
Stand This set contains the roll holder and stoppers. To make
proper use of rolls of different media types and widths, it Chapter 2
(Provided with the printer in the U.S.A.) is convenient to have several stoppers and holders on Using a Variety of
This stand is designed to support the W6400 Printer. The Media
hand. Two types are available: 2-inch (provided on the
output stacker designed for this printer is provided. printer) and 3-inch.
z Print Stand ST-23 z Roll Holder Set (For 2” Tubes) RH2-23 Chapter 3
Chapter 4
Maintaining the
Printer
z Roll Holder Set (For 3” Tubes) RH3-23
Chapter 5
Network Environ-
Network Interface Board ment
The interface board that allows you add a LAN port.
Chapter 6
z Canon Network Interface Board NB-15FB Troubleshooting
Chapter 7
Operation of the
IEEE1394 Expansion Board Function Menus
This board provides the IEEE1394 (FireWire) interface.
z IEEE1394 Expansion Board EB-04
Contents
1- 52 Index
Consumables
TOP
Consumables Chapter 1
Basic Procedures
The following consumables are available for this printer. z Newsprint for Proofing
Proof:
You should have consumables on hand before they run out. z Proofing Paper
Purchase consumables at the dealer where you purchased z Plain paper Chapter 2
the printer. Using a Variety of
z Plain Paper (High Quality)
Media
z Recycled Coated Paper
Print Media Generic: z Coated paper
The following types of media can be used with this Chapter 3
z Heavyweight coated paper Printing Methods for
printer. z Extra Heavyweight Coated Paper Different Objectives
z Colored Coated Paper
z Type
z Roll Media Sizes Chapter 4
z Glossy Photo Paper Maintaining the
Printer
z SemiGlos Photo Paper
24” (609.6mm), ISO A1 (594.0mm), JIS
Photo: z Heavyweight Glossy Photo Paper B2 (515.0mm), ISO A2 (420.0mm), 16”
z Heavyweight SemiGlos Photo Width: Chapter 5
(406.4mm), 14” (355.6mm), ISO A3 Using the Printer in a
Paper (297.0mm), 10” (254.0mm) Network Environ-
z Premium Matte Paper ment
Roll diameter: Less than 150 mm (5.1 in.)
z Fine Art Photo Chapter 6
z Fine Art Heavyweight Photo Media core Troubleshooting
Art: inside 2”, 3”
z Fine Art Textured
diameter:
z Canvas SemiGlos
z Japanese Paper Washi Print surface: Front side Chapter 7
Operation of the
z Synthetic Paper z Cut Sheets Function Menus
z Adhesive Synthetic Paper
Signs: Size Photo: 203.2 x 254.0 mm to ARCH D 609.6 x 914.4
z Backlit Film
mm
z Flame-Registrant cloth
z CAD Plain Paper Contents
CAD: z CAD Tracing Paper
z CAD Translucent Matte Film
1- 53 Index
Consumables
TOP
Maintenance Cartridge
Note The maintenance cartridge (number listed below) is Chapter 1
z For more details about media sizes, please refer to replaceable. Basic Procedures
Chapter 2 “Media You Can Use” (→ P.2-2). z Maintenance cartridge MC-01
z The quality of media varies with the manufacturer. To
purchase print media, contact the dealer where you Chapter 2
purchased the printer. Using a Variety of
Media
Replaceable Ink Tanks
The following six types of replaceable ink tanks are used Chapter 3
in this printer. Printing Methods for
z Ink Tanks for the W6400
Note
Chapter 4
z For more details about how to replace the
Maintaining the
maintenance cartridge, see Chapter 4 “Replacing the Printer
Maintenance Cartridge” (→ P.4-16)
Yellow Ink BCI-1451Y Replaceable Printhead Chapter 5

Magenta Ink BCI-1431M The product number of the printhead that can be used on Network Environ-
Photo Magenta Ink BCI-1431PM the printer is: ment
Cyan Ink BCI-1431C z Printhead BC-1350
Photo Cyan Ink BCI-1431PC Chapter 6
Black Ink BCI-1431BK Troubleshooting
Matte Black Ink BCI-1451MBK
Note Chapter 7
Operation of the
z For more details about how to replace the ink tanks, Function Menus
see Chapter 4 “Replacing Ink Tanks” (→ P.4-2)
z Hereafter, “Photo Black Ink” is used to distinguish Note
“Black Ink BCI-1431 BK” from the matte black ink. z For more details about how to replace the printhead,
see Chapter 4 “Replacing the Printhead” Contents
(→ P.4-23)
1- 54 Index
Consumables
TOP
Cutter Blade
The product number of the cutter blade that can be used Chapter 1
on the printer is: Basic Procedures
z Cutter Blade CT-02
Chapter 2
Using a Variety of
Media
Chapter 3
Note Printing Methods for
z For more details about how to replace the cutter blade, Different Objectives
see Chapter 4 “Replacing the Cutter Blade” (→ P.4-29)
Chapter 4
Maintaining the
Printer
Chapter 5
Network Environ-
ment
Chapter 6
Troubleshooting
Chapter 7
Operation of the
Function Menus
Contents
1- 55 Index
Specifications
TOP
Specifications Chapter 1
Basic Procedures
W6400
Print Features Chapter 2
Print Method Serial Bubble Jet Using a Variety of
Print Modes Highest (Custom Settings) High, Standard, Draft Media
Max. Resolution 2400 x 1200 dpi
Interface Chapter 3
1 Different Objectives
USB Interface
(If the computer port, operating system, or USB cable does not support USB 2.0 High Speed
(USB 2.0 Standard)
Mode, you will not be able to use High Speed Mode.) *1
Network Interface Chapter 4
Option*2 Maintaining the
(10base-T/100base-TX)
Printer
IEEE1394 Interface
Option*2
(IEEE1394.a standard)
USB Interface: USB Standard Series B Receptacle Chapter 5
USB Interface Recommended Printer Cable: Network Environ-
Material: AWG28 or above ment
Type: Twisted-pair sealed cable (high speed mode compliant)
Length: max. 5.0 m (4.9 yd.) Chapter 6
Connector: USB Standard Series B Plug Troubleshooting
Interface Connector
IEEE1394 Interface (option): IEEE1394-1995 Standard 6-pin (without feed)
IEEE1394 Interface Recommended Printer Cable
Material: AWG28 (signal) AWG22 (power) Chapter 7
Type: Dual twisted pair shielded cable (100, 200, 400 Mbps mode compliant) Operation of the
Length: max. 4.5 m (4.9 yd.) Function Menus
Connector: IEEE1394-1995 Compliant 6-pin
Printhead Replaceable Printhead BC-1350
Nozzle gaps 1200 dpi (600 dpi x 2 lines)
Number of nozzles 1280 nozzles x 6 colors Contents
1- 56 Index
Specifications
TOP
W6400
Replaceable Ink Tanks Chapter 1
Yellow Ink Replaceable BCI-1451Y Basic Procedures
Magenta Ink Replaceable BCI-1431M
Photo Magenta Ink Replaceable BCI-1431PM
Cyan Ink Replaceable BCI-1431C
Photo Cyan Ink Replaceable BCI-1431PC Chapter 2
Photo Black Ink*3 Replaceable BCI-1431BK Using a Variety of
Matte Black Ink*3 Replaceable BCI-1451MBK Media
Ink type Pigment ink
Ink tank capacity 130 ml (each color) Chapter 3
Print Media Different Objectives
Media Width Range: 203.2 to 609.6 mm (min. to max.)
Roll: 18 m
Maximum length Chapter 4
Cut sheet: 1400 mm Maintaining the
Thickness 70 ~ 800 µm Printer
Plain Paper, CAD Plain Paper, Plain Paper (High Quality), Recycled Coated Paper, Coated Paper,
Heavyweight Coated Paper, Premium Matte Paper, Extra Heavyweight Coated Paper, Glossy Photo Paper, Chapter 5
SemiGlos Photo Paper, Heavyweight Glossy Photo Paper, Heavyweight SemiGlos Photo Paper, Synthetic
Type Paper, Adhesive Synthetic Paper, Backlit Film, Flame-Resistant Cloth, Proofing Paper 2, Newsprint for
Network Environ-
Proofing*4 , Fine Art Photo, Fine Art Heavyweight Photo, Fine Art Textured, Canvas SemiGlos, Japanese ment
Paper Washi, Colored Coated Paper, CAD Tracing Paper, CAD Translucent Matte Film, Special 1 to 5
Normal Size: Printable Area Roll Paper: Top 5 mm, Bottom 5 mm, Left/Right: 5 mm Chapter 6
Cut Sheet: Top 5 mm, Bottom 23 mm, Left/Right: 5 mm Troubleshooting
Media Size and Print
Guaranteed Print Area Roll Paper:, Cut Sheet: Top 20 mm, Bottom 23 mm, Left/Right: 5 mm
Area*5
Borderless Size: Printable Area Roll Paper: Top 0 mm, Bottom 0 mm, Left/Right: 0 mm
Oversize*6 : Printable Area Roll Paper:, Cut Sheet: Top 0 mm, Bottom 0 mm, Left/Right: 0 mm Chapter 7
Operation of the
Compatible Media Function Menus
254.0mm, 355.6mm, 406.4mm, 515.0mm, 594.0mm, 609.6mm
Widths for Borderless
Output Stacker Capacity 1 sheet
Main Unit
Power source AC100V ~ 240V 1.3A 50/60 Hz Contents
Max. 160 W*7 (same as using Network Interface Board)
Power Consumption Sleep Mode: 100-115V: Less than 6W (same as using Network Interface Board)
(Operation) 220-240V: Less than 9W
Power off : Less than 1 W*8 Index
1- 57
Specifications
TOP
W6400
Noise (Operation) Approximately 50 dB (A) or less (less than 6.5 Bels) Chapter 1
Ideal operating environment 15 ~ 30 °C (59 ~ 86 °F), 10 ~ 80 % RH with no condensation Basic Procedures
Operating Environment 5 ~ 35 °C (41~ 95 °F), 10~90 % RH with no condensation
Dimensions (w x d x h)
Printer only 1,200 mm x 569 mm x 484 mm (47.3 in x 22.4 in x 19.1 in) Chapter 2
Using a Variety of
Printer + Stand 1,200 mm x 752 mm x 1,097 mm (47.3 in x 29.6 in x 43.2 in) Media
Weight (including printhead, ink tanks)
Printer only Approximately 40kg Chapter 3
Printer + Stand Approximately 49kg Printing Methods for
*1. The following environment is required to use the High Speed mode of USB 2.0.
• Computer: A computer that supports USB 2.0 High Speed mode.
• OS: Windows Server 2003, Windows XP, or Windows 2000, or MacOS X Ver. 10.3.3 or later. Chapter 4
• USB 2.0 Driver: Microsoft USB 2.0 driver (you can obtain the Microsoft USB 2.0 driver from the Windows Update or Maintaining the
Service Pack). Printer
• USB Cable: A USB cable certified for USB 2.0.
• Canon approved USB 2.0 interfaces (USB drivers confirmed for use with Microsoft operating systems): Chapter 5
• Adaptec USB 2.0 expansion card USB2CONNECT3100 Using the Printer in a
• Adaptec USB 2.0 expansion card USB2CONNECT5100 Network Environ-
• Adaptec USB 2.0 expansion card USB2CONNECT2000L ment
• Intel 845G chip set
• SiS SiS740 chip set Chapter 6
If you have any questions about a chip set listed above, please contact the manufacturer. Troubleshooting
*2. One card can be installed, either the network interface board or the IEEE1394 board.
*3. Either Photo Black Ink or Matte Black Ink can be installed.
*4. Use the RIP software application (sold separately) to print on Newsprint for Proofing. Chapter 7
*5. Cannot use the Borderless Size or Oversize items to print on some media types and sizes. Operation of the
*6. With Oversize selected, load roll media larger than the selected Media Size: roll media 10 mm wider and 10 mm taller, Function Menus
a cut sheet 10 mm wider and 20 mm taller.
*7. This may differ with some optional boards installed.
*8. The printer consumes a small amount of electrical power, even while it is switched off. Unplug the printer from its pow-
er source to cut off power consumption completely.
Contents
• These specifications are subject to change for improvements.
• The above specifications may vary for different operating environments.
1- 58 Index
Basic Environmental Performance
TOP
Basic Environmental Performance Chapter 1

Basic Procedures
W6400
Printer
Chapter 2
Power Consumption (Operation) Using a Variety of
100-115V: Less than 6W (same as using Network Interface Board) Media
Energy Save mode (Sleep Mode)
220-240V: Less than 9W
Power switch off (with power plug Chapter 3
Less than 1 W
connected) Printing Methods for
Power Source Efficiency Different Objectives
Printer Weight Approximately 40.0kg
Dimensions (w x d x h) 1,200mm x 569mm x 484mm (47.3 in x 22.4 in x 19.1 in) Chapter 4
Recycling Exterior covers are technically certified as fully recyclable. Maintaining the
Printer
Product Safety
Total Configuration: No special unburnable bromide materials (PBB, PBDE) used.
Chapter 5
Content of Harmful Materials External Cover Plastic: No heavy metals (Pb, Hg, Cr (VI), Cd) or Halogen Using the Printer in a
unburnable materials used. Network Environ-
Noise (Operation) Approximately 50 dB (A) or less (less than 6.5 Bels) ment
External Cover Material Chapter 6
Content of Heavy Metals (Pb, Hg, Troubleshooting
Not Used (Packing Material)
Cr (VI), Cd)
Recycling All containers, packing material recyclable (from April, 2004)
Applicable Standards International Energy Star Program, VCCI (class B) Chapter 7
Operation of the
Function Menus
Contents
1- 59 Index
TOP
Chapter 2 Using a Variety of Media

Chapter 1
Basic Procedures
Media You Can Use ...................................................................................2-2
The Suitable Black Ink for Media ........................................................................... 2-2 Chapter 2
Paper Type ............................................................................................................ 2-4 Using a Variety of
Media Size ........................................................................................................... 2-18 Media
Original data the same as the media ................................................................... 2-20
Handling Paper and Other Print Media ................................................................ 2-25 Chapter 3
Printing with Rolls .....................................................................................2-26 Printing Methods for
Loading Roll Media .............................................................................................. 2-26 Different Objectives
Removing a Roll .................................................................................................. 2-33
Printing with Cut Sheets ...........................................................................2-35 Chapter 4
Loading Cut Sheets ............................................................................................. 2-35 Maintaining the
Removing a Cut Sheet ........................................................................................ 2-39 Printer
Adjusting the Height of the Printhead .......................................................2-40
Adjusting Printhead Height .................................................................................. 2-40
Aligning the Printhead ......................................................................................... 2-42 Chapter 5
Re-adjusting Printhead Height ............................................................................. 2-42
Network Environ-
ment
Chapter 6
Troubleshooting
Chapter 7
Operation of the
Function Menus
Contents
Media You Can Use
TOP
Media You Can Use Chapter 1

Basic Procedures
A variety of media types and sizes can be used with this
printer. The following media can be used with this printer. Caution
z If you print with the black ink that is not suited to the Chapter 2
Important type of media, it may result in unsatisfactory printing Using a Variety of
Media
z Some media require more time for the ink to dry after and foul the media or printer with ink.
printing. After printing please allow the ink to dry
sufficiently before you handle it. Chapter 3
Important Printing Methods for
z With some print media, the hue of some colors may
z To switch the type of black ink, execute Change Bk Different Objectives
change slightly when the ink on the surface of the
Ink Type on the printer operation panel and follow the
media has dried completely.
instructions displayed. You can switch between the Chapter 4
types of black ink, but please remember that every Maintaining the
Note time you switch the black ink tanks the printer Printer
z For details about how to handle and store print media, consumes about 45 ml of black ink and about 15 ml of
please refer to the instructions provided with the the colored inks in total. (→ P.4-47) Chapter 5
packet. Using the Printer in a
Black Ink Types and Characteristics Network Environ-
ment
z Photo Black Ink (BIC-1431 Bk)
The Suitable Black Ink for Media This ink is best for media like glossy and proof media Chapter 6
Troubleshooting
Either one of two types of black ink can be used with this with high-density black on a glossy surface. This ink
can be used to print on most types of media including
printer, Photo Black Ink or Matte Black Ink. The
glossy paper.
characteristics of these two types of ink are different and Chapter 7
z Matte Black Ink (BIC-1451 MBk) Operation of the
best suited for different types of media. Carefully select the
This ink is best for black density on matte or fine art Function Menus
type of black ink you want to use, based on the type of
media, and even plain paper. Do not use matte black
media you use and how often you use it.
ink on media with a glossy surface.
Contents
2- 2 Index
Media You Can Use
TOP
Black Ink Characteristics
Chapter 1
Usable Ink Types Basic Procedures
Print Media Type Photo Matte
Application
Black Ink Black Ink
Glossy Photo Paper Chapter 2
SemiGlos Photo Paper Using a Variety of
Photo Media
Heavyweight Glossy Photo Paper
Heavyweight SemiGlos Photo Paper
Chapter 3
Proofing Paper Printing Methods for
Proof
Newsprint for Proofing Different Objectives
Plain Paper
Plain Paper (High Quality) Chapter 4
Recycled Coated Paper Maintaining the
Generic Coated Paper Printer
Heavyweight Coated Paper
Extra Heavyweight Coated Paper Chapter 5
Colored Coated Paper Using the Printer in a
Premium Matte Paper Network Environ-
ment
Fine Art Photo
Fine Art Heavyweight Photo Chapter 6
Art Troubleshooting
Fine Art Textured
Canvas SemiGlos
Japanese Paper Washi
Synthetic Paper Chapter 7
Adhesive Synthetic Paper Operation of the
Signs Function Menus
Backlit Film
Flame-Resistant Cloth
CAD Plain Paper
CAD CAD Tracing Paper
CAD Translucent Matte Film Contents
:Recommended ink, :Usable ink, :Unusable
2- 3 Index
Media You Can Use
TOP
Describes the Media Type
Paper Type Media Type
setting in the printer driver.
Chapter 1
This section describes the types of media that you can use Roll Paper Width commercially available Basic Procedures
with this printer. To obtain the most recent information about Width media
usable media, contact the dealer where you purchased the : Borderless Printing
printer or Canon service center. Possible Chapter 2
: Left and Right 2-Edge Using a Variety of
The following items are described in the tables. Printer Driver Borderless Borderless Printing Media
Settings : Borderless Printing Not
Note Possible Chapter 3
z For information about media, be sure to read the : Auto Cut Possible Printing Methods for
instructions provided with the media packet and *Borderless printing possible Different Objectives
contact the manufacturer of each media. to all 4 edges.
Auto Cut
: Auto Cut Not Possible Chapter 4
Media Type *Borderless printing possible, Maintaining the
only left to right edge. Printer
Describes the characteristics of each Name of the media type to
Characteristics Operation
media. Media Type appear on the operation Chapter 5
Print Panel Settings Using the Printer in a
Describes print jobs best suited for media. panel display
Application L : Low position Network Environ-
ment
: Indoors OK Printhead M : Center position (Standard)
Indoors
: Indoors NG Optimum H : High position Chapter 6
Height * Press the Information button to display Troubleshooting
: Outdoors OK the appropriate height of the print head.
Display : Outdoors NG
Special notes and precautions are
Outdoors * Perform laminate Comments Chapter 7
described here.
processing before displaying Operation of the
outdoors. Function Menus
: Recommended
Photo Black : Possible
: Not possible
Black Ink Contents
Suitability
: Recommended
Matte Black : Possible
: Not possible
2- 4 Index
Media You Can Use
TOP
Plain paper CAD Plain Paper
Chapter 1
Basic Procedures
Superior yet economical ink-jet paper. Use
for color prints in schools for research
Characteristics presentation, or monochrome prints for Characteristics Superior yet economical ink-jet paper. Chapter 2
Using a Variety of
ceremonies, rallies, etc. It is low cost, so
Media
you can use it for test prints.
Chapter 3
Print Print Printing Methods for
Generic CAD Different Objectives
Application Application
Indoors Indoors
Display Display Chapter 4
Outdoors Outdoors
Maintaining the
Black Ink Photo Black Black Ink Photo Black Printer
Suitability Matte Black Suitability Matte Black
Media Type Plain paper Media Type CAD Plain Paper Chapter 5
Network Environ-
Printer Driver Printer Driver ment
Settings Roll Paper Width 24” Settings Roll Paper Width 24”
Chapter 6
Borderless Printing Borderless Printing Troubleshooting
Auto Cut Auto Cut
Operation Operation
Media Type Plain Paper Media Type CAD Plain Paper Chapter 7
Panel Settings Panel Settings Operation of the
Function Menus
Printhead Printhead
Optimum M Optimum L
Height Height
You can use standard copy machine cut Contents

Comments sheets (64~105 g/m2) in place of plain Comments
paper for the printer.
2- 5 Index
Media You Can Use
TOP
Plain Paper (High Quality) Recycled Coated Paper
Chapter 1
Basic Procedures
High white content makes this plain paper Thin coated paper Ideal for line drawings, Chapter 2
Characteristics Characteristics
comparatively thick. maps, presentation materials. Using a Variety of
Media
Chapter 3
Generic Generic Different Objectives
Indoors Indoors
Outdoors Outdoors
Maintaining the
Plain Paper Recycled Coated Chapter 5
Media Type Media Type
(High Quality) Paper Using the Printer in a
Network Environ-
Chapter 6
Auto Cut Auto Cut
Operation Operation
Media Type Plain Paper HQ Media Type Recycled Coated Chapter 7
Function Menus
Printhead Printhead
Optimum M Optimum M
Height Height
Contents
Comments Comments
2- 6 Index
Media You Can Use
TOP
Coated Paper Heavyweight Coated Paper
Chapter 1
Basic Procedures
Coated paper with a thick paper base. Use
to print full-color images mainly consist of
Thin coated paper Ideal for line drawings, Chapter 2
Characteristics Characteristics graphic images. Ideal for store POP,
maps, presentation materials. Using a Variety of
presentation materials, many other
Media
applications.
Chapter 3
Generic Generic Different Objectives
Indoors Indoors
Outdoors Outdoors
Maintaining the
Heavyweight Coated Chapter 5
Media Type Coated Paper Media Type
Paper Using the Printer in a
Network Environ-
Settings Roll Paper Width 24” Settings Roll Paper Width 24”, A1, B2
Chapter 6
Auto Cut Auto Cut
Operation Operation
Media Type Coated Paper Media Type HW Coated Chapter 7
Function Menus
Printhead Printhead
Optimum M Optimum M
Height Height
Contents
Comments Comments
2- 7 Index
Media You Can Use
TOP
Premium Matte Paper Extra Heavyweight Coated Paper
Chapter 1
High-quality ultraheavyweight matte coated Basic Procedures
paper, the thickest of all Canon's genuine
Matte Papers, which supports the widest
A heavy coating is added to this thick
range of color reproduction, This paper offers Chapter 2
Characteristics Characteristics paper, making it ideal for handling as art
a soft texture free of reflective glare for a Using a Variety of
material and a variety of textures.
tranquil feel. Suitable for wide-ranging Media
applications from Photo/Fine Art to Materials
for Display such as High-Quality Poster/POP. Chapter 3
Art Generic Different Objectives
Indoors Indoors
Outdoors Outdoors
Maintaining the
Premium Matte Extra Heavyweight Chapter 5
Paper Coated Paper Using the Printer in a
Network Environ-
Chapter 6
Auto Cut Auto Cut
Operation Operation
Media Type Premium Matte Media Type Ex HW Coated Chapter 7
Function Menus
Printhead Printhead
Optimum M Optimum M
Height Height
The standard cutter cannot be used to
perform automatic cutting. After printing, Contents
Comments cut the media manually. (→ P.2-34) Comments
The borderless printing is performed on the
left and right edges.
2- 8 Index
Media You Can Use
TOP
Glossy Photo Paper SemiGlos Photo Paper
Chapter 1
Basic Procedures
A glossy photo paper, like that used to
Subdues light reflected from its white
develop silver-halide photos. Ideal when
surface to create a softer effect in its finish.
you want high-quality finish for Chapter 2
Characteristics Characteristics The surface reflects little bright light,
photographs. Processed with resin coat Using a Variety of
making it ideal for show panels,
processing to prevent rippling and ensure Media
presentation materials, POPs, etc.
a flat finish.
Chapter 3
Photo Photo Different Objectives
Indoors Indoors
Outdoors Outdoors
Maintaining the
SemiGlos Photo Chapter 5
Media Type Glossy Photo Paper Media Type
Network Environ-
Settings Roll Paper Width 24”, 14”, 10”, A1, B2 Settings Roll Paper Width 24”, 14”, 10”, A1, B2
Chapter 6
Auto Cut Auto Cut
Operation Operation
Media Type Glossy Photo Media Type Sem-Gl Photo Chapter 7
Function Menus
Printhead Printhead
Optimum M Optimum M
Height Height
After cutting trimming paper, pre-cut paper, After cutting trimming paper, pre-cut paper, Contents
Comments or other such media, remove the sheet Comments or other such media, remove the sheet
manually. manually.
2- 9 Index
Media You Can Use
TOP
Heavyweight Glossy Photo Paper Heavyweight SemiGlos Photo Paper
Chapter 1
Basic Procedures
Subdues light reflected from its white
A glossy photo paper, like that used to
surface to create a softer effect in its finish.
develop silver-halide photos. Processed
The surface reflects little bright light,
with resin coat processing to prevent Chapter 2
Characteristics Characteristics making it ideal for show panels,
rippling and ensure a flat finish. This thick Using a Variety of
presentation materials, POPs, etc. This
paper is similar to the quality of silver Media
thick paper is similar to the quality of silver
halide photographs.
halide photographs.
Chapter 3
Photo Photo Different Objectives
Indoors Indoors
Outdoors Outdoors
Maintaining the
Heavyweight Glossy Heavyweight Chapter 5
Media Type Media Type SemiGlos Photo
Photo Paper Using the Printer in a
Paper Network Environ-
Settings Roll Paper Width 24”
Settings Roll Paper Width 24”
Chapter 6
Borderless Printing Troubleshooting
Borderless Printing
Auto Cut
Auto Cut
Operation
Media Type HW Glossy Photo Operation Chapter 7
Panel Settings Media Type HW SemiGl Photo Operation of the
Panel Settings
Function Menus
Printhead
Optimum M Printhead
Height Optimum M
Height
After cutting trimming paper, pre-cut paper, Contents
Comments or other such media, remove the sheet After cutting trimming paper, pre-cut paper,
manually. Comments or other such media, remove the sheet
manually.
2- 10 Index
Media You Can Use
TOP
Synthetic Paper Adhesive Synthetic Paper
Chapter 1
Basic Procedures
A superior synthetic paper of An economical superior synthetic paper of

polypropylene film for display posters. Can polypropylene film for display posters. Can Chapter 2
Characteristics Characteristics
be used to display outdoors after be used to display outdoors after Using a Variety of
laminating. laminating. Media
Chapter 3
Signs Signs Different Objectives
Indoors Indoors
Outdoors Outdoors
Maintaining the
Adhesive Synthetic Chapter 5
Media Type Synthetic Paper Media Type
Network Environ-
Chapter 6
Auto Cut Auto Cut
Operation Operation
Media Type Syn. Paper Media Type Adh. Syn. Paper Chapter 7
Function Menus
Printhead Printhead
Optimum M Optimum M
Height Height
After cutting trimming paper, pre-cut paper, After cutting trimming paper, pre-cut paper, Contents
Comments or other such media, remove the sheet Comments or other such media, remove the sheet
manually. manually.
2- 11 Index
Media You Can Use
TOP
Backlit Film Flame-Resistant Cloth
Chapter 1
Basic Procedures
Printing is performed on the glossy, semi-
transparent surface of this film, then a
This is indoor cloth that has superior
projector light mounted behind the film
durability and is flame resistant. Suitable Chapter 2
Characteristics makes the print surface more beautiful. Characteristics
for horizontal banners, tapestries, to create Using a Variety of
Use indoors, outdoors as an electrical
a good mood, or atmosphere. Media
decoration or beautiful display
applications.
Chapter 3
Signs Signs Different Objectives
Indoors Indoors
Outdoors Outdoors
Maintaining the
Flame-Resistant Chapter 5
Media Type Backlit Film Media Type
Cloth Using the Printer in a
Network Environ-
Chapter 6
Auto Cut Auto Cut
Operation Operation
Media Type Backlit Film Media Type Flame-Res.Cloth Chapter 7
Function Menus
Printhead Printhead
Optimum M Optimum M
Height Height
After cutting trimming paper, pre-cut paper, perform automatic cutting. After printing, Contents
Comments or other such media, remove the sheet Comments cut the media manually. (→ P.2-34)
manually. The borderless printing is performed on the
2- 12 Index
Media You Can Use
TOP
Proofing Paper Newsprint for Proofing
Chapter 1
Basic Procedures
Can cover the color reproduction of offset Best for Newsprint for Proofing. Texture
printing for proofreading, thus achieving almost the same as newsprint, and
Characteristics color tones close to those of the final print. Characteristics available in a wide variety of colors. Three Chapter 2
Using a Variety of
Ideal for printers who need color output for main types of Newsprint Proof that are
Media
proofing. used in Japan are provided.
Chapter 3
Proof Proof Different Objectives
Indoors Indoors
Outdoors Outdoors
Maintaining the
Newsprint for Chapter 5
Media Type Proofing Paper Media Type
Proofing 1~3 Using the Printer in a
Network Environ-
Settings Roll Paper Width 24” Settings Roll Paper Width A1
Chapter 6
Auto Cut Auto Cut
News Proof 1
Operation Operation
Media Type Proofing Paper Media Type News Proof 2 Chapter 7
News Proof 3
Function Menus
Printhead Printhead
Optimum M Optimum M
Height Height
Contents
Optional RIP software sold separately is
Comments Comments
required.
2- 13 Index
Media You Can Use
TOP
Fine Art Photo Fine Art Heavyweight Photo
Chapter 1
Basic Procedures
From portraits and landscapes to digital From portraits and landscapes to digital
Characteristics art, this media produces exceedingly high, Characteristics art, this media produces exceedingly high, Chapter 2
Using a Variety of
composed quality. composed quality.
Media
Chapter 3
Art Art Different Objectives
Indoors Indoors
Outdoors Outdoors
Maintaining the
Fine Art Chapter 5
Media Type Fine Art Photo Media Type
Heavyweight Photo Using the Printer in a
Network Environ-
Chapter 6
Auto Cut Auto Cut
Operation Operation
Media Type Fine Art Photo Media Type FneArt HW Photo Chapter 7
Function Menus
Printhead Printhead
Optimum M Optimum M
Height Height
The standard cutter cannot be used to The standard cutter cannot be used to
perform automatic cutting. After printing, perform automatic cutting. After printing, Contents
Comments cut the media manually. (→ P.2-34) Comments cut the media manually. (→ P.2-34)
The borderless printing is performed on the The borderless printing is performed on the
left and right edges. left and right edges.
2- 14 Index
Media You Can Use
TOP
Fine Art Textured Canvas SemiGlos
Chapter 1
Basic Procedures
Using polyester cloth as its base, this

For landscapes, watercolors, etc. this
media creates a bold, unique feeling. Chapter 2
Characteristics media reproduces exceedingly high, Characteristics
Ideal for output of artworks such as digital Using a Variety of
composed quality.
paintings, copies of oil paintings, etc. Media
Chapter 3
Art Art Different Objectives
Indoors Indoors
Outdoors Outdoors
Maintaining the
Media Type Fine Art Textured Media Type Canvas SemiGlos Chapter 5
Network Environ-
Chapter 6
Auto Cut Auto Cut
Operation Operation
Media Type FineArt Txtr Media Type Canvas Semi-Gl Chapter 7
Function Menus
Printhead Printhead
Optimum M Optimum H
Height Height
perform automatic cutting. After printing, After cutting trimming paper, pre-cut paper, Contents
Comments cut the media manually. (→ P.2-34) Comments or other such media, remove the sheet
The borderless printing is performed on the manually.
2- 15 Index
Media You Can Use
TOP
Japanese Paper Washi Colored Coated Paper
Chapter 1
Basic Procedures
Ink jet printing and texture of traditional
Japanese washi paper combine well.
Ideal for price POPs at drugstores and
This media is ideal for any type of artwork Chapter 2
Characteristics Characteristics other retail outlets. Covered on both sides
for a warm, calm presentation, including Using a Variety of
with high-impact yellow.
watercolors, ink drawings, Japanese Media
paintings, Japanese style POPs, etc.
Chapter 3
Art Generic Different Objectives
Indoors Indoors
Outdoors Outdoors
Maintaining the
Japanese Paper Colored Coated Chapter 5
Washi Paper Using the Printer in a
Network Environ-
Chapter 6
Auto Cut Auto Cut
Operation Operation
Media Type JPN Paper Washi Media Type Colored Coated Chapter 7
Function Menus
Printhead Printhead
Optimum M Optimum M
Height Height
Contents
Comments Comments
2- 16 Index
Media You Can Use
TOP
CAD Tracing Paper CAD Translucent Matte Film
Chapter 1
Basic Procedures
Tracing paper that can be used for color A translucent film for CAD designs (line
Characteristics printing, and ideal for CAD plans and Characteristics drawings). Superior, stable dimensions, for Chapter 2
Using a Variety of
drawings. master plans and other high-quality output.
Media
Chapter 3
CAD CAD Different Objectives
Indoors Indoors
Outdoors Outdoors
Maintaining the
CAD Translucent Chapter 5
Media Type CAD Tracing Paper Media Type
Matte Film Using the Printer in a
Network Environ-
Settings Roll Paper Width 24”, A1 Settings Roll Paper Width A1
Chapter 6
Auto Cut Auto Cut
Operation Operation
Media Type CAD Trace Paper Media Type CAD Matte Film Chapter 7
Function Menus
Printhead Printhead
Optimum L Optimum L
Height Height
After cutting trimming paper, pre-cut paper, Contents

Comments Comments or other such media, remove the sheet
manually.
2- 17 Index
Media You Can Use
TOP
Media Size
Chapter 1
The table below lists the media sizes and feeding methods that can be used with this printer. Basic Procedures
Roll Media
This table lists roll media with maximum diameters of 150 mm (5.1 in.), media core inside diameter of 2 or 3 inches. Chapter 2
Using a Variety of
Width Size Name in Printer Driver*1 BorderlessPrinting*2 Media
Non-category 24”
ARCH D, ARCH C, 20” x 24” Chapter 3
609.6 mm (24 in.)
ISO A1 Different Objectives
ISO A1, ISO A2
594.0 mm (24 in.)
JIS B2 Chapter 4
JIS B2, JIS B3
515.0 mm (20.28 in.) Maintaining the
ISO A2 Printer
ISO A2, ISO A3
16.54-in. Roll (420.0 mm)
Non-category 16” Chapter 5
US Photo
406.4 mm (16 in.) Using the Printer in a
Non-category 14” Network Environ-
ANSI Legal ment
355.6 mm (14 in.)
ISO A3 Chapter 6
ISO A3, ISO A4 Troubleshooting
297.0 mm (11.69 in.)
Non-category 10”
10” x 15”, 10” x 12”, 8” x 10”
254.0 mm (10 in.)
Chapter 7
*1. Borderless printing is possible with Custom Settings using the widths of the media Operation of the
above. Function Menus
*2. Media Types that can be used for borderless printing are: Heavy Coated Paper, Pre-
mium Matte Paper, Extra Heavyweight Coated Paper, Glossy Photo Paper, SemiG-
los Photo Paper, Heavyweight SemiGlos Photo Paper, Fine Art Photo, Fine Art
Heavyweight Photo, Fine Art Textured, Flame-Resistant Cloth, Special 1 to 5. How-
ever, Premium Matte Paper, Flame-Resistant Cloth and Fine Art cannot be cut auto-
Contents
matically. After printing, cut the media manually. (→ P.2-34)
2- 18 Index
Media You Can Use
TOP
Cut Sheet Size (Width) Dimensions
Cut sheets up to 606.9 mm wide (listed below) can be Chapter 1
ARCH B 304.8 x 457.2 mm (12 x 18 in.)
used. Basic Procedures
ARCH A 228.6 x 304.8 mm (9 x 12 in.)
Size (Width) Dimensions
DIN C2 458.0 x 648.0 mm (18.03 x 25.51 in.) Chapter 2
ISO A1 594.0 x 841.0 m (23.39 x 33.11 in.) Using a Variety of
DIN C3 324.0 x 458.0 mm (12.76 x 18.03 in.)
Media
ISO A2 420.0 x 594.0 mm (16.54 x 23.39 in.)
DIN C4 229.0 x 324.0 mm (9.02 x 12.76 in.)
ISO A3+ 329.0 x 483.0 mm (12.95 x 19.02 in.) Poster Chapter 3
508.0 x 762.0 mm (20 x 30 in.) Printing Methods for
ISO A3 297.0 x 420.0 mm (11.69 x 16.54 in.) 20” x 30”
20” x 24” 508.0 x 609.6 mm (20 x 24 in.)
ISO A4 210.0 x 297.0 mm (8.27 x 11.69 in.)
18” x 22” 457.2 x 558.8 mm (18 x 22 in.) Chapter 4
ISO B2 500.0 x 707.0 mm (19.69 x 27.83 in.) Maintaining the
14” x 17” 355.6 x 431.8 mm (14 x 17 in.) Printer
ISO B3 353.0 x 500.0 mm (13.90 x 19.69 in.)
10” x 15” 254.0 x 381.0 mm (10 x 15 in.)
ISO B4 250.0 x 353.0 mm (9.84 x 13.90 in.) Chapter 5
10” x 12” 254.0 x 304.8 mm (10 x 12 in.) Using the Printer in a
JIS B2 515.0 x 728.0 mm (20.28 x 28.66 in.) Network Environ-
8” x 10” 203.2 x 254.0 mm (8 x 10 in.) ment
JIS B3 364.0 x 515.0 mm (14.33 x 20.28 in.)
US Photo 406.4 x 508.0 mm (16 x 20 in.) Chapter 6
JIS B4 257.0 x 364.0 mm (10.12 x 14.33 in.) Troubleshooting
ANSI D 558.8 x 863.6 mm (22 x 34 in.)
ANSI C 431.8 x 558.8 mm (17 x 22 in.) Chapter 7
Operation of the
ANSI B 279.4 x 431.8 mm (11 x 17 in.) Function Menus
ANSI B Super 330.2 x 482.6 mm (13 x 19 in.)
ANSI Letter 215.9 x 279.4 mm (8.5 x 11 in.)
ANSI Legal 215.9 x 355.6 mm (8.5 x 14 in.) Contents
ARCH D 609.6 x 914.4 mm (24 x 36 in.)
ARCH C 457.2 x 609.6 mm (18 x 24 in.)
2- 19 Index
Media You Can Use
TOP
Printing possible inside the area 5 mm in
Original data the same as the media from the top, bottom, left and right margins.
Chapter 1
In addition to the normal media sizes, there are borderless Basic Procedures
5 mm
sizes and oversizes. The size of the printable areas, actual
Media Size
settings, and actual printing areas are different for these
sizes. Select a size that matches your needs. Printable Area Chapter 2
5 mm 5 mm
Using a Variety of
Media
Note
z To display Oversize, click the Size Options button on Print Area
5 mm Chapter 3
the Page Setup sheet, then under Display Series Printing Methods for
select Oversize. Same size as the Media Size or wide roll Different Objectives
paper.
Normal Size: Chapter 4
Achieves a printout that is the same size as the media. Maintaining the
This can be used with all media sizes and media types. Printer
Media Size
The printout has top, bottom, left, and right margins, and Media to Load
images with margins can be trimmed. Roll Media Chapter 5
Size to Using the Printer in a
z Roll Media Load Network Environ-
ment
Standard sizes from 24”, ISO A1, JIS B2, Chapter 6
Printable
ISO A2, 16”, 14”, 10”, and Custom Sizes of Troubleshooting
Paper Size Data created the same size as Media Size.
the above widths.
Printable
All media types
Media Types Chapter 7
Operation of the
Print Data and Function Menus
Results
Original data the

Print Results
Contents
same as the media
2- 20 Index
Media You Can Use
TOP
z Cut Sheets
Important Chapter 1
ARCH D to 8 x 10 Standard Sizes, and z The print quality or the precision of line feed may Basic Procedures
Printable
203.2 x 203.2 mm to 609.6 x 1400 mm deteriorate at the top margin of the media, or the
Media Size
Custom Sizes surface of the print may appear scratchy. Also, ink may
Printable Type All media types stick to the top and bottom edges. If the printhead is Chapter 2
Printing possible inside the area 5 mm in from the top, left and scratching the surface of the media, raise the Using a Variety of
printhead to a higher position. (→ P.2-40) Media
right area margins, and 23 mm in from the bottom margin.
z When loading cut sheets that are longer than 914 mm
5 mm (36”), the trailing edge of the sheet will touch the floor Chapter 3
Media Size and may become dirty. Before such a long cut sheet, Printing Methods for
Printable Area before you start the print job remove the roll holder and
5 mm 5 mm
spread a cloth or some paper on the floor, or when the
Chapter 4
cut sheet starts to feed tuck the trailing edge into the
Maintaining the
output stacker. (→ P.2-39) Printer
Print Area
23 mm
Chapter 5
Data created the same size as cut sheet. Using the Printer in a
Network Environ-
Media Size ment
Cut Sheet Chapter 6

Media to Load Troubleshooting
Size to
Load
Chapter 7
Operation of the
Data created the same size as Media Size. Function Menus
Print Data and

Results Contents
Original data the

Print Results
2- 21
same as the media Index
Media You Can Use
TOP
Borderless Printing z Roll Media
With borderless printing sizes, printing is done from edge Chapter 1
24”, ISO A1, JIS B2,16”,14”, 10” Standard Basic Procedures
to edge without leaving any margins. Borderless printing Printable
Sizes and Custom Sizes of the same
is limited to roll media, and there are limitations on the Paper Size
width.
roll width and type of media that can be used. Also, the
Heavy Coated Paper, Extra Heavyweight Chapter 2
range of images that can be printed is different for some Coated Paper, Glossy Photo Paper,
printing methods. For more details about borderless Using a Variety of
SemiGlos Photo Paper, Heavyweight Media
printing, please refer to Chapter 3 “Printing Photos and Glossy Photo Paper, Heavyweight
Illustrations without Borders (Borderless Printing)” Printable Type
SemiGlos Photo Paper, Fine Art Photo,
Chapter 3
(→ P.3-13) (→ P.3-77). Fine Art Heavyweight Photo, Fine Art Printing Methods for
Textured, Flame Resistant Cloth, Special 1 Different Objectives
to 5
Allowed Printing Area of Media Size Chapter 4
Maintaining the
0 mm Printer
Media Size
Printable Area 0 mm 0 mm Chapter 5

Network Environ-
ment
Print Area
0 mm Chapter 6
Troubleshooting
Data created the same width as roll paper.
Chapter 7
Operation of the
Media Size Function Menus
Media to Load
Roll Media
Size to
Load
Contents
2- 22 Index
Media You Can Use
TOP
Data created the same size as Media Size. Oversize
With Oversize you can print over the entire surface of the Chapter 1
media. This is possible with all media types. When you Basic Procedures
Scale to fit use Oversize to print, you must load media that is larger
the Page than the Media Size. Also, the margins are attached
Size Printed slightly beyond the media size. Chapter 2
(Example) enlarged Using a Variety of
automatically Media
Note
Original data the
same as the media Print Results z To display Oversize click the Size Options button on Chapter 3
the Page Setup sheet, then under Display Series Printing Methods for
Create data of any size.
select Oversize. Different Objectives
Print Data and Results
z Roll Media
Scale to fit Chapter 4
Roll Paper Maintaining the
Enlarge/Reduce Printable ISO A1 to Photo 8 x 10 Standard Sizes Printer
Width to Fit Roll Paper Paper Size Width 100.0 to 599.6 mm Custom Size
(Example) Width
Original data
Printable Type All media types Chapter 5
of desired size Using the Printer in a
Print Results Allowed printing surface area of media size Network Environ-
ment
Create data larger by 3 mm at the top, 0 mm
bottom, left, and right margins. Media Size Chapter 6
Troubleshooting
Printable Area 0 mm 0 mm
Print
Image with Chapter 7
Actual Size Print Area Operation of the
0 mm Function Menus
(Example) Print
actual size
Original data 3 mm larger

than the media size at the Print Results
top, bottom, left, right margins. Contents
2- 23 Index
Media You Can Use
TOP
Roll Media more than 10 mm wider than z Cut Sheets
the media size.
Chapter 1
Standard ISO A1 to Photo sizes, and 203.2 Basic Procedures
Printable
x 203.2 mm to 599.6 x 1400 mm Custom
Paper Size
Sizes
Media Size
Media to Load Printable Chapter 2
All media types
Roll Media Media Types Using a Variety of
Size to Allowed printing surface area of media size Media
Load
0 mm
Chapter 3
Media Size Printing Methods for
Data created the same size as media size. Printable Area 0 mm 0 mm
Chapter 4
Maintaining the
Print Area Printer
0 mm
Print Data and
Results Actual Cut sheets more than 10 mm wider and 29 Chapter 5
size full mm more than longer than the media size. Using the Printer in a
coverage Network Environ-
print
Original data the ment
same as the media Print Results Media Size
Chapter 6
Size of Troubleshooting
Media to Load
Important loaded
z The end edge of the roll media can disrupt a print job cut sheet
Chapter 7
as it comes off the roll. Try to avoid printing in the area Operation of the
near the end edge of a roll. Function Menus
Contents
2- 24 Index
Media You Can Use
TOP
Data created the same size as media size.
Chapter 1
Basic Procedures
Print Data and

Results Chapter 2
Actual Using a Variety of
size full
coverage Media
print
Original data the
same as the media Print Results Chapter 3
Important
z You cannot use ARCH D and other sizes wider than
Chapter 4
599.6 mm to print for Oversize. Maintaining the
Printer
Handling Paper and Other Print Media Chapter 5

For details about how to handle and store print media, Network Environ-
please refer to the instructions provided with the media. ment
Chapter 6
Troubleshooting
Chapter 7
Operation of the
Function Menus
Contents
2- 25 Index
Printing with Rolls
TOP
Printing with Rolls Chapter 1

Basic Procedures
Loading Roll Media Selecting the Paper Source

When printing on roll media, select roll media as the Chapter 2
This is the general procedure for loading roll media. paper source on the operation panel. Using a Variety of
Media
1
After printing, remove the completed printout and any
media loaded on the platen. (→ P.2-33, P.2-39) Press and hold the Paper Source button for
1 second or more to light the Roll Media Chapter 3
On the operation panel, select the roll media source. Printing Methods for
(→ P.2-26) lamp. Different Objectives
Load the roll media in the roll holder slot. (→ P.2-27) Pressing the Paper Source button alternates the
selection between Roll Media and Cut Sheet. Chapter 4
Load the roll media on the platen. (→ P.2-30) Maintaining the
On the printer operation panel, select the media type. Data Offline
Information Power
Printer
Message Feed Papre
(→ P.2-30) Cleaning
(3 sec.)
Stop/Eject
(1 sec.) Online
Chapter 5
Adjust the amount of media feed. (→ P.4-42) Using the Printer in a
Offline
Menu
Network Environ-
Start the print job from the computer. (→ P.1-40)
ment
When a cut sheet is loaded, the printer will display
Important Remove CutSheet?. Chapter 6
Troubleshooting
z Make sure that the printer is switched on before you When another roll media is loaded, hold down the
load roll media. If the loaded media does not match the Stop button for more than 1 sec., to display Remove
media type, this can affect the quality of printing. RllMedia?.
Chapter 7
2 If either a cut sheet or roll media is loaded in

Operation of the
Function Menus
the printer, press the OK button.
Remove RllMedia?
Press OK/Stop
Contents
Remove either the cut sheet or the roll media.
(→ P.2-33, P.2-39)
2- 26 Index
Printing with Rolls
TOP
Loading the Roll Media 1 If there is roll media remaining in the printer,
Follow this procedure to set a roll in the roll holder. First, push the release lever to the rear to open, Chapter 1
if there is a cut sheet or an ejected printed sheet on the rotate the roll holder toward the rear to take Basic Procedures
platen, remove it. up the remaining paper, then remove the roll.
Important Chapter 2
Using a Variety of
z When you are printing a banner or other long printout, Media
the printed media may touch the floor and become
dirty. Before starting the print job, cover the floor with a Chapter 3
clean cloth or some paper. Printing Methods for
Note
z Since the platen may be fouled with ink, clean inside Chapter 4
Maintaining the
2
the upper cover before you switch to printing on a
Printer
large size. (→ P.4-11) Lower the holder stopper release lever (a) to
z For more details about media that can be set in the roll release the lock, remove the holder stopper,
holder, please refer to “Media You Can Use” (→ P.2-2). Chapter 5
then remove the roll from the holder. Using the Printer in a
Network Environ-
ment
Chapter 6
Troubleshooting
a Chapter 7
Operation of the
Function Menus
Important
z Store unused roll media in its original package. Store
the package in a cool, dry location that is not exposed
to direct sunlight. Contents
2- 27 Index
Printing with Rolls
TOP
3 With the edge of the roll media up and 4 Attach the holder stopper to the right side of
pointing in, insert the shaft of the roll holder the roll holder and insert it until it contacts the Chapter 1
into the roll from the left side until it is all the core of the roll, then push the holder stopper Basic Procedures
way in and stops. lever (a) over toward the shaft to lock it.
Chapter 2
Using a Variety of
Media
Chapter 3
Chapter 4
Caution Maintaining the
z Lay the roll holder horizontally onto a table or desk. Printer
Roll media are heavy and can cause personal injury if
Chapter 5
they drop. The roll media is locked in place by the roll holder. Using the Printer in a
Network Environ-
Important Important ment
z If the edge of the roll paper is not straight, take up the z If the leading edge of the roll media is not straight, or if Chapter 6
roll paper until the edge is straight then set it. This it is marked by dirt or tape, this could cause poor Troubleshooting
could cause poor paper feed. feeding and lead to poor print quality. In such a case,
cut the leading edge of the roll media in a straight line
before setting the roll holder in the printer. Chapter 7
Operation of the
Function Menus
z Press the roll holder onto the end of the roll until it is Contents
completely inserted. Make sure there is no gap (a gap
can cause poor feeding).
2- 28 Index
Printing with Rolls
TOP
5 Hold the ends of the roll media with the roll facing
the printer (as shown in the illustration), then align Important Chapter 1
and set the ends of the roll holder (b) into the z When you pull out the sheet, be careful to avoid Basic Procedures
guide grooves (c) of the roll holder slots. touching the printing surface of the paper. Touching
the print surface could cause poor print quality.
If the roll paper is slack and its edge is not straight, z If you see the media is wrinkled or curled, remove the Chapter 2
take up the roll slack until the edges are straight then wrinkles or curls before loading the media. Using a Variety of
set it. z If media does not feed easily through the feed slot (d) Media
insert the edge skewed to the left or right corner, then
and then feed it in until it is parallel. Chapter 3
Note
z The strength of the vacuum suction can be adjusted Chapter 4
while the release lever is open. If the media is difficult Maintaining the
to load, on the printer operation panel press [ ] Printer
(stronger) or [ ] (weaker) to adjust the strength of the
6 Push the release lever toward the rear to

suction. Chapter 5
open it, then pull out the roll media evenly
and insert it into the feed slot (d) and feed it
7 Open the upper cover. Network Environ-
ment
in until you hear the suction sound of the Chapter 6

Troubleshooting
vacuum.
d
Chapter 7
Operation of the
Function Menus
Important Contents
As soon as you insert the edge as far as the top of z Do not touch any areas other than those indicated.
the platen, you will hear the printer start the vacuum Your hands could get dirty or this could damage the
automatically. printer.
2- 29 Index
Printing with Rolls
TOP
8 While gently pulling out the center of the 10 Press [ ] or [ ] to select the loaded media
leading edge (e) of the roll media, align the type, then press OK. Chapter 1
right edge of the media so it is parallel to Basic Procedures
Media Type
guideline (f), then pull the release lever to the HW Coated
front to close it.
The (=) mark to the left of a setting indicates that roll Chapter 2
media type is currently selected, then the Using a Variety of
Media
preparation for the select media begins.
The table below lists the settings for the media Chapter 3
types. Only the types of media that can be used with Printing Methods for
the black ink tank installed in the printer are Different Objectives
f
displayed.
Media Name Media Type Setting Chapter 4

e Maintaining the
Plain Paper Plain Paper Printer
CAD Plain Paper CAD Plain Paper
Important
Plain Paper (High Quality) Plain Paper HQ Chapter 5
z Do not pull strongly the roll media when you align it
Recycled Coated Paper Recycled Coated Using the Printer in a
with the guideline. The roll media may not feed out Network Environ-
straight in some cases. Coated Paper Coated Paper
ment
Heavyweight Coated Paper HW Coated
9 Raise the upper cover stopper to release the
Premium Matte Paper
Extra Heavyweight Coated
Premium Matte Chapter 6
Troubleshooting
lock then close the upper cover. Paper
Ex HW Coated
Glossy Photo Paper Glossy Photo
Chapter 7
SemiGlos Photo Paper Semi-Gl Photo Operation of the
Heavyweight Glossy Photo Function Menus
HW Glossy Photo
Paper
Heavyweight SemiGlos
HW SemiGl Photo
Photo Paper
Synthetic Paper Syn. Paper Contents
Adhesive Synthetic Paper Adh. Syn. Paper
Backlit Film Backlit Film
Media Type is displayed. Flame-Registrant cloth Flame-Res.Cloth
2- 30 Index
Printing with Rolls
TOP
Media Name Media Type Setting z In order to align the leading edge correctly when the
Proofing Paper Proofing Paper 2 roll media is replaced with a new one, the media is fed
Chapter 1
Newsprint for Proofing News Proof/1/2/3 and then cut the correct amount for the type of media. Basic Procedures
Fine Art Photo FineArt Photo Also, if a barcode is printed on the media, the portion
where the barcode is will be cut off after the barcode is
Fine Art Heavyweight Photo FneArt HW Photo
read. Chapter 2
Fine Art Textured FineArt Txtr
11
Using a Variety of
Canvas SemiGlos Canvas Semi-Gl Media
Japanese Paper Washi JPN Paper Washi If a new roll without barcodes is loaded in the
Colored Coated Paper Colored Coated printer while the paper remains function is
Chapter 3
CAD Tracing Paper CAD Trace Paper enabled, press [ ] or [ ] to select the Printing Methods for
CAD Translucent Matte Film CAD Matte Film length of roll then press the OK button. Different Objectives
Special 1~5 Special 1~5 If you have set a roll with media remaining barcodes
printed, the amount of media remaining is detected Chapter 4
automatically so you do not have to select it. Maintaining the
Important
Printer
z Make sure that you have selected the correct setting
Media Length
for the media type. If you have selected an incorrect 30.00 m
Chapter 5
setting for the media type, do the procedure in Using the Printer in a
“Selecting the Media Type” (→ P.2-32). After a few seconds, Online appears on the display Network Environ-
z As soon as each sheet is printed, remove it from the and the printer is ready to print. ment
12
output stacker. Chapter 6
If the output assist guides are not extended, Troubleshooting
Note pull it out.
z If a message appears in the display after loading roll
paper, the operation panel lamp flashes. Chapter 7
z Before shipping a printer, the Media Type is set for Operation of the
Function Menus
Plain Paper. Or, when the release lever is opened and
closed, the media type setting is reset automatically to
Plain Paper.
z The media size is detected automatically, therefore no
setting for the size is required. Contents
Important
z The output assists guides should always be extended
for printing. If they are not extended, this could lead to
2- 31
poor print quality. Index
Printing with Rolls
TOP
Selecting the Media Type
When you are using the printer with media loaded, you Important Chapter 1
must use the printer operation panel to select the type of z In order to achieve the best printing results with this Basic Procedures
media loaded. If the type of print media is not suitable, printer, the amount of feed is fine adjusted for each
you may not be able to achieve the desired results. Fol- type of media. For this reason, the image size,
low the procedure below if the media type selection does margins, and other settings change for each media Chapter 2
not match the type of media loaded in the printer. type. Using a Variety of
z When you select another media type, you should also Media
1 Press the Online button to display MAIN adjust the feed amount (→ P.4-42) and “Adjusting the
Height of the Printhead” (→ P.2-40). Chapter 3
MENU. Printing Methods for
MAIN MENU
Head Cleaning
Cleaning
(3 sec.)
Stop/Eject
Chapter 4
(1 sec.) Online
Maintaining the
Printer
2 Press [ ] or [ ] to select Media Type,

Chapter 5
then press [ ]. Network Environ-
ment
MAIN MENU Chapter 6
Media Type ↓
Troubleshooting
3 Press [ ] or [ ] to select the name of the

media type then press OK. Chapter 7
Operation of the
Media Type Function Menus
HW Coated
An equals sign (=) displays on the left to indicate the

media type is set.
Contents
2- 32 Index
Printing with Rolls
TOP
For the media when the Standard Cutter
Removing a Roll operation is set to Enable:
Chapter 1
Follow the procedure below to remove a loaded roll or when 1. If the paper remains function is switched on for Basic Procedures
the media cannot be cut automatically. Or, if you are the roll media, a barcode is printed on the
printing on a media with the Eject Cut item of Media leading edge of the roll.
Configuration Tool (→ P.3-58) (→ P.3-127) set to Required, Chapter 2
perform the same procedure when you see Cut by Stop Using a Variety of
Media
Key after printing finishes.
Plain Paper XXｍ Chapter 3

z When the roll media remaining detection function is Different Objectives
on, you must follow a strict procedure to remove a roll. 2. The roll is ejected at the back of the printer.
If you open the release lever and remove the roll Chapter 4
before the media remaining bar code prints, the printer Maintaining the
Important Printer
will lose its ability to monitor the amount of media
z Even if the roll paper remains function is on, if you
remaining on the roll.
open the release lever without pressing the Stop/Eject
z After removing a roll from the printer, store it in its Chapter 5
button the barcode does not print. In such a case, the Using the Printer in a
original vinyl bag. When you print on roll media that
roll remains function cannot be done with that roll. Network Environ-
has not been properly stored, the surface of the media ment
may chafe or the print quality may be poor.
Chapter 6
1 Hold down the Stop/Eject button for at least

Troubleshooting
1 second.
Chapter 7
Online
Operation of the
Bk
Cleaning
(3 sec.)
Function Menus
Stop/Eject
(1 sec.) Online
2 Press the OK button.

Contents
Remove RllMedia?
Press OK/Stop
2- 33 Index
Printing with Rolls
TOP
If the printer cannot perform automatic cutting with For Heavyweight Glossy Photo Paper,
the media: Heavyweight SemiGlossy Photo Paper, Backlit
Chapter 1
Film, CAD Translucent Matte Film: Basic Procedures
1. Press the Online button to set the printer
offline. The printer stops after printing to protect the
2. Press the [ ] button (not longer than 0.8 sec) printing surface. To prevent the printouts from
falling into the output stacker, support the printout Chapter 2
to feed the media 330 mm. Using a Variety of
with your hand and press the Stop/Eject button to Media
3. Cut along the cutting-line with a pair of scissors. perform the cut.
4. Hold down the [ ] button on the printer
Chapter 3
operation panel for more than 1 sec. until you Important Printing Methods for
see Feed Limit.. on the display. The roll media z If the ink drying time has been set, you will not be able Different Objectives
reverse feeds 300 mm and stops automatically. to perform cutting with the Stop/Eject button until the
5. Press the Online button to set the printer prescribed drying time has elapsed. Chapter 4
Maintaining the
3
offline.
Printer
Rotate the roll holder backward to take up
Important excess media and remove it.
Chapter 5
z If the printer receives new print data before this Using the Printer in a
operation is performed, printing will continue. Network Environ-
z Cut exactly along the cut-line. The printer may not be ment
able to perform continuous printing if you cut at a Chapter 6
position more than 30 mm away from the cut-line. Troubleshooting
Chapter 7
Operation of the
Function Menus
Contents
2- 34 Index
Printing with Cut Sheets
TOP
Printing with Cut Sheets Chapter 1

Basic Procedures
Loading Cut Sheets Selecting the Paper Source

When printing on the cut sheet, with the operation panel Chapter 2
To print on the cut sheet, follow the procedure below. select cut sheet as the media source. Using a Variety of
Media
1
If there is a cut sheet in the printer, remove it.
(→ P.2-33, P.2-39) Press and hold the Paper Source button for
1 second or more to light the Cut Sheet Chapter 3
On the printer operation panel, select cut sheet as the Printing Methods for
paper feed source. (→ P.2-35) lamp. Different Objectives
Place the cut sheet on the platen. (→ P.2-36) Pressing Paper Source alternates the selection
between Roll Media and Cut Sheet. Chapter 4
On the printer operation panel, select the media type. Maintaining the
(→ P.2-38) Data Offline
Information Power
Printer
Message Feed Papre
Adjust the amount of media feed. (→ P.4-42) Cleaning

(3 sec.)
Stop/Eject
(1 sec.) Online
Chapter 5
Start the print job from the computer. (→ P.1-40) Using the Printer in a
Offline
Menu
Network Environ-
ment
Important When a roll is loaded, the printer will display
z You must make sure that the printer is switched on Remove RllMedia? Chapter 6
before loading a cut sheet. Also, if the loaded sheet Troubleshooting
When another cut sheet is loaded, hold down the
does not match the media type selected on the Stop button for more than 1 sec., to display Remove
operation panel, this could cause a media loading CutSheet?.
error or lead to poor print quality. Chapter 7
2
Operation of the
If either a cut sheet or roll media is loaded in Function Menus
Note the printer, press the OK button.
z Store unused cut sheets in the original package. Store
the package in a cool, dry location that is not exposed Remove RllMedia?
to direct sunlight. Press OK/Stop
Contents
Remove either the cut sheet or the roll media.
(→ P.2-33, P.2-39)
2- 35 Index
TOP
Loading Cut Sheets 1 Open the upper cover and push the release
Follow this procedure to set a cut sheet on the platen. lever toward the rear. Chapter 1
First, if there is a cut sheet on the platen, remove it. Basic Procedures
Important
Chapter 2
z When loading cut sheets that are longer than 914 mm
Using a Variety of
(36”), the trailing edge of the sheet will touch the floor Media
and may become dirty. When you set such a long cut
sheet, before you start the print job remove the roll Chapter 3
holder and spread a cloth or some paper on the floor, Printing Methods for
or when the cut sheet starts to feed, tuck the trailing Different Objectives
edge into the output stacker.
Chapter 4
Important Maintaining the
z Do not touch any areas other than those indicated. Printer
Your hands could get dirty or this could damage the
printer. Chapter 5
Network Environ-
ment
Chapter 6
Troubleshooting
Chapter 7
Note Operation of the
z The platen may be fouled with ink so clean inside the Function Menus
upper cover before you switch to printing on a large
size. (→ P.4-11)
z For more details about cut sheets that can be set on
the platen, please refer to “Media You Can Use” (→ Contents
P.2-2).
z The printhead may rub the surface of the curled media,
so try to correct the curl.
2- 36 Index
TOP
2 With the print side of the cut sheet facing up, z The platen of this printer is provided with holes through
insert and press down parallel on the sheet which air is sucked to create the vacuum that holds the
Chapter 1
holder, making sure it is aligned with the line paper on the platen. You may hear a sound from the Basic Procedures
location where the paper is set; this is normal and
(a) on the right and the orange line (b) at the
does not mean any problem.
back. z If you are concerned about the noise, shift the position Chapter 2
of the paper about 1mm to the left or right (but not Using a Variety of
b a Media
more than 1 mm).
3 Pull the release lever forward to close, raise Chapter 3

the upper cover stopper and release the Different Objectives
lock, then close the upper cover.
Chapter 4
Maintaining the
Printer
Chapter 5
When the cut sheet is inserted, the printer grabs it Network Environ-
ment
and holds it on the platen.
Chapter 6
Troubleshooting
Important
Media Type is displayed.
z Set a cut sheet parallel with the guideline on the right
side of the platen. If the cut sheet is skewed, this will
Chapter 7
cause a skew error. If the error occurs, set the cut Operation of the
sheet once again so it is aligned correctly. Function Menus
Note
z The strength of the vacuum suction can be adjusted
while the release lever is open. If the media is difficult Contents
to load, on the printer operation panel press [ ]
(stronger) or [ ] (weaker) to adjust the strength of the
suction.
2- 37 Index
TOP
4 Press [ ] or [ ] to select the name of the Adhesive Synthetic Paper Adh. Syn. Paper
media type then press OK. Backlit Film Backlit Film Chapter 1
Flame-Resistant cloth Flame-Res.Cloth Basic Procedures
Media Type
HW Coated →
Proofing Paper Proofing Paper 2
Newsprint for Proofing News Proof 1/2/3
The (=) mark to the left of a setting indicates that cut Fine Art Photo FineArt Photo Chapter 2
sheet type is currently selected, then the preparation Using a Variety of
Fine Art Heavyweight Photo FneArt HW Photo, Media
for the select media begins. Fine Art Textured FineArt Txtr
The printer detects no skew and if there is no Canvas SemiGlos Canvas Semi-Gl Chapter 3
problem, then the printer enters the print standby Japanese Paper Washi JPN Paper Washi Printing Methods for
mode. Colored Coated Paper Colored Coated Different Objectives
The table below lists the possible settings for the cut CAD Tracing Paper CAD Trace Paper
sheet type. Only the settings of the type of media CAD Translucent Matte Film CAD Matte Film Chapter 4
that can be used with the type of black ink tank Maintaining the
Special 1~5 Special 1~5
mounted in the printer are displayed. Printer
Media Name Media Type Setting Important

Chapter 5
Plain Paper Plain Paper z If the cut sheet is skewed, this will cause a skew error. Using the Printer in a
CAD Plain Paper CAD Plain Paper If a skew error occurs, start at Step 1 and set the cut Network Environ-
sheet again. ment
Plain Paper (High Quality) Plain Paper HQ
z Make sure that you have selected the correct setting Chapter 6
Recycled Coated Paper Recycled Coated
for the media type. If you have selected an incorrect Troubleshooting
Coated Paper Coated Paper
setting for the media type, perform the procedure in
Heavyweight Coated Paper HW Coated
“Selecting the Media Type” (→ P.2-32)
Premium Matte Paper Premium Matte z As soon as each sheet prints, remove it from the Chapter 7
Extra Heavyweight Coated output stacker. Operation of the
Ex HW Coated
Paper Function Menus
Glossy Photo Paper Glossy Photo
Note
SemiGlos Photo Paper Semi-Gl Photo
z Before shipping a printer, the Media Type is set for
Heavyweight Glossy Photo
HW Glossy Photo Plain Paper. Also, when the release lever is opened
Paper
and closed, the media type setting is reset
Contents
Heavyweight SemiGlos
HW SemiGl Photo automatically to Plain Paper.
Photo Paper
z The media size is detected automatically, therefore no
Synthetic Paper Syn. Paper
setting for the size is required.
2- 38 Index
TOP
5 If the output assist guides are not extended, 3 While holding the media, push the release
pull it out. lever back to open then remove the media. Chapter 1
Basic Procedures
Chapter 2
Using a Variety of
Media
Important Chapter 3
z The output assists guides should always be extended Different Objectives
for printing. If they are not extended, this could lead to
4
poor print quality.
Chapter 4
Pull the release lever forward to close it. Maintaining the
Printer
Removing a Cut Sheet
Follow the procedure below to remove a cut sheet from the Chapter 5
printer. Network Environ-
1
ment
Hold down the Stop/Eject button for at least Chapter 6
1 second. Troubleshooting
Online
Bk
Cleaning
(3 sec.) Chapter 7
Stop/Eject
(1 sec.) Online Operation of the
Function Menus
2 Press the OK button.

Remove RllMedia?
Contents
Press OK/Stop
The loaded cut sheet is ejected at the front and then

2- 39
rests on the platen. Index
Adjusting the Height of the Printhead
TOP
Adjusting the Height of the Printhead Chapter 1

Basic Procedures
It is possible to achieve the higher print quality by adjusting
the height of the printhead. Follow the procedure below to
Adjusting Printhead Height
1
operate. Chapter 2
Press the Online button to display MAIN Using a Variety of
Adjust the height of the printhead. (→ P.2-40)
MENU. Media
Set a cut sheet of the type you intend to use.
(→ P.2-26, P.2-35) Data Offline
Information Power
Chapter 3
Message Feed Paper
Cleaning
Adjust the position of the printhead. (→ P.4-40) (3 sec.)
Stop/Eject
(1 sec.) Online Different Objectives
Start the print job from the computer. (→ P.1-40) Offline
Menu
After completing the special print job, return the Chapter 4
2
Maintaining the
printhead height to its original setting and re-align the Printer
printhead. (→ P.2-42) Press [ ] (or [ ]) to select Chng Head
Hght then press [ ].
Chapter 5
Important Information Power Using the Printer in a
Data
z After changing the height of the printhead, always Message
MAIN MENU
Chng Head Hght
Cleaning
Network Environ-
adjust the print mode. If you do not perform the
(3 sec.)
Stop/Eject
ment
(1 sec.) Online
adjustments, you cannot achieve the best print results. Chapter 6

Troubleshooting
Offline
z When printing on paper-base media (ex: Coated Menu
Paper, Plain Paper) or any type of media that wrinkles

easily, never print with the printhead lower than the
best height for each media. This could also damage
3 Press [ ] or [ ] to select Yes, then press
Chapter 7
OK button. Operation of the
the printer.
Function Menus
Chng Head Hght
Note = Yes
z Press the Information button to display Head Height
and the current printhead height to confirm that the The carriage moves to the center when you see
Carriage Moving. Contents
setting correct for the media in use.
2- 40 Index
TOP
4 Open the upper cover when you see Open 5 Adjust the height of the printhead with the
UpperCover, then Chng Head Hght is printhead height adjustment lever. Chapter 1
displayed. When printing on CAD Plain Paper, CAD Tracing Basic Procedures
Paper, CAD Translucent Matte Film, set the lever to
the low position (a), when printing on Canvas
SemiGlos set the lever to the high position (c), and Chapter 2
for all other media set the lever to the middle (b) Using a Variety of
Media
(standard). If the printhead is scratching the surface
of media that ripples or wrinkles easily, rather than
use the recommended printhead height for that Chapter 3
media, set the lever one step higher. Printing Methods for
c
Chapter 4
b
Maintaining the
Printer
a
Important
z Do not touch any areas other than those indicated. Chapter 5
Your hands could get dirty or this could damage the Using the Printer in a
Network Environ-
printer. ment
z If the printhead height adjustment lever is dirty, before
continuing with this procedure, wring out a damp cloth
and use it to clean the printhead height adjustment
Chapter 6
Troubleshooting
lock then close the upper cover.
lever. (→ P.4-11)
Chapter 7
Operation of the
Function Menus
Contents
The carriage returns to the home when you see
Carriage Moving. The printer returns to the print
ready status.
2- 41 Index
TOP
Aligning the Printhead

Chapter 1
After the printhead height has been adjusted, on the printer Basic Procedures
operation panel adjust select Auto Head Adj. > Standard
Adj. to adjust the printhead.“Aligning the Printhead”
Using a Variety of
Media
Re-adjusting Printhead Height Chapter 3

After the print job is finished, especially before starting the Printing Methods for
next print with another type of media, you must do the
procedure to reset the printhead height adjustment lever to
the optimum position for the next media. Chapter 4
Maintaining the
“Adjusting Printhead Height” (→ P.2-40) Printer
After re-adjusting the printhead height position, you should
once again use the operation panel to align the printhead. Chapter 5
“Aligning the Printhead” (→ P.4-40) Using the Printer in a
Network Environ-
ment
Chapter 6
Troubleshooting
Chapter 7
Operation of the
Function Menus
Contents
2- 42 Index
TOP
Chapter 3 Printing Methods for Different Objectives

Chapter 1
Basic Procedures
Printing from Windows ...............................................................................3-2
Before You Begin .................................................................................................. 3-2 Chapter 2
Enlarging and Reducing the Original ..................................................................... 3-6 Using a Variety of
Printing Photos and Illustrations without Borders (Borderless Printing) .............. 3-13 Media
Rotating the Page 90 Degrees for Printing (Conserve Paper) ............................ 3-22
Printing Several Pages on One Sheet (Page Layout) ......................................... 3-24 Chapter 3
Printing Posters (Page Layout) ............................................................................ 3-26 Printing Methods for
Using Watermarks ............................................................................................... 3-28 Different Objectives
Vertical and Horizontal Banner Printing (Long Prints) ........................................ 3-30
Printing without Top and Bottom Margins (Conserve Paper) .............................. 3-38 Chapter 4
Custom Print Quality ............................................................................................ 3-39 Maintaining the
Fine Adjusting Color for Printing .......................................................................... 3-42 Printer
About Media Size Options ................................................................................... 3-51
When the Printout Quality Is Not Clean ............................................................... 3-56 Chapter 5
Software Provided for Windows .......................................................................... 3-56 Using the Printer in a
Printing from Macintosh ............................................................................3-59 Network Environ-
ment
Before You Begin ............................................................................................... 3-59
Enlarging and Reducing the Original ................................................................... 3-65 Chapter 6
Printing Photos and Illustrations without Borders (Borderless Printing) .............. 3-77 Troubleshooting
Rotating the Page 90 Degrees for Printing (Conserve Paper) ............................ 3-86
Printing Several Pages on One Sheet (Page Layout) ......................................... 3-89
Printing Posters (Page Layout) ........................................................................... 3-92 Chapter 7
Vertical and Horizontal Banner Printing (Long Prints) ........................................ 3-94 Operation of the
Printing without Top and Bottom Margins (Conserve Paper) ............................ 3-100 Function Menus
Custom Print Quality .......................................................................................... 3-103
Fine Adjusting Color for Printing ........................................................................ 3-107
Custom Sizes (User Print Settings) .................................................................. 3-121
When the Printout Quality Is Not Clean ............................................................. 3-125 Contents
Software Provided for Macintosh ....................................................................... 3-126
Printing from Windows
TOP
Printing from Windows Chapter 1

Basic Procedures
This printer driver provides a variety of printer functions to Basic Settings to Meet Your Needs (Type
meet your printing needs. In this chapter we will introduce
of Printing)
these functions.
To achieve the best printing, you must adjust the color and Chapter 2
Using a Variety of
other settings for the objective of the document. This printer
Media
Before You Begin driver provides superior settings frequently used to produce
posters, POP ads, digital camera prints, CAD designs, and
There are some functions you should remember and use other prints. Just select from the list the type of document Chapter 3
when you use this printer. Before you use the printer for you need and perform the basic procedure for the print job. Printing Methods for
different printing tasks, please read this section. The following applications are provided for the types of
prints shown below.
Chapter 4
Setting Values Maintaining the
Printer
Type of Printing Content Print Matching
Paper Type Color Adjustment
Quality Method
Chapter 5
Best for printing normal Using the Printer in a
Default
documents, with text, images, Plain Paper Standard Auto Default Network Environ-
Settings
graphics, etc. mixed together. ment
Best for printing mixed text Chapter 6
and illustrations with bright Heavyweight Coated Troubleshooting
POP Ad Standard Saturation Contrast: +5
and forceful eyecatching such Paper
as store posters.
Proofing Paper *1 Chapter 7
Best for printing posters with Contrast: +10
Poster Heavyweight Coated Standard Auto Operation of the
centered photographs. Brightness: +5
Paper *2 Function Menus
Photo Best for printing photos Glossy Photo Paper *1 Perceptual

Contrast: +10
(from digital captured with a digital Heavyweight Coated Standard (Photo
Brightness: +5
camera) camera. Paper *2 graphic)
Contents
Best for reproduction of scanned Glossy Photo Paper *1
Photo (from
photographs with color faithful to Heavyweight Coated Standard Colorimetric Default
scanner)
the quality of the original. Paper *2
3- 2 Index
TOP
Setting Values
Type of Printing Content Print Matching
Paper Type Color Adjustment Chapter 1
Quality Method Basic Procedures
Best for long banner formats
Long Formats Heavyweight Coated Contrast: +10
(vertical and horizontal) with Standard Saturation
(Banner) Paper Brightness: +5
mixed illustrations and text. Chapter 2
Using a Variety of
Best for plans and design Media
CAD CAD Plain Paper Standard Saturation Default
drawings with fine lines.
Chapter 3
*1. Photo Black Ink (BK) is the black ink tank type mounted in the printer. Printing Methods for
*2. Matte Black Ink (MBK) is the black ink tank type mounted in the printer. Different Objectives
Chapter 4
Note Maintaining the
z For more details about print quality, please refer to Printer
“Custom Print Quality” in “Customizing Print Quality”.
(→ P.3-39)
Chapter 5
z For more details about color mode matching and color Using the Printer in a
adjustments, please refer to “Fine Adjusting Color for Network Environ-
Printing” in “Adjusting Color” (→ P.3-42) see “Color ment
Matching” (→ P.3-46).
Chapter 6
Troubleshooting
To perform the settings for a print, first open the Main
sheet of the printer driver and then from Print Prefer-
ences select the type of printing that you want to per-
Chapter 7
form. Operation of the
Function Menus
Contents
3- 3 Index
TOP
The Preview reflects changes in the settings described
Note below.
Chapter 1
z The item in the list marked by the red ball contains the Basic Procedures
Setting Preview Description
settings that the printer is already set up to execute.
z You can use the Add and Edit buttons to add and edit The following settings are shown in the Preview
the printing types. For more details, refer to Using a image. Chapter 2
Print Preference > Adding a Print Preference, or A
:Borderless Printing, Color Mode, Orientation, Using a Variety of
Editing a Print Preference in the online Help. Layout, Watermark Media
Printer Driver Settings at a Glance This displays the sizes of the Page Size and Media
Chapter 3
(Settings Preview) Size settings. Also, when the Enlarged/Reduced
B Printing and Borderless Printing items are Different Objectives
The Preview illustrates the content of the current printer selected, the mode and magnification are also
driver settings. If you change the page size and orienta- displayed.
tion, feed method, etc., you can confirm their immediate Chapter 4
The following settings are shown in the Preview
effect easily by viewing the effect of the new settings in Maintaining the
image.
the Preview image. Printer
:Media Source, Borderless Printing, Enlarged/
Reduced Printing, Automatic Cutting Settings,
C
Print Centered, No Spaces at Top or Bottom Chapter 5
(Conserve Paper), Rotate Page 90 degrees Using the Printer in a
(Conserve Paper), Orientation, Rotate 180 Network Environ-
A ment
degrees, Mirror
Chapter 6
Troubleshooting
B
Chapter 7
Operation of the
C Function Menus
Contents
3- 4 Index
TOP
Confirming the Print Image (Print Preview) When you execute a print job an edit screen (Page Com-
poser) opens. Double-click the name of the document
There is one more function that displays the print image Chapter 1
that is ready to print and display its Preview for confirma-
of the document in the Preview. This other image is Basic Procedures
tion.
called the Print Preview. If you set the Print Preview to
display in the printer driver before the print job, the Pre-
view will display at the start of every print job for you to Chapter 2
check and prevent failed print jobs. Using a Variety of
To have the Print Preview display, open the Main tab of Media
the printer driver and select Open Preview When Print
Job Starts. Chapter 3
Chapter 4
Maintaining the
Printer
Chapter 5
Network Environ-
ment
Chapter 6
Troubleshooting
Chapter 7
Operation of the
Function Menus
Contents
3- 5 Index
TOP
Once you have confirmed that the image layout on the
media is correct, you can close the Preview. After select- Enlarging and Reducing the Original
Chapter 1
ing the document name with PageComposer and con- The original can be printed at a larger or smaller size. Basic Procedures
firming its appearance, start the print job from the File
menu. There are three methods for enlargement and reduction.
z Enlarging or reducing printing to fit the size of Chapter 2

the media (→ P.3-7) Using a Variety of
Media
z Enlarging or reducing fit the roll paper width
z Setting the desired scaling rate and printing. Different Objectives
(→ P.3-11)
Chapter 4
Maintaining the
Note Printer
z When you need to enlarge TIFF image data or JPEG
Note images captured with a digital camera, in Adobe Chapter 5
z One the document name (print data) is selected in the Photoshop or a similar software application set the Using the Printer in a
PageComposer, you can edit the document as needed resolution setting above 150 dpi to achieve better Network Environ-
printing results. ment
with the items in the Edit menu. For more details about
these editing features, please refer to the Chapter 6
PageComposer online Help. Troubleshooting
Chapter 7
Operation of the
Function Menus
Contents
3- 6 Index
TOP
Enlarging or Reducing Printing to Fit the 3 For Page Size on the Page Setup sheet
Size of the Media select the size of the original created in the Chapter 1
By setting the size of the media actually loaded for print-
software application. Basic Procedures
ing, you can automatically enlarge or reduce the print
automatically to match the size of the loaded media.
Chapter 2
Using a Variety of
Media
Chapter 3
Chapter 4
Maintaining the
1
Printer
Open the printer driver dialog box from the
Print dialog box of the application. Chapter 5
4
Network Environ-
Note Select Enlarged/Reduced Printing. ment
z For more details about how to open the printer driver
dialog box, please refer to “Printing” in Chapter 1 Chapter 6
Troubleshooting
“Basic Procedures”. (→ P.1-40)
2 Select the Page Setup sheet.

Chapter 7
Operation of the
Function Menus
Contents
3- 7 Index
TOP
7 Check the Preview and confirm that the
Note media size selection has changed, then click Chapter 1
z If you do not see the checkbox for Enlarged/Reduced the OK button. Basic Procedures
Printing, then cancel the Borderless Printing
selection. The Enlarged/Reduced Printing checkbox
will appear. Chapter 2
5
Using a Variety of
Confirm that Fit Media Size is selected Media
under Enlarged/Reduced Printing.
6
Chapter 3
From Media Size select the size of the Printing Methods for
media that will be used for printing.
Chapter 4
Maintaining the
Printer
Chapter 5
Network Environ-
Note ment
z To achieve the best print results, you should confirm Chapter 6
the appearance of the original in the Print Preview Troubleshooting
before printing. For more details about how to display
the print preview, please refer to “Confirming the Print
Image (Print Preview)” in “Before You Begin”. Chapter 7
(→ P.3-5) Operation of the
8
Function Menus
Click the Print button in the Print dialog box.
Contents
3- 8 Index
TOP
Enlarge/Reduce to Fit Roll Paper Width 3 For Page Size on the Page Setup sheet
You can enlarge or reduce the entire size of the original select the size of the original created in the Chapter 1
so it fits the width of the roll. software application. Basic Procedures
Chapter 2
Using a Variety of
Media
Chapter 3
Chapter 4
1
Maintaining the
Open the printer driver dialog box from the Printer
Printer dialog box of the application.
Chapter 5
4
Note Network Environ-
z For more details about how to open the printer driver Select Enlarged/Reduced Printing. ment
“Basic Procedures”. (→ P.1-40) Troubleshooting

Chapter 7
Operation of the
Function Menus
Contents
3- 9 Index
TOP
6 Confirm the content of the settings Preview,
Note then click the OK button. Chapter 1
z If you do not see the checkbox for Enlarged/Reduced Basic Procedures
Printing, then cancel the Borderless Printing Note
selection. The Enlarged/Reduced Printing checkbox z To achieve the best print results, you should confirm
will appear. the appearance of the original in the Print Preview Chapter 2
5 before printing. For more details about how to display Using a Variety of
Under Enlarged/Reduced Printing select the print preview, please refer to “Confirming the Print Media
Fit Roll Paper Width. Image (Print Preview)” in “Before You Begin”.
7
The print job starts. Chapter 4
Maintaining the
Note Printer
z Before you start the print job, confirm that the width of
the roll selected in the printer driver is the same as the Chapter 5
width of the roll loaded in the printer. If the printer Using the Printer in a
driver setting does not match the width of the loaded Network Environ-
ment
roll, the print job will halt temporarily.
Chapter 6
Troubleshooting
Chapter 7
z Under Enlarged/Reduced Printing select Fit Roll Function Menus
Paper Width to open the dialog box below. From the
Roll Paper Width list select the width of the roll
loaded in the printer, then click the OK button.
Contents
3- 10 Index
TOP
Selecting the Magnification Rate for 3 For Page Size on the Page Setup sheet
Printing select the size of the original created in the Chapter 1
You can enter the rate of magnification directly if you
software application. Basic Procedures
need to scale the enlargement or reduction for a desired
effect.
Chapter 2
Using a Variety of
Media
Chapter 3
1
Chapter 4
Open the printer driver dialog box from the Maintaining the
Printer
Printer dialog box of the application.
Chapter 5
Note Using the Printer in a
dialog box, please refer to “Printing” in Chapter 1 4 Select Enlarged/Reduced Printing.
Network Environ-
ment
“Basic Procedures”. (→ P.1-40) Chapter 6
2
Troubleshooting
Select the Page Setup sheet.
Chapter 7
Operation of the
Function Menus
Contents
3- 11 Index
TOP
z Reduction is performed starting from the upper left
Note corner of the image, but if you select Print Centered
Chapter 1
z If you do not see the checkbox for Enlarged/Reduced on the Layout sheet, the image will print in the center
Basic Procedures
Printing, then cancel the Borderless Printing selection. of the media.
The Enlarged/Reduced Printing checkbox will appear. z When Scaling is selected, the maximum possible rate
of magnification is displayed to the right of the
5 Under Enlarged/Reduced Printing select
magnification entry box. Chapter 2
Using a Variety of
Scaling then specify the desired setting.
6 Select the Media Size setting that you want.
Media

Chapter 3
then click the OK button. Different Objectives
Note Chapter 4
Maintaining the
z To achieve the best print results, you should confirm
Printer
the appearance of the original in the Print Preview
the print preview, please refer to “Confirming the Print Chapter 5
Image (Print Preview)” in “Before You Begin”. Using the Printer in a
Network Environ-
(→ P.3-5) ment
8 Click the Print button in the Print dialog box. Chapter 6

Troubleshooting
Important Chapter 7
z You can enter a setting for the rate of magnification Operation of the
manually from the keyboard or use the arrow button on Function Menus
the right to scroll the number settings up or down. The
rate can be changed in increments of 1%. The size
can be scaled in the range limited by the size of the
Scaling entry column displayed on the right. Contents
z You can perform a setting that is larger than the size of
the media loaded in the printer, but some portions of
the will be cut off and not printed.
3- 12 Index
TOP
Printing Photos and Illustrations without Basic Procedure for Borderless Printing
This section introduces the basic procedure for borderless Chapter 1
Borders (Borderless Printing) printing by using media of the same size as the original. Basic Procedures
1
Normally a printed document has white space around its
edges (margins), but a borderless print for a photograph or Create the original in the software application
created image has no white space at its borders; its entire Chapter 2
so it matches the size of the media used for Using a Variety of
surface is covered by printing.
printing. Media
Settings Required for Borderless Printing
Before performing the print job, make sure that a media Important Chapter 3
that can be used for borderless printing is loaded. Only z The following page size settings can be used for Printing Methods for
media fed from the roll can be used for borderless print- borderless printing. Refer to the table below when you Different Objectives
ing on this printer. create the original image and set the page for a size
Here is a list of the types of roll media and their widths that can be used for borderless printing. Chapter 4
that can be used for borderless printing. z If the media size was pre-selected in the software Maintaining the
application, the selected size must support Printer
Paper Type Corresponding Roll Width
Borderless Printing.
Glossy Photo Paper, SemiGlos 10-in. Roll (254.0mm)
Photo Paper, Heavyweight Glossy Chapter 5
14-in. Roll (355.6mm) Borderless printing ISO A1, ISO A2, JIS B2, JIS Using the Printer in a
Photo Paper, Heavyweight 16-in. Roll (355.6 mm) B3, ARCH D (24”), ARCH C,
on media the same Network Environ-
SemiGlos Photo Paper, JIS B2/B3 Roll size as the original 20”x24”, 14”x17”, 10”x12”, ment
Heavyweight Coated Paper, (515.0 mm) document 10”x15”, 8”x10”, US Photo
Premium Matte Paper, Extra (16”x20”)
Chapter 6
Heavyweight Coated Paper, Matte ISO A1/A2 Roll Troubleshooting
Film, Flame Resistant-Cloth, Fine (594.0 mm) Borderless printing
Art Photo, Fine Art Heavyweight with enlargement and All page sizes
Photo, Fine Art Textured, Canvas 24-in. Roll (609.6mm) reduction
Chapter 7
SemiGlos, Special 1-5 z There are limitations on the selection of page sizes Operation of the
that can be used with the Borderless Printing Function Menus
Important Method. If any page size other than those listed above
z Paper of types and roll widths other than those listed is selected, the Borderless Printing Method feature
above cannot be used for borderless printing. is automatically set for Scale to fit Roll Width.
z The following types of media cannot be Auto cut, so
borderless printing can only be performed on the left
z For more details about Scale to fit Roll Width and
Print Image with Actual Size, please refer to “More
Contents
and right edges. About Borderless Printing Methods” (→ P.3-17)
Premium Matte Paper, Flame Resistant Cloth, Fine Art
Photo, Fine Art Heavyweight Photo, Fine Art Textured,
3- 13
Canvas SemiGlos Index
TOP
トップ
Note Chapter 1
z Make sure the image created for borderless printing covers the entire original page. Basic Procedures
z If you are using Microsoft Word or any other software application that allows margin settings, set all the margins to “0”.
For more details about how to perform these settings, please refer to the software application instructions.
2 Open the printer driver dialog box from the Printer dialog box of the application.
Chapter 2
Using a Variety of
Media
Note
z For more details about how to open the printer driver dialog box, please refer to “Printing” in Chapter 1 “Basic Chapter 3
Procedures”. (→ P.1-40)
3 Display the Main sheet and perform the settings for borderless printing.
Chapter 4
Maintaining the
Printer
Chapter 5
Network Environ-
1. Select the media compatible with borderless printing. ment
Chapter 6
Troubleshooting
2. If you check the checkbox for Open Preview When

Chapter 7
Print Job Starts, you can confirm the appearance of Operation of the
the print image in the Print Preview before printing. Function Menus
Contents
3- 14 Index
TOP
トップ
4 Display the Page Setup sheet and perform the settings for borderless printing.
Chapter 1
1. For Page Size select the size of the original created in the Basic Procedures
software application.
2. Select Borderless Printing.

Chapter 2
Using a Variety of
Media
* If you select the paper for a size that can be used for
borderless printing, Scale to fit the Page Size is set for Chapter 3
Borderless Printing Method.
3. Confirm that the width of the roll paper matches the roll Chapter 4
paper or the page size for Media Source. Maintaining the
Printer
* The Preview reflects changes in the contents of the settings.

Chapter 5
ment
z If you change the page size to any other size that allows borderless printing, the setting for the width of the roll changes
automatically to a roll width that matches the original width. Chapter 6
z If you change the page width setting to a size that does not allow borderless printing, the dialog box below opens. Troubleshooting
Specify a setting in the Roll Paper Width list, then click the OK button so you can continue with the borderless print (in
this case the width of the original will be enlarged or reduced to fit the width of the roll media). The print cannot be
performed with the same width as the original. Chapter 7
Operation of the
Function Menus
Contents
3- 15 Index
TOP
5 Confirm the content of the settings Preview, z To enlarge or reduce while performing borderless
printing, under Enlarged/Reduced Printing select Fit
then click the OK button. Chapter 1
Roll Paper Width.
Basic Procedures
Note
the appearance of the original in the Print Preview Chapter 2
before printing. For more details about how to display Using a Variety of
the print preview, please refer to “Confirming the Print Media
Image (Print Preview)” in “Before You Begin”.
6
The print job starts. z To do a borderless print of an image with a top and
bottom margin, on the Layout sheet you can select No Chapter 4
Maintaining the
Spaces at Top or Bottom (Conserve Paper). This an Printer
Note
easy way to do a borderless print by setting these
z If Scale to fit the Page Size is selected for margins to zero. For more details, please refer to
Borderless Printing Method, the printer driver “Printing without Top and Bottom Margins (Conserve Chapter 5
automatically enlarges the original up to every edge of Using the Printer in a
Paper)”. (→ P.3-38) Network Environ-
the page to a margin of 3 mm. The result is the printer
ment
fills the entire page up to the edges with borderless
printing. The top, bottom, left and right margins of the Chapter 6
original are set to 3 mm so no part of the image will Troubleshooting
extend beyond a margin.
Chapter 7
Operation of the
Function Menus
Contents
3- 16 Index
TOP
More About Borderless Printing Methods 1 Create the original in the software application
There are two ways to create a document for borderless so it matches the size of the media used for Chapter 1
printing in addition to the methods described above printing. Basic Procedures
(Scale to fit the Page Size).
<To perform borderless document printing with a 2 Open the printer driver dialog box from the
Chapter 2
size not allowed for borderless printing> Print dialog box of the application.
Using a Variety of
z Enlarge/Reduce to Fit Roll Paper Width Media
This features enlarges or reduces the size of the origi- Note
nal so it fits the width of the roll. You can print a page z For more details about how to open the printer driver Chapter 3
size not compatible with borderless printing (A4, A3, dialog box, please refer to “Printing” in Chapter 1 Printing Methods for
Custom Size, etc.) on roll media of a width that is com- “Basic Procedures”. (→ P.1-40) Different Objectives
patible with enlargement/reduction printing.
Chapter 4
Maintaining the
Printer
Chapter 5
Network Environ-
ment
Chapter 6
Troubleshooting
Chapter 7
Operation of the
Function Menus
Contents
3- 17 Index
TOP
トップ
Chapter 1
Basic Procedures
Chapter 2
Using a Variety of
1. Select the media compatible with borderless printing. Media
Chapter 3
Print Job Starts, you can confirm the appearance of Chapter 4
the print image in the Print Preview before printing. Maintaining the
Printer
4 Display the Page Setup sheet and perform the settings for borderless printing. Chapter 5
Network Environ-
1. For Page Size select the size of the original created in ment
the software application.
Chapter 6
2. Select Borderless Printing.
Troubleshooting
* The example shows A4 size that cannot be used for

borderless printing is selected. Chapter 7
Operation of the
* For Borderless Printing Method, Scale to fit Roll Function Menus
Paper Width will be selected.
3. To change the setting of the roll paper width, select the

width for the Roll Paper Width list.
Contents
3- 18 Index
TOP
6 Click the Print button in the Print dialog box.
Note The print job starts. Chapter 1
z If the size of the selected original cannot be used with Basic Procedures
borderless printing, select Borderless Printing to
Note
open the dialog box below. Select the width of the roll
loaded in the printer, and then click OK. Borderless z After the Scale to fit Roll Paper Width feature
automatically sizes to original to fit the width of the roll, Chapter 2
Printing Method will be set to Scale to fit Roll Paper Using a Variety of
Width. the printer driver automatically enlarges the image so Media
that each margin, that is, the top, bottom, left, and right
margin, is 3 mm each. The result is the printer fills the
entire page up to the edges with borderless printing. Chapter 3
Portions of the image that protrude over the 3 mm top, Different Objectives
bottom, right, and left margins of the original document
cannot be printed.
Chapter 4
Maintaining the
z To do a borderless print of an image with a top and Printer
bottom margin, on the Layout sheet you can select No
Spaces at Top or Bottom (Conserve Paper). This an Chapter 5
easy way to do a borderless print by setting these Using the Printer in a
margins to zero. For more details, please refer to Network Environ-
“Printing without Top and Bottom Margins (Conserve ment
Paper)”. (→ P.3-38)
Chapter 6

Troubleshooting
then click the OK button.

Chapter 7
Function Menus
Image (Print Preview)” in “Before You Begin”. Contents
(→ P.3-5)
3- 19 Index
TOP
<To print a high-precision image with borderless 1 In the software application create an image
printing> with borders (top, bottom, right, left) 3 mm Chapter 1
z Print Image with Actual Size larger than the original document. Basic Procedures
This takes an image that would otherwise overlap the
margins and sizes it to 3 mm margins and then prints it Note
with borderless printing on a media size that is the Chapter 2
z Example: If the media size is JIS B2 (515 x 728 mm),
same as the sized original. Use this method when you Using a Variety of
set the dimensions for the original as 521 x 734 mm. Media
want to avoid a deterioration in the quality of the image z If you are using MS-Word or another application,
caused by enlargement or reduction. before you create the original select Page Setup from
the File menu and select the page size and Chapter 3
orientation. Different Objectives
2 Open the printer driver dialog box from the

Chapter 4
Print dialog box of the application. Maintaining the
Printer
Note
z For more details about how to open the printer driver Chapter 5
dialog box, please refer to “Printing” in Chapter 1 Using the Printer in a
“Basic Procedures”. (→ P.1-40) Network Environ-
Note ment
z If you perform the print job with Borderless Printing Chapter 6
Method set for either Scale to fit the Page Size or Troubleshooting
Scale to fit Roll Paper Width, some slight
deterioration in the quality of the image may occur
because the printer driver automatically sizes the Chapter 7
portions of the image that would otherwise overlap the Operation of the
margins. If you select Print Image with Actual Size Function Menus
for the Borderless Printing Method, however, you
can perform print high-precision images with
borderless printing just as they are. Select this setting
when you need to print fine lines, photographs, or with
any image where the priority is on accuracy and
Contents
quality.
3- 20 Index
TOP
トップ
Chapter 1
Basic Procedures
Chapter 2
Using a Variety of
1. Select the media compatible with borderless printing. Media
Chapter 3
Print Job Starts, you can confirm the appearance of Chapter 4
the print image in the Print Preview before printing. Maintaining the
Printer
4 Display the Page Setup sheet and perform the settings for borderless printing.
Chapter 5
Network Environ-
ment
Chapter 6
1. For Page Size select the size of the original created in Troubleshooting
the software application.
2. Select Boderless Printing. Chapter 7

Operation of the
3. For Borderless Printing Method select Print Image Function Menus
with Actual Size.
4. Confirm that the width of the roll paper matches the roll
paper or the page size for Media Source. Contents
3- 21 Index
TOP
Rotating the Page 90 Degrees for Print-
ing (Conserve Paper) Basic Procedures
Note In order to maximize the use of the paper width a vertical-
z To achieve the best print results, you should confirm tall image can be rotated 90 degrees horizontally across the
the appearance of the original in the Print Preview width of the media. By rotating the image you can maximize Chapter 2
the use of the media and reduce waste. Media
Image (Print Preview)” in “Before You Begin”. If you perform this setting in the printer to rotate the page
(→ P.3-5) image, then the page is rotated automatically for the print Chapter 3
job. The image will not be rotated if it would not fit after
6
rotation. Different Objectives
Maintaining the
Printer
Chapter 5
Network Environ-
ment
Important
Chapter 6
z Confirm that the Roll Paper Width setting is correct Troubleshooting
for the media loaded in the printer.
z If the selection for the Media Source is not Roll Paper,
or if Borderless Printing is selected, this function
Chapter 7
cannot be used. Operation of the
Function Menus
Contents
3- 22 Index
TOP
1 Open the printer driver dialog box from the 4 Select Rotate Page 90 degrees (Conserve
Print dialog box of the application. Paper). Chapter 1
Basic Procedures
Note
“Basic Procedures”. (→ P.1-40) Using a Variety of
Media

Chapter 3
3 For Page Size on the Page Setup sheet
select the size of the original created in the
software application. Chapter 4
Maintaining the
Printer
Chapter 5

Network Environ-
then click the OK button. ment
Chapter 6
before printing. For more details about how to display Chapter 7
the print preview, please refer to “Confirming the Print Operation of the
Image (Print Preview)” in “Before You Begin”. Function Menus
(→ P.3-5)

Contents
3- 23 Index
TOP
Printing Several Pages on One Sheet 2 Select the Layout sheet.

Chapter 1
(Page Layout) Basic Procedures
You can print from 2 to 16 pages with reduced sizes on one
sheet. For example, if you have a document with a large
number of pages you can print two pages per sheet and the Chapter 2
Using a Variety of
number of pages will be one-half. Also, in the Page Layout Media
Printing dialog box you can perform more detailed settings,
such as selecting the arrangement of the pages on the
Chapter 3
sheet and specifying whether to print each page with a Printing Methods for
border line. Different Objectives
Chapter 4
Maintaining the
Printer
3 Select Page Layout.
Chapter 5
Network Environ-
ment
Chapter 6
Troubleshooting
Important
z This function is not supported with Windows NT 4.0.
Chapter 7
Operation of the
Function Menus
Print dialog box of the application.
Note
z For more details about how to open the printer driver Contents
dialog box, please refer to “Printing” in Chapter 1 The Preview shows you want the printed page will
“Basic Procedures”. (→ P.1-40) look like with the number of pages selected for one
sheet, then click the Set button in the lower right
corner of the Page Layout group.
3- 24 Index
TOP
4 From the Page Layout list, select the page 6 To change the arrangement of the pages on
layout that you want to print. the sheet, select the page order from the Chapter 1
Page Order list. Basic Procedures
Chapter 2
Using a Variety of
Media
Chapter 3
7
If you want each page on the sheet to print
with a border line, from the Page Border list Chapter 4
Maintaining the
click the type of border. Printer
Chapter 5
5 If you want to change the arrangement of the
Network Environ-
pages on the sheet or specify each page to ment
print with a border line, click the Set button to Chapter 6
open the Page Layout Printing dialog box. Troubleshooting
Note
Chapter 7
z If you select a border line to print, the image is sized Operation of the
down by 5% to allow for the border line. Function Menus
z As soon as you select a border line, you will see this
reflected in the Preview.
z If you select None then the size of the page is not
reduced.
Contents
8 Click the OK button to close the Page
Layout Printing dialog box.
3- 25 Index
TOP
Printing Posters (Page Layout)
After the image is enlarged and divided into several Basic Procedures
Note sections, you can print the print the sections and paste
z To achieve the best print results, you should confirm them together to assemble one large poster.
the print preview, please refer to “Confirming the Print Media
10
The print job starts. Important Chapter 4
z This function is not supported with Windows NT 4.0. Maintaining the
Printer
Chapter 5
Print dialog box of the application. Using the Printer in a
Network Environ-
Note ment
z For more details about how to open the printer driver Chapter 6
dialog box, please refer to “Printing” in Chapter 1 Troubleshooting
Chapter 7
Operation of the
Function Menus
Contents
3- 26 Index
TOP
2 Select the Layout sheet. 4 Select Poster 2x2 from the Layout list.
Confirm the appearance of the selected layout in the Chapter 1
Preview. Basic Procedures
Chapter 2
Using a Variety of
Media
Chapter 3
Chapter 4
Maintaining the
Printer
3 Select Page Layout. Chapter 5

5
Network Environ-
If you do not want to print any panel (a section ment
of the divided image), click the Set button in the Chapter 6
lower right corner of the Page Layout section Troubleshooting
to open the Pages to Print dialog box.
Chapter 7
Operation of the
Function Menus
Contents
3- 27 Index
TOP
6 Click and select either the panel or the
Using Watermarks
appropriate checkbox to deselect the panel Chapter 1
for printing. You can print watermarks on printouts to mark them for Basic Procedures
special handling. Several standard watermarks
(CONFIDENTIAL, DO NOT COPY, etc.) have been
prepared. Chapter 2
Using a Variety of
Media
Chapter 3
Note
z If you click the Invert button, the current selections of Chapter 4
the checkmarks are reversed. In the Preview area you Important Maintaining the
will see graphic images displayed for the sections to z This function is not supported with Windows NT 4.0. Printer
be printed and white blanks for the sections that will z The Watermark function cannot be used if the print job
not be printed. is set up with a poster page layout. Chapter 5
7
Click the OK button to close the Pages to
Print dialog box.
Network Environ-
ment
8
Chapter 6
Confirm the content of the settings Preview, Troubleshooting
then click the OK button. Note
Note “Basic Procedures”. (→ P.1-40) Operation of the
z To achieve the best print results, you should confirm Function Menus
(→ P.3-5)
Contents
3- 28
The print job starts. Index
TOP
2 Select the Layout sheet. 4 From the Watermark list, select the
watermark that you want to print. Chapter 1
The watermark that you selected will appear in the Basic Procedures
Preview on the left.
Chapter 2
Using a Variety of
Media
Chapter 3
Chapter 4
Maintaining the
Printer
3 Select Watermark. Chapter 5

Network Environ-
ment
Note Chapter 6
z The following watermarks can be selected from the list. Troubleshooting
CONFIDENTIAL, COPY, DRAFT, FILE COPY, FINAL,
PRELIMINARY, PROOF, TOP SECRET.
z Click the Edit Watermark button to open the Edit Chapter 7
Operation of the
Watermark dialog box. In this dialog box you can
Function Menus
create, edit, and register your own watermarks, in
addition to the pre-made watermarks provided with the
printer driver. For more details, please refer to Printing
Watermarks > Creating an Original Watermark, or
Editing and Deleting an Original Watermark. Contents
3- 29 Index
TOP
Note
Vertical and Horizontal Banner Printing
Chapter 1
z To achieve the best print results, you should confirm (Long Prints) Basic Procedures
before printing. For more details about how to display Matching the Width of the Roll
the print preview, please refer to “Confirming the Print Once you become familiar with fitting images to the full Chapter 2
Image (Print Preview)” in “Before You Begin”. width of the roll with your software application, it is very Using a Variety of
(→ P.3-5) easy to print vertical and horizontal banners. Media
Here we will describe as an example how to take a 3.94
6 Click the Print button in the Print dialog box. in. x 19.67 in. original and enlarge to fit a 24” roll (approx-
imately 610 mm wide), and then print it as a banner
Chapter 3
The print job starts. (24.00 in. x 128.90 in.). Different Objectives
Note Chapter 4
Maintaining the
z This printer can print a sheet up to 15, 250 mm (600in.) Printer
long.
Chapter 5
Network Environ-
ment
Chapter 6
Troubleshooting
Chapter 7
Operation of the
Function Menus
Contents
3- 30 Index
TOP
1 Start the software application. 5 Select the Page Setup sheet.
2 From the File menu select Print to open the

Chapter 1
Basic Procedures
Print dialog box.
3 Confirm that the printer name Canon Chapter 2

Using a Variety of
W6400PG is displayed. Media
The sample of the Print dialog box below is from
Microsoft Word. Chapter 3
Chapter 4
Maintaining the
Printer
6 Click the Size Options button to open the Chapter 5

Media Size Options dialog box. Network Environ-
ment
Chapter 6
Troubleshooting
Note
z If the above printer name is not displayed, then select
Canon W6400PG from the Name list. Chapter 7
4
Operation of the
Function Menus
Click the Properties button to open the
printer driver dialog box.
Contents
3- 31 Index
TOP
トップ
7 Define the size in the Media Size Options dialog box.
Chapter 1
1. Input the desired Custom Media Size Name. Basic Procedures
Chapter 2
Using a Variety of
2. For Media Size set the Width and the Height. Media
* This example shows 3.94 in for the Width and 19.67 in
for the Height. Chapter 3
3. Click the Add button. Different Objectives
4. Click the OK button to close the Media Size Options
dialog box. Chapter 4
Maintaining the
Printer
Note
z After you register a size in the Media Size Options dialog box, then the name and dimensions that you set for new size Chapter 5
will appear in the Media Size List. For more details about the Media Size Options dialog box, please refer to “About Using the Printer in a
Media Size Options”. (→ P.3-51) Network Environ-
z In addition to the method above for setting the media size, you can also use the Custom Size Settings dialog box. To ment
open the Custom Size Settings dialog box, click Page Size on the Page Setup sheet. Chapter 6
Troubleshooting
Chapter 7
Operation of the
Function Menus
Contents
3- 32 Index
TOP
z A custom size sets a temporary user-defined page size <If you are using Microsoft Word...>
between the software application and the printer driver.
a Select the Paper Size sheet, then for the size select Chapter 1
For this reason, when the software application is
the size you defined and registered in the Media Basic Procedures
closed the size defined in the Custom Size Settings
dialog box is disabled. If you want the custom size Size Options dialog box.
setting to remain in effect, then you should register the
custom size in the Media Size Options dialog box. Chapter 2
Using a Variety of
z Some software applications may not display a custom Media
size item. In such a case, please register the custom
size in the Media Size Options dialog box.
Chapter 3
8 Click the OK button to close the printer driver
dialog box.
9 Click the Close button to close the Page

Chapter 4
Maintaining the
Layout Printing dialog box. b Select Landscape for the Orientation, then click Printer
10
the OK button to close the Page Setup dialog box.
In the software application select Page Chapter 5
Setup from the File menu to open the Page Note
Network Environ-
Setup dialog box. z This sets the Orientation to Landscape for the ment
banner.
Chapter 6
Troubleshooting
Chapter 7
Operation of the
Function Menus
Contents
3- 33 Index
TOP
<If you are using Microsoft Excel...> c Click the OK button to close the Page Setup dialog
box.
a Select the Page sheet, then for the Paper Size Chapter 1
select the size you defined and registered in the Basic Procedures
Medial Size Options dialog box. Note
z For Display click Zoom to adjust the size of the
display. Chapter 2
Using a Variety of
Media
Chapter 3
Chapter 4
Maintaining the
Printer
<If you are using Microsoft PowerPoint...>

Chapter 5
b Select Landscape for the Orientation, then click Using the Printer in a
a In the Page Setup dialog enter the dimensions for
the OK button to close the Page Setup dialog box. the custom size settings in the Width and Height Network Environ-
ment
boxes. This example shows 3.94 inches for the
Note Width and 19.67 inches for the Height. Chapter 6
z This sets the Orientation to Landscape for the banner. Troubleshooting
Chapter 7
Operation of the
Function Menus
Contents
3- 34 Index
TOP
b Click the OK button to close the Page Setup dialog 11 Create the original in the software
box. application. Chapter 1
Basic Procedures
Note Note
z Also when printing the original from PowerPoint if you z The example below shows the original created in
select Scale to fit Paper in the Print dialog box the Microsoft Word. Select Insert > Picture > WordArt, Chapter 2
driver will size the page to fit the media loaded in the select the appropriate style, then enter the text. Using a Variety of
printer. z For more details about how to create the original, Media
please refer to the operating instructions for each
software application. Chapter 3
Chapter 4
Maintaining the
Printer
Chapter 5
Network Environ-
ment
Chapter 6
Troubleshooting
12 After the original is created, from the File

menu select Print to open the Print dialog Chapter 7
box. Operation of the
13
Function Menus
Click the Properties button to open the
printer driver dialog box.
Contents
3- 35 Index
TOP
トップ
14 Select the Main sheet and perform the settings for a long print.
Chapter 1
Basic Procedures
1. For Print Preferences select Long Format (Banner).

Chapter 2
Using a Variety of
2. For Media Type select the type of media. Media
Chapter 3
Chapter 4
Maintaining the
Printer
15 Select the Page Setup sheet and perform the settings for a long print.
Chapter 5
Network Environ-
ment
1. For Page Size select the media name registered in Chapter 6
Media Size Options. Troubleshooting
Chapter 7
2. Select Enlarged/Reduced Printing and click Fit Roll Operation of the
Paper Width. Function Menus
3. For Media Source select the Roll Paper and for Paper
Contents
Roll Width select 24-in. Roll (609.6 mm).
3- 36 Index
TOP
z If you do not see the checkbox for Enlarged/Reduced
Printing, then cancel the Borderless Printing
selection. The Enlarged/Reduced Printing checkbox
Basic Procedures
will appear.
z Under Enlarged/Reduced Printing select Fit Roll Note
Paper Width to open the dialog box below. Select the z If the print job does not execute properly on you
width of the roll loaded in the printer, and then click operating system (Windows Server 2003, Windows Chapter 2
Using a Variety of
OK. XP, Windows 2000, Windows Me, Windows 98), click Media
Special Settings on the Layout sheet to open the
Special Settings dialog box. You may be able to
enable printing by clicking the Fine Zoom list and then Chapter 3
selecting On. Different Objectives
z If you cannot perform the print job with Windows NT
4.0, you may be able to enable printing by selecting
Standard or Draft under Print Quality on the Main Chapter 4
Maintaining the
16
sheet.
Printer
Confirm the content of the settings Preview,
Chapter 5
z To achieve the best print results, you should confirm ment
before printing. For more details about how to display Troubleshooting
Operation of the
Function Menus
Contents
3- 37 Index
TOP
Printing without Top and Bottom Mar- 1 Open the printer driver dialog box from the
Print dialog box of the application. Chapter 1
gins (Conserve Paper) Basic Procedures
The white space in the top and bottom margins can be Note
eliminated for printing to save paper. The printer does not z For more details about how to open the printer driver
feed the white space in the margins to save paper. This dialog box, please refer to “Printing” in Chapter 1 Chapter 2
“Basic Procedures”. (→ P.1-40) Using a Variety of
function can be used only when Roll Paper is selected as Media
the Media Source.
2 Select the Layout sheet.
Chapter 3
Chapter 4
Maintaining the
Printer
Chapter 5
z You use this method during borderless printing as ment
shown in the illustration below.
Chapter 6
Troubleshooting
Chapter 7
Operation of the
Function Menus
Important Contents
z This function cannot be used when Cut Sheet is
selected as the Media Source.
z With this feature cannot be selected with Poster (2 x
2) set for the page layout.
3- 38 Index
TOP
3 Select No Spaces at Top or Bottom
Custom Print Quality
(Conserve Paper). Chapter 1
Customizing Print Quality Basic Procedures
When you need to frequently perform combined settings

for print quality and print speed, you can select Custom
Chapter 2
Settings under Print Quality and then do the print qual-
Using a Variety of
ity and resolution settings in the Custom Settings dialog Media
box according to the requirements of your requirements.
For example, if you need to set up printing text mixed
with photos or graphics, or some other such job, you can Chapter 3
raise the text resolution and lower the photo or graphic Different Objectives
resolution.

Chapter 4
Maintaining the
Print dialog box of the application. Printer
Note Chapter 5
4 Confirm the content of the settings Preview, z For more details about how to open the printer driver
dialog box, please refer to “Printing” in Chapter 1
Network Environ-
then click the OK button. ment
Chapter 6
before printing. For more details about how to display Chapter 7
the print preview, please refer to “Confirming the Print Operation of the
Image (Print Preview)” in “Before You Begin”. Function Menus
(→ P.3-5)

Contents
3- 39 Index
TOP
2 Confirm that the Main sheet is displayed. 3 From the Print Quality list, select Custom
Settings. Chapter 1
Basic Procedures
Chapter 2
Using a Variety of
Media
Chapter 3
Chapter 4
Maintaining the
Printer
Chapter 5
A Settings button appears in the lower right corner Using the Printer in a
of the Print Quality group. Network Environ-
ment
4 Click the Settings button in the Print Chapter 6
Troubleshooting
Quality group to open the Custom Settings
dialog box.
Chapter 7
Operation of the
Function Menus
Contents
3- 40 Index
TOP
5 From the Print Quality list, select the quality z If one of the types of media below is selected, Draft
cannot be selected under Print Quality.
settings. Chapter 1
Premium Matte Paper, Glossy Photo, SemiGlos Photo
Basic Procedures
Paper, Heavyweight Glossy Photo Paper, Heavyweight
SemiGlos Photo Paper, Synthetic Paper, Adhesive
Synthetic Paper, Backlit Film, Flame Resistant Cloth, Chapter 2
Japanese Paper Washi, CAD Translucent Matte Film Using a Variety of
6
Media
Confirm the resolution.
Chapter 3
z The print quality settings that you can select for the
custom settings are described below. Chapter 4
Maintaining the
Print Quality Content Printer
Prioritizes attaining the highest image
Highest
quality for printing.
Chapter 5
Prioritizes attaining high image quality Important Using the Printer in a
High
for printing. Network Environ-
z The resolution is set automatically depending on which
Attains a stable image at an average ment
Standard print quality item is selected as shown below. If you
printing speed. need to change the resolution you can perform so with Chapter 6
Prioritizes high printing speed but you the setting under Print Quality. Troubleshooting
Draft should check layout and other aspects
of the image after printing. Print Quality Resolution Content
z The items that are available for selection under Print Print speed is slower due to Chapter 7
the higher resolution Operation of the
Quality may differ depending on which print media are
Highest, setting. Achieves the best Function Menus
used. Here is a list of the media where Highest under Fine
High, printing results, but printing
Print Quality is available. (600 dpi)
Standard time is longer and a large
Heavyweight Glossy Photo Paper, Heavyweight Semi- amount of computer
Glossy Photo Paper, Japanese Paper Washi, CAD memory is required.
Translucent Matte Film Print speed is faster due to Contents
the lower resolution setting.
Standard, Quick
Printing time is shorter and
Draft (300 dpi)
not as much computer
memory is required.
3- 41 Index
TOP
z Even with Print Quality set to Standard, the
Resolution is fixed at Fine (600 dpi) if one of the Fine Adjusting Color for Printing
Chapter 1
settings below is selected for Media Type. If any other
media is selected, the Resolution is fixed at Quick Adjusting Color Basic Procedures
(300 dpi). Basically the color settings of the software application
Premium Matte Paper, Backlit Film, Fine Art Photo, have priority, but if the results of a print job are not what
Chapter 2
Fine Art Heavyweight Photo, Fine Art Textured, Can- you want you can also adjust color in the printer driver.
Using a Variety of
vas SemiGlos, CAD Plain Paper, CAD Tracing Paper, You can also take color photos captured with a scanner Media
CAD Translucent Matte Film or a digital camera, or any other color image, and print
them in monochrome.
7 Click the OK button to close the Custom We will introduce color adjustment.
Chapter 3
1
Settings dialog box. Different Objectives
Open the printer driver dialog box from the
Note Print dialog box of the application. Chapter 4
Maintaining the
z If you select Enhance Text with Photos in the Printer
Custom Settings dialog box then when you have text Note
mixed with photos or graphic data, the resolution of the z For more details about how to open the printer driver
text will be raised and the resolution of the photos or Chapter 5
dialog box, please refer to “Printing” in Chapter 1 Using the Printer in a
graphics will be lowered. “Basic Procedures”. (→ P.1-40) Network Environ-
z Only the Halftone and Error Diffusion custom ment
settings can be set. Error diffusion arranges non-
standard pixels and displays them as gradations Chapter 6
(halftones). This setting is ideal for photographs or Troubleshooting
graphic images that require printing with fine
gradations.
Chapter 7
Operation of the
Function Menus
Contents
3- 42 Index
TOP
2 Confirm that the Main sheet is displayed.
Note Chapter 1
z Color Mode presents these following items for Basic Procedures
selection.
Color Mode Content

Chapter 2
Color Prints in color. Using a Variety of
Provides stable monochrome photo Media
printing with minimal tone change
Monochrome
and enables detailed adjustment of Chapter 3
(Photo):
gray scale gradations and color Printing Methods for
tones. Different Objectives
Monochrome Prints in monochrome.
Prints with only a limited number of Chapter 4
colors. Use this setting when you Maintaining the
Solid Color Printer
need fine lines with light colors in a
sharp image.
3 On the Main sheet select Color Mode then Black Only
All colors other than white are
printed black.
Chapter 5
Color. Network Environ-
ment
Important
Chapter 6
z Monochrome (Photo) can be selected for Color Mode Troubleshooting
only if one of the following types of paper is selected:
Glossy Photo Paper/Semi-Glossy Photo Paper/
Heavyweight Glossy Photo Paper/Heavyweight
Chapter 7
SemiGlos Photo Paper/Fine Art Photo/Fine Art
Operation of the
Heavyweight Photo/Fine Art Textured/Japanese Paper Function Menus
Washi
Contents
3- 43 Index
TOP
4 Select Manual Color Settings then click the The Color Settings dialog box opens.
Color Settings button. Chapter 1
Basic Procedures
Chapter 2
Using a Variety of
Media
Chapter 3
Chapter 4
Maintaining the
Printer
Chapter 5
z Manual Color Settings are enabled when Color, ment
Monochrome (Photo), or Monochrome is selected for Chapter 6
Color Mode. Troubleshooting
Chapter 7
Operation of the
Function Menus
Contents
3- 44 Index
TOP
5 Confirm that the Color Adjustment sheet is 8 Drag the slide bar to the left or right for the
displayed, then click the Object Adjustment item that you want to adjust. You can also Chapter 1
button. enter the value direction or use the arrows of Basic Procedures
The Object Adjustment dialog box opens. the spinbox to rapidly raise or lower the
value.
Chapter 2
Using a Variety of
Media
Chapter 3
6 Select the item that you want to adjust:

Chapter 4
Maintaining the
Image, Graphics, or Text. Printer
Chapter 5
Network Environ-
ment
Chapter 6
Troubleshooting
Chapter 7
Function Menus
z Note that for this printer driver all the items (Image,
Graphics, Text) are selected as the default settings.
7 Click the OK button to close the Object

Contents
Adjustment dialog box.
3- 45 Index
TOP
9 Click the OK button to close the Color
Note Settings dialog box. Chapter 1
z Color Adjustment presents the following items for Basic Procedures
selection. Color Matching
When you print an image captured with a scanner or a
Color Adjustment Content digital camera, sometimes the appearance of the printout Chapter 2
Cyan does not match what you see on the screen. Using a Variety of
You can calibrate the hues for Cyan,
Magenta This is caused by differences between the display color Media
Magenta, Yellow.
Yellow and the printed color. In the Color Settings dialog box
you can use the items on the Matching sheet, that is, Chapter 3
Adjusts the relative contrast from
Contrast select a color profile ICC (International Color Consor- Printing Methods for
brightest to darkest colors.
tium), or ICM (Image Color Management), or select a Different Objectives
matching mode, input profile, or printer profile, to have
Adjusts the relative contrast from the hues of the colors on the screen more closely resem-
Vivid Chapter 4
brightest to darkest colors. ble the colors in the printout. Maintaining the
Printer
Brightness
Adjusts brightness from the darkest to
brightest colors so none are lost in the 1 Open the printer driver dialog box from the
brightness of the printed image. Print dialog box of the application. Chapter 5
Adjusts grayscale from cool colors Network Environ-
Gray Tone
(blue tones) to warm colors (red Note ment
Adjustment
tones). z For more details about how to open the printer driver Chapter 6
dialog box, please refer to “Printing” in Chapter 1 Troubleshooting
Important “Basic Procedures”. (→ P.1-40)
z As you change each item, the image of the Preview
on the left changes to reflect the adjustment. The Chapter 7
Original shows the appearance of the initial settings, Operation of the
and the Preview reflects the current settings. Function Menus
z Even after performing the settings on the Color
Adjustment sheet if you remove the selections of the
Manual Color Settings the Color Adjustment
settings are disabled. Remove the Color Adjustment
selection if you do not want to perform color
Contents
adjustments.
3- 46 Index
TOP
2 Confirm that the Main sheet is displayed.
Note Chapter 1
z Color Mode presents these following items for selection. Basic Procedures
Color Mode Content

Color Prints in color. Chapter 2
Provides stable monochrome photo Using a Variety of
printing with minimal tone change Media
Monochrome
and enables detailed adjustment of
(Photo):
gray scale gradations and color Chapter 3
tones. Printing Methods for
Monochrome Prints in monochrome. Different Objectives
Prints with only a limited number of
colors. Use this setting when you Chapter 4
Solid Color Maintaining the
need fine lines with light colors in a
sharp image. Printer
All colors other than white are
3
Black Only
printed black. Chapter 5
On the Main sheet select Color for Color Using the Printer in a
Mode. Network Environ-
Important ment
z Monochrome (Photo) can be selected for Color Mode
Chapter 6
only if one of the following types of paper is selected: Troubleshooting
Glossy Photo Paper/Semi-Glossy Photo Paper/
Heavyweight Glossy Photo Paper/Heavyweight
SemiGlos Photo Paper/Fine Art Photo/Fine Art
Chapter 7
Heavyweight Photo/Fine Art Textured/Japanese Paper
Operation of the
Washi Function Menus
Contents
3- 47 Index
TOP
4 Select Manual Color Settings then click the The Color Settings dialog box opens.
Color Settings button. Chapter 1
Basic Procedures
Chapter 2
Using a Variety of
Media
Chapter 3
Chapter 4
Maintaining the
Printer
Note
5 In the Color Settings dialog box, select the
Chapter 5
Network Environ-
Matching sheet.
z Manual Color Settings are enabled when Color, ment
Monochrome (Photo), or Monochrome is selected for Chapter 6
Color Mode. Troubleshooting
Chapter 7
Operation of the
Function Menus
Contents
3- 48 Index
TOP
6 From the Matching Mode list, select the Matching Mode Content
matching mode. Calibrates color in the printer driver Chapter 1
using the Windows ICM function for Basic Procedures
color calibration at the host
Host ICM Mode computer.
* This mode is displayed only for
Chapter 2
Windows Server 2003, Windows Using a Variety of
XP, and Windows 2000. Media
Does not execute color matching.

The color matching is performed in Chapter 3
the software application or Printing Methods for
Off performed by and independent
color profile; select when you want
the color matching of the printer Chapter 4
driver is ignored. Maintaining the
Printer
Important Chapter 5
z The mode you select for the Matching Mode affects Using the Printer in a
what items are available for selection. ment
z Here is a list of the available Matching Modes. z The warning message below is displayed for Driver
ICM Mode, and Host ICM Mode. If you do not want to Chapter 6
Matching Mode Content disable the color adjustments, click the No button. Troubleshooting
After you click No, the Driver ICM Mode and Host
Driver Matching Calibrates color using the original ICM Mode cannot be selected.
Mode color profile of the printer driver. Chapter 7
Operation of the
Calibrates the color in the printer Function Menus
ICC Matching
driver using the standards of ICC
Mode
color profiles.
Calibrates color in the printer driver
using the Windows ICM function for Contents
Driver ICM color calibration.
Mode *This mode is displayed only for
Windows Server 2003, Windows
XP, and Windows 2000.
3- 49 Index
TOP
7 When ICC Matching Mode is selected for 8 Select a matching method from the input
the Matching Mode, at Image under Input profile Matching Method list. Chapter 1
Profile Settings select a profile from the Basic Procedures
Input Profile list.
Chapter 2
Using a Variety of
Media
Chapter 3
Chapter 4
Maintaining the
Printer
Chapter 5
z Matching Method presents the following items for selection. ment
Matching Method Content Chapter 6
Note
Troubleshooting
z If you want to perform different settings for Graphics Makes the best selections for the
and Text, then you must cancel the selection of Use Image, Graphics, and Text items.
the Same Profile for All Objects. Automatic
*This item is available only when Chapter 7
Driver Matching Mode is selected. Operation of the
Function Menus
This is the best mode for photographs.
Achieves the best color results
Perceptual
matching the hues of the colors on the
(Photographic)
screen with those in the printout, also
provides smooth gradation. Contents
Faithfully reproduces the input data.
Colorimetric Performs white color calibration, so there
is no color when white data is output.
3- 50 Index
TOP
Matching Method Content
Colorimetric Faithfully reproduces the input data.
About Media Size Options
Chapter 1
(No White Point No white point correction is
Correction) performed. Creating Custom Sizes Basic Procedures
This is the best mode for graphics. On the Page Setup sheet of the printer driver click the
Saturation Achieves the best results with priority Size Options... button to open the Media Size Options
Chapter 2
on color saturation. dialog box. In this dialog box you can create definitions
Using a Variety of
of original media sizes and register them. Once a custom
9
Media
From the Printer Profile Settings list, select size has been defined, it will be listed along with the
a printer profile. standard sizes and be available for selection.
Chapter 3

Chapter 4
Printer
dialog box, please refer to “Printing” in Chapter 1
“Basic Procedures”. (→ P.1-40) Chapter 5
Network Environ-
ment
Chapter 6
Troubleshooting
Chapter 7
Operation of the
Function Menus
Note
z A print profile can be selected only when ICC
Matching Mode is selected under the Matching
Mode.
Contents
10 Click the OK button to close the Color
Settings dialog box.
3- 51 Index
TOP
2 Select the Page Setup sheet. 3 Click the Size Options... button to open the
Media Size Options dialog box. Chapter 1
Basic Procedures
Chapter 2
Using a Variety of
Media
Chapter 3
Chapter 4
Maintaining the
Printer
Chapter 5
Network Environ-
ment
Chapter 6
Troubleshooting
Chapter 7
Operation of the
Function Menus
Contents
3- 52 Index
TOP
トップ
4 Define the size in the Media Size Options dialog box.
Chapter 1
1. Input the media size you create for Custom Media Size Basic Procedures
Name.
Chapter 2
2. Select the unit for the size and click. Using a Variety of
Media
3. Enter Width and Height you want in Media Size.
Chapter 3
4. Click the Add button. Different Objectives
Chapter 4
Maintaining the
After you click the Add button, the user-defined media name registered in the Media Size List of the Media Size Printer
Options dialog box and the media size are displayed.
Chapter 5
Network Environ-
ment
Chapter 6
Troubleshooting
Chapter 7
Operation of the
Function Menus
Contents
3- 53 Index
TOP
5 Click the OK button to close the dialog box.
Note Chapter 1
z As soon as you select the name of a media size from Note Basic Procedures
the Media Size List, the Width and Height settings of z You can define up to 50 custom sizes for media.
the selected size are automatically entered. z The settings in the Media Size Options dialog box
z If Borderless Printing Size is selected, the selection remain in effect even after the software application is Chapter 2
for Width changes automatically to a roll width that closed. Using a Variety of
supports borderless printing. Select a Width setting for z To delete a registered custom size, from the Media Media
the width of the desired roller, then enter the Height Size List select the name of the custom size to delete,
that you want. then click the Delete button. Chapter 3
z If you want to fix the ratio between the width and z To edit a registered custom size, from the Media Size Printing Methods for
height, select Fix the Ratio of the Width to Height. If List, select the name of the custom size, then change Different Objectives
you change the Height then the Width will adjust the Width and Height settings, then click the Register
automatically so the ratio of the width to height button. Chapter 4
remains the same as the original ration; similarly, if you z The standard sizes (marked with a red dot on the left), Maintaining the
change the Width the Height setting will also adjust or sizes that you defined with another printer driver Printer
automatically at the same ratio. (marked with a white dot on the left), can be neither
edited nor deleted. Chapter 5
Important Using the Printer in a
z The Fix the Ratio of the Width to Height is not Network Environ-
ment
available when Borderless Printing Size is selected.
Chapter 6
Troubleshooting
Chapter 7
Operation of the
Function Menus
Contents
3- 54 Index
TOP
Selecting a Media Display Series
You can select a size series for Display Series that will Note Chapter 1
display for the Media Size and Page Size on the Page z If you select an oversize for the Display Series then Basic Procedures
Setup sheet in the Media Size Options dialog box. Oversize will display in front of the media name as
To select a display series to display for the Page Size shown below. For example, if the page size selection is
and Media Size in the Page Setup sheet, in the Media ISO A4 then Oversize - ISO A4 is displayed. Chapter 2
Size Options dialog box select the Display Series that Using a Variety of
you want to use. Also, if you want to cancel a size series Media
selected for display, just click and cancel the Display
Series selection. Chapter 3
Chapter 4
Maintaining the
z When you see Oversize - prefixed to a page size, you Printer
can print documents and images with the specified
sizes as shown below. However, when you apply this Chapter 5
function to print you must set a media size large Using the Printer in a
enough to accommodate the page size plus the extra Network Environ-
white space. You cannot perform oversize printing ment
using a custom size document, an media size selected Chapter 6
for borderless printing, or media size that is too large Troubleshooting
to feed with this printer.
Original Data Size of Media to Print Results Chapter 7

to Print Load in the Printer
Operation of the
Original Function Menus
Size
Original Size
Original Size +
Data Size
of Margins
Contents
3- 55 Index
TOP
When the Printout Quality Is Not Clean Software Provided for Windows
Chapter 1
The following software applications are provided for use
How to Set the Media Type Basic Procedures
with Windows.
You can use the printer operation panel to perform suit-
able settings for ink drying time of each media and other The function of each software application is described
below. Chapter 2
features. These settings can also adjusted with the items
Using a Variety of
in the Media Detailed Settings dialog box in the printer
driver. If the printouts are not clear, you may be able to
Basic Software for Printing Media
correct the problem by adjusting the settings in this dia- imagePROGRAF Printer Driver 2005
log box. Chapter 3
This is a software application that required for the Printing Methods for
To open the Media Detailed Settings dialog box, in the printer to print. This must be installed on every Different Objectives
printer driver open the Main sheet and then in the lower computer that will use the printer. The printer driver not
right corner of the Media Type group box click the Set- only allows the printer to print, the driver also provides Chapter 4
tings... button. many other important functions such as enlargement/ Maintaining the
For more details about the Media Detailed Settings dia- reduction, borderless printing, color adjustment, Printer
log box, please refer to the online Help. multiple copy printing, and others. This can be used
with Windows Server 2003, Windows XP, Windows
Chapter 5
2000, Windows NT 4.0, Windows Me, and Windows Using the Printer in a
98. Network Environ-
The printer driver is on the provided User W6400 ment
Software CD-ROM. (→ Quick Start Guide) Chapter 6
Troubleshooting
Displaying the Printer Status
GARO Status Monitor
This utility software is used with Windows to display Chapter 7
Operation of the
the details about printer errors on the computer
Function Menus
screen. This can be used with Windows Server 2003,
Windows XP, Windows 2000, Windows NT 4.0,
Windows Me, and Windows 98.
This is provided on the W6400 User Software CD-
ROM and it is installed automatically with the printer Contents
driver.
3- 56 Index
TOP
Using the Printer on a Network Device Status Extension
LPR Port If printer sharing is performed where IIS is installed on Chapter 1
Windows XP or Windows 2000 you can use your Web Basic Procedures
This software must be installed on Windows Me or Browser to display information about shared printers
Windows 98 so the computer can use the printer on a and manage print jobs. By installing Device Status
network with TCP/IP.
Extension on Windows Server 2003, Windows XP, or Chapter 2
To install this software, use the Setup Menu of the Windows 2000, the screens that display printer Using a Variety of
W6400 User Software CD-ROM to start the dynamic information for printers that support Device Status Media
installation for both the printer and this software. Extension can be replaced with the screens provided
GARO Device Setup Utility by Canon. Further, if you use NetSpot Console, you Chapter 3
can start NetSpot Console from the Device Status Printing Methods for
The software application for Windows that allows you
Extension screen to perform printer and other settings. Different Objectives
to use the computer to set up the network information
Device Status Extension is stored on the provided
for the printer.
W6400 User Software CD-ROM. For more details
(→ Chapter 5 “Using the Printer in a Network Chapter 4
about how to install and use this software, please refer Maintaining the
Environment”)
to the Readme.txt file in the DSE folder. Printer
Remote UI
The function that allows you to use a Web browser on Creating Posters Easily
Chapter 5
a networked computer to display the status of the PosterArtist Using the Printer in a
printer and to set up and delete print jobs. This utility is Network Environ-
The software provides a wizard that helps you create
built into the network interface of this printer. ment
posters simply, and guides you from creation through
(→ Chapter 5 “Using the Printer in a Network
printing. Original image for a poster can be created Chapter 6
Environment”) Troubleshooting
freely in a software application regardless of the print
NetSpot Console settings performed in the printer driver. Also,
This software allows you to use a Web browser on a borderless printing and banner size posters can be
computer connected to a network to display the status created easily. Posters created with PosterArtist can Chapter 7
of the printer and perform printer and network settings be printed only on this printer. Operation of the
for a server running with Windows Server 2003, Function Menus
It can be used with Japanese Windows XP, Windows
Windows XP, Windows 2000, Windows NT 4.0, 2000, Windows Me, and Windows 98 SE.
Windows Me, and Windows 98. You can download
NetSpot Console free of charge from the Canon home
page (http://canon.jp/). Install as required on the Contents
server computer.
3- 57 Index
TOP
Printing Beautiful Photographs Printing Images Created with CAD
Digital Photo Print Pro Systems Chapter 1
Basic Procedures
This software allows you to easily take a photo image Canon imagePROGRAF HDI Printer Driver
captured with a digital camera, enlarge it, and then The Canon imagePROGRAF HDI printer driver is
print it without borders. You can also easily adjust dedicated to printing accurate, clean images created
color brightness and contrast, eliminate the effects of Chapter 2
with AutoCAD CAD software. Normal print jobs sent Using a Variety of
red-eye and moiré in photo images, and correct through the Windows printer driver may show some Media
subject back light. Also, you can use one of the loss of precision in printing fine lines, but the Canon
templates provided to easily print and original calendar imagePROFGRAF HDI driver communicates with the
or create a list of images with text entered. This Chapter 3
printer directly from the computer, processes data with Printing Methods for
software application requires Windows XP or its own internal commands and delivers superior Different Objectives
Windows 2000. reproduction of lines in printing that preserves the
Printing Beautiful Digital Camera Images accuracy of the originals.
Chapter 4
(→ HDI Driver Guide) Maintaining the
(for the Professional) Printer
imagePROGRAF Print Plug-In for Photoshop Select the Media Type
imagePROGRAF Print Plug-In for Photoshop Media Configuration Tool Chapter 5
(hereafter "Print Plug-In) makes it possible to Using the Printer in a
Media Configuration Tool is the software used to Network Environ-
reproduce and print the vivid RGB color of Adobe register information about print media (paper, film, ment
created in PhotoShop. This software is intended for etc.) that can be used with the printer as it becomes
professionals and high-end users who want to obtain available. The functions of this software are provided Chapter 6
the best finished color hues. Troubleshooting
for users who have an in-depth knowledge of printers
After installation of Print Plug-In, you can view a and print media.
Preview within PhotoShop that allows you to confirm You an use this software to upload and download
how faithful the colors are reproduced and then adjust Chapter 7
media information to and from the printer about media Operation of the
them. Because you can process RGB 16-bit data just names, thickness, printhead height, suction fan Function Menus
as it is with PhotoShop, you can print without losing strength, default margins, and other information. A
the high color gradations of the originals. Also, you function is also provided that allows the user to
can save the used settings so when you want to print acquire the most recent information about media for
with the same settings you only have to open and read printing when using the printer connected to a
that information to print again. network. Contents
(→ Print Plug-In for Photoshop Guide) (→ Media Configuration Tool Guide)
3- 58 Index
Printing from Macintosh
TOP
トップ
Printing from Macintosh Chapter 1

Basic Procedures
This printer driver provides a variety of printer functions to meet your printing needs. In this chapter we will introduce these
functions.
Chapter 2
Using a Variety of
Before You Begin Media
There are some functions you should remember and use when you use this printer. Before you use the printer for different
printing tasks, please read this section. Chapter 3
Basic Settings to Meet Your Needs (Original Type) Different Objectives
To achieve the best printing, you must adjust the color and other settings for the objective of the document. This printer
driver provides superior settings frequently used to produce posters, POP ads, digital camera prints, CAD designs, and Chapter 4
other prints. Just select from the list the type of document you need and perform the basic procedure for the print job. Maintaining the
Printer
The following applications are provided for the types of prints shown below.
Setting Values Chapter 5

Types of Documents Content Print Matching Color Using the Printer in a
Paper Type Network Environ-
Quality Method Adjustment
ment
Best for printing normal Perceptual
Standard documents, with text, images, Plain Paper Standard (OS X) Default Chapter 6
graphics, etc. mixed together. Auto (OS 8/9) Troubleshooting
Best for printing mixed text

and illustrations with bright Heavyweight Coated
POP Standard Saturation Contrast: +5 Chapter 7
and forceful eyecatching such Paper
Operation of the
as store posters. Function Menus
Proofing Paper *1
Best for printing posters with Contrast: +10
Poster Heavyweight Coated Standard Automatic
centered photographs. Brightness: +5
Paper *2
Photo
Best for printing photos
Glossy Photo Paper *1
Contrast: +10
Contents
(from digital Heavyweight Coated Standard Perceptual
captured with a digital camera. Brightness: +5
camera) Paper *2
3- 59 Index
TOP
トップ
Setting Values
Types of Documents Content Print Matching Color
Paper Type Chapter 1
Quality Method Adjustment Basic Procedures
Best for reproduction of
Glossy Photo Paper *1
Photo (from scanned photographs with
Heavyweight Coated Standard Colorimetric Default
scanner) color faithful to the quality of
Paper *2 Chapter 2
the original.
Using a Variety of
Best for long banner formats Media
Long Format Heavyweight Coated Contrast: +10
(vertical and horizontal) with Standard Saturation
(Banner) Paper Saturation: +5
mixed illustrations and text.
Chapter 3
Best for plans and design Different Objectives
CAD CAD Plain Paper Standard Saturation Default
drawings with fine lines.
Chapter 4
Prints giving priority to and Matching Maintaining the
No color Printer
using the software application Plain Paper Standard Mode Default
correction
setting for color matching No Correction
Chapter 5
*1. Photo Black Ink (BK) is the black ink tank type mounted in the printer. Using the Printer in a
*2. Matte Black Ink (MBK) is the black ink tank type mounted in the printer. Network Environ-
ment
Note Chapter 6
z For more details about print quality, please refer to “Custom Print Quality” in “Customizing Print Quality”. (→ P.3-103) Troubleshooting
z For more details about color mode matching and color adjustments, please refer to “Fine Adjusting Color for Printing” in
“Adjusting Color” (→ P.3-107) see “Color Matching”. (→ P.3-113)
Chapter 7
Operation of the
Function Menus
Contents
3- 60 Index
TOP
トップ
To perform the settings for a print, first open the Main panel of the printer driver and then from Print Preferences select
the type of printing that you want to perform.
Chapter 1
Basic Procedures
Chapter 2
Using a Variety of
Media
Chapter 3
Chapter 4
Maintaining the
Printer
Chapter 5
Network Environ-
ment
Chapter 6
Troubleshooting
Note
z The Profiles function is also provided with OS 8/9 so you can register your own frequently used print settings. You can
use Add Profile and Edit Profile to further simply printer settings. Chapter 7
Operation of the
Function Menus
Contents
3- 61 Index
TOP
トップ
Printer Driver Settings at a Glance (Media Preview)
The preview illustrates the content of the current printer driver settings. If you change the page size and orientation, feed Chapter 1
method, etc., you can confirm their immediate effect easily by viewing the effect of the new settings in the Preview image. Basic Procedures
You can confirm the following items in the Preview.
When you select the Images tab, the contents of the media size and layout are displayed.
Chapter 2
Using a Variety of
Media
Chapter 3
A Printing Methods for
A Different Objectives
B B Chapter 4
Maintaining the
Printer
C C
Chapter 5
Network Environ-
ment
Chapter 6
Troubleshooting
Setting Preview Description
The following settings are shown in the Preview image.
(OS X) :Page Size, Orientation, Scaling, Page Layout, Color Mode, Borderless Printing Chapter 7
A Operation of the
(OS 8/9) :Page Size, Media Size, Orientation, Scaling, Page Layout, Poster Printing, Color Mode, Mirror,
Rotate 180 degrees, Borderless Printing Function Menus
This displays the sizes of the Page Size and Media Size settings. Also, when the Enlarged/Reduced Printing
B
and Borderless Printing items are selected, the mode and magnification are also displayed.
The following settings are shown in the Preview image. Contents
:Media Source, Automatic Cutting, Print Centered, Banner Printing, Media Source, Fit Roll Paper Width, No
C
Spaces at Top or Bottom, Rotate Paper 90 degrees, Orientation, Borderless Printing, Rotate 180 degrees,
Mirror.
3- 62 Index
TOP
トップ
When you select the Size tab, the details about the media size are displayed.
Chapter 1
Basic Procedures
Chapter 2
Using a Variety of
Media
Chapter 3
Chapter 4
Maintaining the
Printer
Chapter 5
Network Environ-
ment
Chapter 6
Troubleshooting
Chapter 7
Operation of the
Function Menus
Contents
3- 63 Index
TOP
トップ
Confirming the Print Image (Print Preview)
There is one more function that can be displayed for the print image of the document in the Preview. This other image is Chapter 1
called the Print Preview. Open the Preview before you print, so you can avoid failed print jobs beforehand. Basic Procedures
To display the Print Preview, click the Preview button in the printer driver.
Chapter 2
Using a Variety of
Media
Chapter 3
Chapter 4
Maintaining the
Printer
Chapter 5
Network Environ-
ment
Chapter 6
Troubleshooting
When the Viewer starts you can visually check the Preview display. Chapter 7
Once you have confirmed that the image layout on the media is correct, you can print from the Preview screen. Operation of the
Function Menus
Contents
3- 64 Index
TOP
トップ
Enlarging and Reducing the Original

Chapter 1
The original can be printed at a larger or smaller size. Basic Procedures
There are three methods for enlargement and reduction.
z Enlarging or Reducing Printing to Fit the Size of the Media. (→ P.3-65) Chapter 2
Using a Variety of
z Enlarging or reducing fit the roll paper width. (→ P.3-69) Media
z Setting the desired Scaling rate and printing. (→ P.3-73)

Chapter 3
Enlarging or Reducing Printing to Fit the Size of the Media Different Objectives
By setting the size of the media actually loaded for printing, you can automatically enlarge or reduce the print automati-
cally to match the size of the loaded media. Chapter 4
Maintaining the
Printer
Chapter 5
Network Environ-
ment
Chapter 6
Troubleshooting
1 In the software application select Page Setup from the File menu to open the Page Setup dialog Chapter 7
box. Operation of the
Function Menus
2 For Media Size (Page Size for OS 8/9), select the size of the media.
3 Click the OK button to close the Page Setup dialog box.

Contents
4 From the File menu of the software application select Print to display the Print dialog box.
3- 65 Index
TOP
トップ
5 Select the Finishing panel (Page Setup for OS 8/9).
Chapter 1
Basic Procedures
Chapter 2
Using a Variety of
Media
Chapter 3
Chapter 4
Maintaining the
Printer
Chapter 5
Network Environ-
ment
6 Confirm that the size of the original created in the software application is selected under Page Size. Chapter 6
Troubleshooting
Chapter 7
Operation of the
Function Menus
Contents
3- 66 Index
TOP
トップ
7 Select Enlarged/Reduced Printing.
Chapter 1
Basic Procedures
Chapter 2
Using a Variety of
Media
Chapter 3
Chapter 4
Maintaining the
Printer
Chapter 5
Network Environ-
ment
Chapter 6
Troubleshooting
Chapter 7
Operation of the
Function Menus
Contents
3- 67 Index
TOP
トップ
8 Confirm that Fit Media Size is selected under Enlarged/Reduced Printing.
Chapter 1
Basic Procedures
Chapter 2
Using a Variety of
Media
Chapter 3
Chapter 4
Maintaining the
Printer
Chapter 5
Network Environ-
ment
9 For Media Size select the size of the media that will be used for printing.
Chapter 6
Troubleshooting
Note
z Match Page Size is selected as the default. Chapter 7
Operation of the
Function Menus
Important
z If the landscape or portrait orientation of the original page size and the print media are different, part of the image may
not print on the media.
10 Confirm the content of the Preview, then click the Print button.
Contents
3- 68 Index
TOP
トップ
Enlarge/Reduce to Fit Roll Paper Width
You can enlarge or reduce the entire size of the original so it fits the width of the roll. Chapter 1
Basic Procedures
Chapter 2
Using a Variety of
Media
Chapter 3
Chapter 4
1 In the software application select Page Setup from the File menu to open the Page Setup dialog
Maintaining the
Printer
box.
2
Chapter 5
For Media Size (Page Size for OS 8/9), select the size of the media. Using the Printer in a
Network Environ-

ment
Chapter 6
Troubleshooting
Chapter 7
Operation of the
Function Menus
Contents
3- 69 Index
TOP
トップ
Chapter 1
Basic Procedures
Chapter 2
Using a Variety of
Media
Chapter 3
Chapter 4
Maintaining the
Printer
Chapter 5
Network Environ-
ment
Troubleshooting
Chapter 7
Operation of the
Function Menus
Contents
3- 70 Index
TOP
トップ
Chapter 1
Basic Procedures
Chapter 2
Using a Variety of
Media
Chapter 3
Chapter 4
Maintaining the
Printer
Chapter 5
Network Environ-
ment
8
Chapter 6
Under Enlarged/Reduced Printing select Fit Roll Paper Width (Fit Roll Width Size for OS 8/9). Troubleshooting
Important
z If Rotate Page 90 degrees (Conserve Paper) is selected on the Finishing panel, this function cannot be used. Chapter 7
Operation of the
Function Menus
Contents
3- 71 Index
TOP
トップ
Note Chapter 1
z Under Enlarged/Reduced Printing select Fit Roll Paper Width (Fit Roll Width Size for OS 8/9) to change the width Basic Procedures
setting for Media Size. Check the value displayed for Roll Paper Width.
Chapter 2
Using a Variety of
Media
Chapter 3
Chapter 4
Maintaining the
Printer
Chapter 5
Network Environ-
ment
Chapter 6
Troubleshooting
9 Confirm the content of the Preview, then click the Print button. Chapter 7
Operation of the
The print job starts. Function Menus
Contents
3- 72 Index
TOP
トップ
Selecting the Magnification Rate for Printing
You can enter the rate of magnification directly if you need to scale the enlargement or reduction for a desired effect. Chapter 1
Basic Procedures
Chapter 2
Using a Variety of
Media
Chapter 3
1
In the software application select Page Setup from the File menu to open the Page Setup dialog Different Objectives
box.
2
Chapter 4
For Media Size (Page Size for OS 8/9), select the size of the media. Maintaining the
Printer

Chapter 5
Network Environ-
ment
Chapter 6
Troubleshooting
Chapter 7
Operation of the
Function Menus
Contents
3- 73 Index
TOP
トップ
Chapter 1
Basic Procedures
Chapter 2
Using a Variety of
Media
Chapter 3
Chapter 4
Maintaining the
Printer
Chapter 5
Network Environ-
ment
Troubleshooting
Chapter 7
Operation of the
Function Menus
Contents
3- 74 Index
TOP
トップ
Chapter 1
Basic Procedures
Chapter 2
Using a Variety of
Media
Chapter 3
Chapter 4
Maintaining the
Printer
Chapter 5
Network Environ-
ment
Chapter 6
Troubleshooting
Chapter 7
Operation of the
Function Menus
Contents
3- 75 Index
TOP
トップ
8 Under Enlarged/Reduced Printing select Scaling then specify the desired setting.
Chapter 1
Basic Procedures
Chapter 2
Using a Variety of
Media
Chapter 3
Chapter 4
Maintaining the
Printer
Chapter 5
Network Environ-
ment
Chapter 6
Important Troubleshooting
z This function cannot be used when Borderless Printing is selected.
z You can enter a setting for the rate of magnification manually from the keyboard or use the arrow button on the right to
scroll the number settings up or down. The rate can be changed in increments of 1%. The size can be scaled in the Chapter 7
range limited by the size of the scaling entry column displayed on the right. Operation of the
z You can perform a setting that is larger than the size of the media loaded in the printer, but some portions will be cut off Function Menus
and not printed.
z To center an image in the upper left for printing, on the Finishing panel select Print Centered.
9 Check the value displayed for Media Size. Contents

10 Confirm the content of the preview, then click the Print button.
3- 76 Index
TOP
When you perform borderless printing, be sure to select
Printing Photos and Illustrations without Enlarged/Reduced Printing on the Finishing panel
Chapter 1
Borders (Borderless Printing) (Page Setup for OS 8/9). This allows Borderless Print-
Basic Procedures
ing to be performed.
Normally a printed document has white space around its
edges (margins), but a borderless print for a photograph or Important
created image has no white space at its borders; its entire Chapter 2
z Borderless Printing cannot be performed under the Using a Variety of
surface is covered by printing. following conditions. Media
Settings Required for Borderless Printing
When Cut Sheet is selected under Media Source on Chapter 3
Before performing the print job, make sure that a media the Finishing panel. Printing Methods for
that can be used for borderless printing is loaded. Only Different Objectives
media fed from the roll can be used for borderless print- When Roll Paper (Banner Printing) is selected
ing on this printer. under Media Source on the Finishing panel. Chapter 4
Here is a list of the types of roll media and their widths Maintaining the
that can be used for borderless printing. When Scaling is selected for Enlarged/Reduced Printer
Printing.
Paper Type Corresponding Roll Width
When Rotate Page 90 degrees (Conserve Paper) is Chapter 5
Heavyweight Coated Paper, 10-in. Roll (254.0mm) Using the Printer in a
Premium Matte Paper, Extra selected on the Finishing panel.
Network Environ-
Heavyweight Coated Paper, 14-in. Roll (355.6mm) ment
When several pages are selected for Pages per
Glossy Photo Paper, SemiGlos
16-in Roll (355.6 mm) Sheet (Page Layout for OS 8/9) on the Layout Chapter 6
Photo Paper, Heavyweight
panel (Page Setup for OS 8/9). Troubleshooting
Glossy Photo Paper,
24-in. Roll (609.6mm)
Heavyweight SemiGlos Photo, When Print Centered is selected on the Finishing
Flame Resistant-Cloth, Fine Art JIS B2/B3 Roll (515.0 mm) panel
Photo, Fine Art Heavyweight Chapter 7
Photo, Fine Art Textured, ISO A1/A2 Roll (594.0 mm) When the setting selected for Roll Paper Width does Operation of the
Canvas SemiGlos, Special 1-5 not support borderless printing Function Menus
Important
z Paper of types and roll widths other than those listed
above cannot be used for borderless printing. Contents
z The following types of media cannot be cut and are
printed left to right during borderless printing.
Fine Art Photo, Fine Art Heavyweight Photo, Fine Art
Textured, Canvas Matte
3- 77 Index
TOP
トップ
Borderless Printing
This section describes the borderless printing procedure. Chapter 1
<To perform borderless printing on media the same size as the original> Basic Procedures
1 Create the original in the software application so it matches the size of the media used for printing.
Chapter 2
Using a Variety of
Important Media
z The following page size settings can be used for borderless printing. Refer to the table below when you create the
original image and set the page for a size that can be used for borderless printing. Chapter 3
z If the media size was pre-selected in the software application, the selected size must support Borderless Printing. Printing Methods for
Borderless printing on media the
ISO A1, ISO A2, JIS B2, JIS B3, ANSI Legal, ARCH D, ARCH C, 20”x24”,
same size as the original Chapter 4
14”x17”, 10”x12”, 10”x15”, 8”x10”, US Photo (16”x20”) Maintaining the
document
Printer
Borderless printing with
All page sizes
enlargement and reduction Chapter 5
Network Environ-
ment
Note
Chapter 6
z Make sure the image created for borderless printing covers the entire original page. Troubleshooting
Chapter 7
Operation of the
Function Menus
Contents
3- 78 Index
TOP
トップ
3 Open the Main panel and perform the settings for borderless printing.
Chapter 1
Basic Procedures
Chapter 2
Using a Variety of
Media
Select the media Chapter 3

compatible with Printing Methods for
borderless printing.
Chapter 4
Maintaining the
Printer
Chapter 5
Network Environ-
ment
4
Chapter 6
Open the Finishing panel (Page Setup for OS 8/9) and then select Enlarged/Reduced Printing Troubleshooting
and Borderless Printing.
Chapter 7
Operation of the
Function Menus
Contents
3- 79 Index
TOP
トップ
Note Chapter 1
z When Borderless Printing is selected under the Media Size in the software application, Step 4 to Step 6 are not Basic Procedures
required.
z If you select Enlarged/Reduced Printing with Borderless Printing, Fit Roll Paper Width is selected for Enlarged/
Reduced Printing. Chapter 2
Using a Variety of
Media
Chapter 3
Chapter 4
Maintaining the
Printer
Chapter 5
Network Environ-
ment
Chapter 6
Troubleshooting
Chapter 7
Operation of the
Function Menus
Contents
3- 80 Index
TOP
トップ
5 Confirm that Fit Media Size is selected under Enlarged/Reduced Printing.
Chapter 1
Basic Procedures
Chapter 2
Using a Variety of
Media
Chapter 3
Chapter 4
Maintaining the
Printer
Chapter 5
Network Environ-
ment
6 Select the Media Size setting that you want.

Chapter 6
Troubleshooting
Chapter 7
The print job starts. Operation of the
Function Menus
Contents
3- 81 Index
TOP
Note
z For more about how to enlarge or reduce while Chapter 1
performing borderless printing, please refer to Basic Procedures
“Enlarge/Reduce to fit Roll Paper Width” under “<To
perform borderless document printing with a size not
allowed for borderless printing>”. (→ P.3-83). Chapter 2
z If Scale to fit the Page Size is selected for borderless Using a Variety of
printing, the printer driver automatically enlarges the Media
original by 3 mm at the top, bottom, left, and right margin.
The result is the printer fills the margins on the entire Chapter 3
page with borderless printing. Printing Methods for
The top, bottom, left and right margins of the original Different Objectives
are set to 3 mm so no part of the image will extend
beyond a margin. Chapter 4
z To perform a borderless print of an image with a top and bottom margin, on the Finishing panel you can select No Maintaining the
Spaces at Top or Bottom (this is an easy way to perform a borderless print by setting these margins to zero). For Printer
more details, please refer to “Printing without Top and Bottom Margins (Conserve Paper)”. (→ P.3-100)
Chapter 5
Network Environ-
ment
Chapter 6
Troubleshooting
Chapter 7
Operation of the
Function Menus
Contents
3- 82 Index
TOP
<To perform borderless document printing with a
size not allowed for borderless printing> Chapter 1
z Enlarge/Reduce to fit Roll Paper Width Basic Procedures
Enlarges or reduces the width of the original for print-
ing so it will fit the width of the roll. You can print a page
size not compatible with borderless printing (A4, A3, Chapter 2
Custom Size, etc.) on roll media of a width that is com- Using a Variety of
Media
patible with enlargement/reduction printing.
Chapter 3
1
Create the original in the software application so it matches the size of the media used for printing. Different Objectives
2 From the File menu of the software application select Print to display the Print dialog box. Chapter 4
3
Maintaining the
Open the Main panel and perform the settings for borderless printing. Printer
Chapter 5
Network Environ-
ment
Chapter 6
Troubleshooting
Select the media

compatible with Chapter 7
Operation of the
borderless printing.
Function Menus
Contents
3- 83 Index
TOP
トップ
4 Open the Finishing (Page Setup for OS 8/9) and then select Enlarged/Reduced Printing and
Borderless Printing. Chapter 1
Basic Procedures
Chapter 2
Using a Variety of
Media
Chapter 3
Chapter 4
Maintaining the
Printer
Chapter 5
Network Environ-
ment
Chapter 6
Troubleshooting
Note
z If you select Enlarged/Reduced Printing with Borderless Printing, Fit Roll Paper Width is selected for Enlarged/
Chapter 7
Reduced Printing. Operation of the
Function Menus
Contents
3- 84 Index
TOP
トップ
5 Under Enlarged/Reduced Printing select Fit Roll Paper Width (Fit Roll Width Size for OS 8/9).
Chapter 1
Basic Procedures
Chapter 2
Using a Variety of
Media
Chapter 3
Chapter 4
Maintaining the
Printer
Chapter 5
Network Environ-
ment
6
Chapter 6
Roll Width Size is displayed in Media Size, so check the value for Roll Paper Width. Troubleshooting
7 Confirm the content of the Preview, then click the Print button.
Chapter 7
The print job starts. Operation of the
Function Menus
Note
z After the Fit Roll Paper Width (Fit Roll Width Size for OS 8/9) feature automatically sizes to original to fit the width of
the roll, the printer driver automatically enlarges the image so that each margin, that is, the top, bottom, left, and right
margin, is 3 mm each. The result is the printer fills the entire page up to the edges with borderless printing. Portions of Contents
the image that protrude over the 3 mm top, bottom, right, and left margins of the original document cannot be printed.
3- 85 Index
TOP
トップ
Rotating the Page 90 Degrees for Printing (Conserve Paper)

Chapter 1
In cases where the length of the print job data is shorter than the width of the media, the printer driver will rotate the image Basic Procedures
90 degrees and the length of the image across the width of the media. By rotating the image you can maximize the use of
the media and reduce waste.
If you do this setting in the printer to rotate the page image, then the page is rotated automatically for the print job. The Chapter 2
image will not be rotated if it would not fit after rotation. Using a Variety of
Media
Chapter 3
Chapter 4
Maintaining the
Printer
Important
z Confirm that the Roll Paper Width setting is correct for the media loaded in the printer.
Chapter 5
z If the selection for the media source is not Roll Paper, or if borderless printing is selected, this function cannot be used. Using the Printer in a
Network Environ-
ment
Chapter 6
Troubleshooting
Chapter 7
Operation of the
Function Menus
Contents
3- 86 Index
TOP
トップ
2 Select the Finishing panel.

Chapter 1
Basic Procedures
Chapter 2
Using a Variety of
Media
Chapter 3
Chapter 4
Maintaining the
Printer
Chapter 5
Network Environ-
ment
Chapter 6
Troubleshooting
Chapter 7
Operation of the
Function Menus
Contents
3- 87 Index
TOP
トップ
3 Select Rotate Page 90 degrees.
Chapter 1
Basic Procedures
Chapter 2
Using a Variety of
Media
Chapter 3
Chapter 4
Maintaining the
Printer
Chapter 5
Network Environ-
ment
4
Chapter 6
Confirm the content of the preview, then click the Print button. Troubleshooting

Chapter 7
z To achieve the best print results, you should confirm the appearance of the original in the Print Preview before printing. Function Menus
For more details about how to display the Preview, please refer to “Confirming the Print Image (Print Preview)” in
“Before You Begin”. (→ P.3-64)
Contents
3- 88 Index
TOP
Printing Several Pages on One Sheet

Chapter 1
(Page Layout) Basic Procedures
You can print from 2 to 16 pages with reduced sizes on one
sheet. For example, if you have a document with a large
number of pages you can print two pages per sheet and the Chapter 2
Using a Variety of
number of pages will be one-half. Also, you can perform Media
more detailed settings, such as selecting the arrangement
of the pages on the sheet and specifying whether to print
Chapter 3
each page with a border line. Printing Methods for
1
From the File menu of the software application select Print to display the Print dialog box.
2
Chapter 4
Select the Layout panel (Page Setup for OS 8/9). Maintaining the
Printer
Chapter 5
Network Environ-
ment
Chapter 6
Troubleshooting
Chapter 7
Operation of the
Function Menus
Contents
3- 89 Index
TOP
3 From the Pages per Sheet (Page Layout 4 Set the Layout Direction to arrange the
for OS 8/9) list, select the Page Layout that pages on the media. Chapter 1
you want to use for printing. Basic Procedures
Chapter 2
Using a Variety of
Media
Chapter 3
Chapter 4
Maintaining the
Printer
Chapter 5
Network Environ-
ment
Chapter 6
Troubleshooting
Chapter 7
Operation of the
Function Menus
Contents
3- 90 Index
TOP
5 Select a borderline from the Page Border 6 Confirm the content of the preview, then click
list. the Print button. Chapter 1
The print job starts. Basic Procedures
Note
Chapter 2
z To achieve the best print results, you should confirm Using a Variety of
the appearance of the original in the Print Preview Media
the Preview, please refer to “Confirming the Print
Chapter 3
Image (Print Preview)” in “Before You Begin”. Printing Methods for
(→ P.3-64) Different Objectives
Chapter 4
Maintaining the
Printer
Chapter 5
Network Environ-
ment
Chapter 6
Troubleshooting
Chapter 7
Operation of the
Function Menus
Contents
3- 91 Index
TOP
Printing Posters (Page Layout) 1 From the File menu of the software
application select Print to display the Print Chapter 1
After the image is enlarged and divided into several dialog box. Basic Procedures
sections, you can print the print the sections and paste
them together to assemble one large poster. 2 Select the Page Setup panel.
Chapter 2
Note Using a Variety of
Media
z This function is not provided for OS X.
Chapter 3
Chapter 4
Maintaining the
Printer
Chapter 5
Network Environ-
ment
Chapter 6
Troubleshooting
Chapter 7
Operation of the
Function Menus
Contents
3- 92 Index
TOP
3 Click the Page Layout checkbox on and 4 If you do not need to print one of the panels
select Poster (2x2) from the list. of the divided image, click the Pages to Chapter 1
In the Preview confirm the appearance of the image Print checkbox to remove the checkmark for Basic Procedures
of the selected page layout. the panel that you do not want to print.
Chapter 2
Using a Variety of
Media
Chapter 3
Chapter 4
Maintaining the
Printer
Chapter 5
Network Environ-
ment
Chapter 6
Troubleshooting
Note Chapter 7
Operation of the
z The pages selected for printing are displayed in the Function Menus
print image Preview and the pages that have not
selected for printing are not displayed.
Contents
3- 93 Index
TOP
5 Confirm the content of the Preview, then
Vertical and Horizontal Banner Printing
click the Print button. Chapter 1
(Long Prints) Basic Procedures
Matching the Width of the Roll

Note
Once you become familiar with fitting images to the full Chapter 2
z To achieve the best print results, you should confirm Using a Variety of
width of the roll with your software application, it is very
the appearance of the original in the Print Preview Media
easy to print vertical and horizontal banners.
the Preview, please refer to “Confirming the Print Here we will describe as an example how to take a 250
mm x 600 mm original and enlarge to fit a 24” roll Chapter 3
Image (Print Preview)” in “Before You Begin”. (→ P.3- Printing Methods for
64) (approximately 610 mm wide), and then print it as a ban-
ner (600 mm x 1,440 mm). Different Objectives
Note Chapter 4
Maintaining the
z With this printer you can print a banner up to 18,000 Printer
mm maximum length (2,774 mm with OS 8/9).
Chapter 5
Network Environ-
ment
Chapter 6
Troubleshooting
Chapter 7
Operation of the
Function Menus
Contents
3- 94 Index
TOP
1 Start the software application. 3 Set the Format for (OS 8/9 does not have
this setting).
2 From the File menu select Page Setup to
Chapter 1
Basic Procedures
open the Page Setup dialog box.
Chapter 2
Using a Variety of
Media
Chapter 3
Chapter 4
Maintaining the
Printer
Chapter 5
Network Environ-
ment
Chapter 6
Troubleshooting
Chapter 7
Operation of the
Function Menus
Contents
3- 95 Index
TOP
4 Select Custom Paper Size (Media Design 5 Click the New button then define the media
for OS 8/9). name and size (for OS 8/9, define the media Chapter 1
name and size then click Add button). Basic Procedures
Note
z Enter Poster here for the name of the media. Chapter 2
Using a Variety of
Media
Chapter 3
Chapter 4
Maintaining the
Printer
Chapter 5
Network Environ-
ment
Chapter 6
Troubleshooting
Chapter 7
Operation of the
Function Menus
Contents
6 Click the Save button (this step is not
required with OS 8/9).
3- 96 Index
TOP
7 Select the Page Attribute panel. b For the banner select Orientation, select the
Landscape icon, click the OK button to close the
Chapter 1
Note Page Setup dialog box. Basic Procedures
z Once you have registered the size in the Custom
Paper Size panel (Media Design for OS 8/9), the size
settings are stored under the specified name and the Chapter 2
name is displayed in the list. For more details about Using a Variety of
the Custom Paper Size panel (Media Design panel Media
for OS 8/9), see “Custom Sizes (User Print Settings)”.
(→ P.3-121)
8
Chapter 3
Select the media defined with custom settings. Different Objectives
a For Page Size on the Custom Paper Size (Media
Design for OS 8/9) panel, select the name of the Chapter 4
user defined custom settings. Maintaining the
Printer
Chapter 5
Network Environ-
ment
Chapter 6
Troubleshooting
Chapter 7
Operation of the
Function Menus
Contents
3- 97 Index
TOP
トップ
9 Create the original in the software application.
Chapter 1
Basic Procedures
Chapter 2
Using a Variety of
Media
Chapter 3
10 After the original is created, from the File menu select Print to open the Print dialog box.
11 When the Main panel displays, select Long Format (Banner) for the Print Preferences for the long
Chapter 4
Maintaining the
print. Printer
Chapter 5
Network Environ-
ment
Chapter 6
Troubleshooting
Chapter 7
Operation of the
Function Menus
Contents
3- 98 Index
TOP
トップ
12 Display the Finishing (Page Setup for OS 8/9) panel and select Enlarged/Reduced Printing and
Fit Roll Paper Width (Fit Roll Width Size for OS 8/9) for the long print. Chapter 1
Basic Procedures
Chapter 2
Using a Variety of
Media
Chapter 3
Chapter 4
Maintaining the
Printer
Chapter 5
Network Environ-
ment
Chapter 6
Troubleshooting

Chapter 7
Function Menus
z To achieve the best print results, you should confirm the appearance of the original in the Print Preview before printing.
Contents
3- 99 Index
TOP
トップ
Printing without Top and Bottom Margins (Conserve Paper)

Chapter 1
The white space in the top and bottom margins can be eliminated for printing to save paper. The printer does not feed the Basic Procedures
white space in the margins to save paper. This function can be used only when Roll Paper is selected as the media source.
Chapter 2
Using a Variety of
Media
Chapter 3
Chapter 4
z You use this method during borderless printing as shown in the illustration below. Printer
Chapter 5
Network Environ-
ment
Chapter 6
Troubleshooting
Important Chapter 7
z This function cannot be used when Banner is selected as the media source. Operation of the
Function Menus
Contents
3- 100 Index
TOP
トップ
2 Select the Finishing panel.

Chapter 1
Basic Procedures
Chapter 2
Using a Variety of
Media
Chapter 3
Chapter 4
Maintaining the
Printer
Chapter 5
Network Environ-
ment
Chapter 6
Troubleshooting
Chapter 7
Operation of the
Function Menus
Contents
3- 101 Index
TOP
トップ
3 Select No Spaces at Top or Bottom.
Chapter 1
Basic Procedures
Chapter 2
Using a Variety of
Media
Chapter 3
Chapter 4
Maintaining the
Printer
Chapter 5
Network Environ-
ment
4
Chapter 6
Confirm the content of the preview, then click the Print button. Troubleshooting

Chapter 7
z To achieve the best print results, you should confirm the appearance of the original in the Print Preview before printing. Function Menus
Contents
3- 102 Index
TOP
トップ
Custom Print Quality

Chapter 1
Customizing Print Quality Basic Procedures
When you need to frequently perform combined settings for print quality and print speed, you can select Custom Set-
tings under Print Quality and then perform the print quality and resolution settings in the Custom Settings dialog box
Chapter 2
according to the requirements of your requirements.
Using a Variety of
1
Media
From the File menu of the software application select Print to display the Print dialog box.
2
Chapter 3
Confirm that the Main panel is displayed. Printing Methods for
Chapter 4
Maintaining the
Printer
Chapter 5
Network Environ-
ment
Chapter 6
Troubleshooting
Chapter 7
Operation of the
Function Menus
Contents
3- 103 Index
TOP
トップ
3 From the Print Quality list, select Custom Settings.
A Set button appears in the lower right corner of the Print Quality group. Chapter 1
Basic Procedures
Chapter 2
Using a Variety of
Media
Chapter 3
Chapter 4
Maintaining the
Printer
Chapter 5
Network Environ-
ment
Chapter 6
Troubleshooting
4 Click the Set button in the Print Quality group to open the Custom Settings dialog box.
Chapter 7
Operation of the
Function Menus
Contents
3- 104 Index
TOP
トップ
5 From the Print Quality list, select the quality settings.
Chapter 1
Basic Procedures
Chapter 2
Using a Variety of
Media
Chapter 3
z The print quality settings that you can select for the custom settings are described below.
Print Quality Content Chapter 4

Maintaining the
Highest Prioritizes attaining the highest image quality for printing. Printer
High Prioritizes attaining high image quality for printing. Chapter 5

Standard Attains a stable image at an average printing speed. Using the Printer in a
Network Environ-
Prioritizes high printing speed but you should check layout and other aspects of the ment
Draft
image after printing.
Chapter 6
Troubleshooting
Important
z The items of that are available for selection the print Quality may differ depending on which print media are used. Here
is a list of the media where Highest under Print Quality is available. Chapter 7
Heavyweight Glossy Photo Paper, Heavyweight SemiGlos Photo, SemiGlos Photo Paper, Glossy Photo Paper Operation of the
Function Menus
z If one of the types of media below is selected, Draft cannot be selected under Print Quality.
Premium Matte Paper, Glossy Photo Paper, SemiGlos Photo, Heavyweight Glossy Photo Paper, Heavyweight SemiG-
los Photo, Synthetic Paper, Adhesive Synthetic Paper, Backlit Film, Flame-Resistant Cloth, Japanese Paper Washi,
CAD Translucent Matte Film
Contents
3- 105 Index
TOP
トップ
6 Confirm the resolution.
Chapter 1
Basic Procedures
Chapter 2
Using a Variety of
Media
Chapter 3
z The resolution is set automatically depending on which print quality item is selected as shown below. If you need to
change the resolution you can perform so with the setting under Print Quality.
Chapter 4
Maintaining the
Print Quality Resolution Content Printer
Print speed is slower due to the higher resolution setting. Achieves the best printing
Fine
Highest, High results, but printing time is longer and a large amount of computer memory is Chapter 5
(600 dpi)
required. Using the Printer in a
Quick Print speed is faster due to the lower resolution setting. Printing time is shorter and Network Environ-
Standard, Draft ment
(300 dpi) not as much computer memory is required.
Chapter 6
7 Click the OK button to close the Custom Settings dialog box.
Troubleshooting
Note Chapter 7
z In OS 8/9 if you select Enhance Text With Photos in the Custom Settings dialog box then when you have text mixed Operation of the
with photos or graphic data, the resolution of the text will be raised (this function is not available for OS X). Function Menus
z Only the Halftones and Error Diffusion custom settings can be set. Error diffusion arranges non-standard pixels and
displays them as gradations (halftones). This setting is ideal for photographs or graphic images that require printing
with fine gradations.
Contents
3- 106 Index
TOP
トップ
Fine Adjusting Color for Printing

Chapter 1
Adjusting Color Basic Procedures
Basically the color settings of the software application have priority, but if the results of a print job are not what you want
you can also adjust color in the printer driver.
Chapter 2
You can also take color photos captured with a scanner or a digital camera, or any other color image, and print them in Using a Variety of
monochrome. Media
Now we will describe the color adjustments.
1
Chapter 3
From the File menu of the software application select Print to display the Print dialog box. Printing Methods for
2 Confirm that the Main panel is displayed.
Chapter 4
Maintaining the
Printer
Chapter 5
Network Environ-
ment
Chapter 6
Troubleshooting
Chapter 7
Operation of the
Function Menus
Contents
3- 107 Index
TOP
トップ
3 On the Main panel select Color Mode then Color.
Chapter 1
Basic Procedures
Chapter 2
Using a Variety of
Media
Chapter 3
Chapter 4
Maintaining the
Printer
Chapter 5
Network Environ-
ment
Chapter 6
z Color Mode presents these following items for selection.
Color Mode Content Chapter 7

Operation of the
Color Prints in color. Function Menus
Monochrome Provides stable monochrome photo printing with minimal tone change and enables detailed
(Photo): adjustment of gray scale gradations and color tones.
Prints with only a limited number of colors. Use this setting when you need fine lines with light
Contents
Solid Color
colors in a sharp image.
Black Only All colors other than white are printed black.
3- 108 Index
TOP
トップ
Important Chapter 1
z Monochrome (Photo) can be selected for Color Mode only if one of the following types of paper is selected: Basic Procedures
Glossy Photo Paper/Semi-Glossy Photo Paper/Heavyweight Glossy Photo Paper/Heavyweight SemiGlos Photo
Paper/Fine Art Photo/Fine Art Heavyweight Photo/Fine Art Textured/Japanese Paper Washi
4 Press the Set button.

Chapter 2
Using a Variety of
Media
Chapter 3
Chapter 4
Maintaining the
Printer
Chapter 5
Network Environ-
ment
Chapter 6
Troubleshooting
Chapter 7
Operation of the
Function Menus
Note
z Manual Color Settings are enabled when Color, Monochrome (Photo), or Monochrome is selected for Color
Mode.
Contents
3- 109 Index
TOP
トップ
5 The Color Settings dialog box opens.
Chapter 1
Basic Procedures
Chapter 2
Using a Variety of
Media
Chapter 3
Chapter 4
Maintaining the
Printer
Chapter 5
6
Confirm that the Color Adjustment panel is displayed, then click the Object Adjustment button. Network Environ-
ment
Chapter 6
Troubleshooting
Chapter 7
Operation of the
Function Menus
The Object Adjustment dialog box opens.

Contents
Note
z This function is not provided for OS X, Step 6 to Step 8 are not required.
3- 110 Index
TOP
トップ
7 Select the item that you want to adjust: Images, Graphics, or Text.
Chapter 1
Basic Procedures
Chapter 2
Using a Variety of
Media
Chapter 3
z Note that for this printer driver all the items (Images, Graphics, Text) are selected as the default settings.
8 Click the OK button to close the Object Adjustment dialog box. Chapter 4
Maintaining the
9 Drag the slide bar to the left or right for the item that you want to adjust. You can also enter the value Printer
directly or use the arrows of the spinbox to raise or lower the value.
Chapter 5
Network Environ-
ment
Chapter 6
Troubleshooting
Chapter 7
Operation of the
Function Menus
Contents
3- 111 Index
TOP
トップ
Note Chapter 1
z The Color Adjustment panel presents the following items for selection. Basic Procedures
Color Adjustment Content

Cyan Chapter 2
Using a Variety of
Magenta You can calibrate the hues for Cyan, Magenta, Yellow. Media
Yellow Chapter 3
Adjusts brightness from the darkest to brightest colors so none are lost in the brightness of the Printing Methods for
Brightness Different Objectives
printed image.
Contrast Adjusts the relative contrast from brightest to darkest colors.
Chapter 4
Saturation Adjusts the vividness of colors from dull to extremely vivid. Maintaining the
Printer
Gray Tone
Adjusts grayscale from cool colors (blue tones) to warm colors (red tones).
Adjustment
Chapter 5
Important Network Environ-
z As you change each item on the panel, the image of the Preview on the left changes to reflect the adjustment. The ment
Original shows the appearance of the initial settings, and the Preview reflects the current settings. Chapter 6
10
Troubleshooting
Click the OK button to close the Color Settings dialog box.
Chapter 7
Operation of the
Function Menus
Contents
3- 112 Index
TOP
トップ
Color Matching
When you print an image captured with a scanner or a digital camera, sometimes the appearance of the printout does not Chapter 1
match what you see on the screen. Basic Procedures
This is caused by differences between the display color and the printed color. In the Color Settings dialog box you can
use the items on the Matching panel, that is, select an ICC (International Color Consortium) color profile, or select a
matching mode or input profile, or printer profile settings, to have the hues of the colors on the screen more closely Chapter 2
resemble the colors in the printout. Using a Variety of
Media
Chapter 3
2 Confirm that the Main panel is displayed.
Chapter 4
Maintaining the
Printer
Chapter 5
Network Environ-
ment
Chapter 6
Troubleshooting
Chapter 7
Operation of the
Function Menus
Contents
3- 113 Index
TOP
トップ
3 On the Main panel select Color Mode then Color.
Chapter 1
Basic Procedures
Chapter 2
Using a Variety of
Media
Chapter 3
Chapter 4
Maintaining the
Printer
Chapter 5
Network Environ-
ment
Chapter 6
z Color Mode presents these following items for selection.
Color Mode Content Chapter 7

Operation of the
Color Prints in color. Function Menus
Monochrome Provides stable monochrome photo printing with minimal tone change and enables detailed
(Photo): adjustment of gray scale gradations and color tones.
Prints with only a limited number of colors. Use this setting when you need fine lines with light
Contents
Solid Color
colors in a sharp image.
Black Only All colors other than white are printed black.
3- 114 Index
TOP
トップ
Important Chapter 1
z Monochrome (Photo) can be selected for Color Mode only if one of the following types of paper is selected: Basic Procedures
Glossy Photo Paper/Semi-Glossy Photo Paper/Heavyweight Glossy Photo Paper/Heavyweight SemiGlos Photo
Paper/Fine Art Photo/Fine Art Heavyweight Photo/Fine Art Textured/Japanese Paper Washi
4 Press the Set button.

Chapter 2
Using a Variety of
Media
Chapter 3
Chapter 4
Maintaining the
Printer
Chapter 5
Network Environ-
ment
Chapter 6
Troubleshooting
Chapter 7
Operation of the
Function Menus
Note
z Manual Color Settings are enabled when Color, Monochrome (Photo), or Monochrome is selected for Color
Mode.
Contents
3- 115 Index
TOP
トップ
5 The Color Settings dialog box opens.
Chapter 1
Basic Procedures
Chapter 2
Using a Variety of
Media
Chapter 3
Chapter 4
Maintaining the
Printer
6
Chapter 5
Select the Matching panel. Network Environ-
ment
Chapter 6
Troubleshooting
Chapter 7
Operation of the
Function Menus
Contents
3- 116 Index
TOP
トップ
7 From the Mode list, select the matching mode.
Chapter 1
Basic Procedures
Chapter 2
Using a Variety of
Media
Chapter 3
Chapter 4
Maintaining the
Printer
Chapter 5
Network Environ-
Note
ment
z Here is a list of the available matching modes.
Chapter 6
Troubleshooting
Matching Mode Content
Driver Correction Calibrates color using the original color profile of the printer driver.
Chapter 7
Calibrates the color in the printer driver using the standards of ICC color profiles. When this Operation of the
ICC Correction
mode is selected, this specifies the entry profile and printer profile. Function Menus
Select for correction the color management system provided with the Mac OS. When this
ColorSync
mode is selected, this specifies the printer profile.
Does not execute color matching. The color matching is performed in the software application Contents
No Correction or performed by an independent color profile; select when you want the color matching of the
printer driver to be ignored.
3- 117 Index
TOP
トップ
Important Chapter 1
z The mode you select for the Mode affects what items are available for selection. Basic Procedures
z If you select the Driver Correction, only the Matching Method is available for selection.
z For OS 8/9, If you select ICC Correction you can adjust Images, Graphics and Text for the Matching Method. Also,
if you select Use Common Input Profile for All Objects, then the Images, Graphics, and Text all apply to one profile Chapter 2
(this function is not available for OS X). Using a Variety of
8
Media
When ICC Correction is selected for the Mode, at Images under Input Profile Settings select a
profile from the Input Profile list. Chapter 3
Note
z When Use Common Input Profile for All Objects is selected, the same input profile is selected automatically for both
Graphics and Text. Chapter 4
Maintaining the
z If you want to perform different settings for Graphics and Text, then you must cancel the selection of Use Common Printer
Input Profile for All Objects.
Chapter 5
Network Environ-
ment
Chapter 6
Troubleshooting
Chapter 7
Operation of the
Function Menus
Contents
3- 118 Index
TOP
トップ
9 Click the input profile Matching Method list and select a matching method.
Chapter 1
Basic Procedures
Chapter 2
Using a Variety of
Media
Chapter 3
Chapter 4
Maintaining the
Printer
Chapter 5
ment
z Matching Method presents the following items for selection.
Chapter 6
Matching Method Content Troubleshooting
Makes the best matching selections for the Image, Graphics, and
Text items.
Auto *Not provided for OS X. Chapter 7
*This item can selected only when Driver Correction or ColorSync Operation of the
is selected. Function Menus
Perceptual Achieves the best results with priority on color perceptual.

Saturation Achieves the best results with priority on color saturation.
Faithfully reproduces the input data. Performs white color Contents
Colorimetric
calibration, so there is no color when white data is output.
Faithfully reproduces the input data. No white point correction is
Absolute Colorimetric
done.
3- 119 Index
TOP
トップ
10 From the Printer Profile Settings list, select a printer profile.
Chapter 1
Important Basic Procedures
z A print profile can be selected only when ICC Correction or ColorSync is selected under the Mode.
Chapter 2
Using a Variety of
Media
Chapter 3
Chapter 4
Maintaining the
Printer
Chapter 5
Network Environ-
ment
Chapter 6
11
Troubleshooting
Click the OK button to close the Color Settings dialog box.
Chapter 7
Operation of the
Function Menus
Contents
3- 120 Index
TOP
Custom Sizes (User Print Settings) 2 The Page Setup dialog box opens.
Chapter 1
Creating Custom Sizes Basic Procedures
In the software application you can define original media

sizes and save them. Once a custom size has been
Chapter 2
defined, it will be listed along with the standard sizes and
Using a Variety of
be available for selection. Media
1 Select Page Setup from the File menu. Chapter 3

z The setup method is different for some software
applications. Chapter 4
Maintaining the
Printer
Chapter 5
Network Environ-
ment
Chapter 6
Troubleshooting
Chapter 7
Operation of the
Function Menus
Contents
3- 121 Index
TOP
3 Set the Format for (OS 8/9 does not have 4 Select Custom Paper Size (Media Design
this setting). for OS 8/9). Chapter 1
Basic Procedures
Chapter 2
Using a Variety of
Media
Chapter 3
Chapter 4
Maintaining the
Printer
Chapter 5
Network Environ-
ment
Chapter 6
Troubleshooting
Chapter 7
Operation of the
Function Menus
Contents
3- 122 Index
TOP
5 Click the New button to define the user
defined name, the media size and margins Chapter 1
(for OS 8/9 click, define the user defined Basic Procedures
name, media size and other settings, then
click the Add button).
Chapter 2
Using a Variety of
Note Media
z When you select the desired size and name from the
Media Size list on the left, the Width (Wid. for OS 8/9)
Chapter 3
and Length (Hght for OS 8/9) are entered Printing Methods for
automatically. Different Objectives
z For OS 8/9, If Borderless Printing is selected, the
selection for Wid. changes automatically to a roll width
Chapter 4
list that supports borderless printing. Select a Wid.
setting for the width of the desired roll, then enter a
number for the Hght that you want. (This function is
6 Click the Save button. (Not required for OS
Maintaining the
Printer
8/9)
not provided for OS X.)
7
Chapter 5
Click the OK button to close the dialog box. Using the Printer in a
Network Environ-
ment
Note
Chapter 6
z If you are using OS 8/9 you are allowed to store up to a Troubleshooting
maximum of 5 custom settings.
z The settings in the Custom Paper Size panel (Media
Design for OS 8/9) box remain in effect even after the
Chapter 7
software application is closed.
Operation of the
z To delete a registered custom size, select the name of Function Menus
the custom size to delete, then click the Delete button.
z To edit a registered custom size, select the name of
the custom size, then input the Width and Height
settings again. (this editing and correction cannot be
performed for OS 8/9) Contents
3- 123 Index
TOP
Selecting a Media Display Series
In Display Series on the Media Design panel, you can Chapter 1
select a display series that will display for the Page Size Basic Procedures
on the Page Attribute panel and for Media Size in the
Print dialog box.
Chapter 2
Note Using a Variety of
Media
z This function is not provided for OS X.
To display a paper size series for selection for Media
Size in the Print dialog box, or for Page Size on the Chapter 3
Page Attribute panel, you must select Display Series Different Objectives
with a check mark on the Media Design panel. Also, if
you want to cancel a size series selected for display, just
click check box to remove the check mark for the Dis- Chapter 4
Maintaining the
play Series selection. Printer
Chapter 5
Network Environ-
ment
Chapter 6
Troubleshooting
Chapter 7
Operation of the
Function Menus
Contents
3- 124 Index
TOP
トップ
When the Printout Quality Is Not Clean

Chapter 1
How to Set the Media Type Basic Procedures
You can use the printer operation panel to perform suitable settings for the ink drying time of each media and other fea-
tures. These settings can also adjusted with the items in the Media Detailed Settings dialog box in the printer driver. If
Chapter 2
the printouts are not clear, you may be able to correct the problem by adjusting the settings in this dialog box.
Using a Variety of
For more details about the Media Detailed Settings dialog box, please refer to the online Help. Media
Chapter 3
Chapter 4
Maintaining the
Printer
Chapter 5
Network Environ-
ment
Chapter 6
Troubleshooting
Chapter 7
Operation of the
Function Menus
Contents
3- 125 Index
TOP
Software Provided for Macintosh Using the Printer on a Network

Remote UI Chapter 1
The following software applications are provided for use Basic Procedures
with Macintosh. This software is used to set up the network
information, display the status of the printer, delete
The function of each software application is described print jobs, and display the print job history. This
below. software is stored in the printer ROM, and settings are Chapter 2
Using a Variety of
performed from the computer with a Web browser
Basic Software for Printing over the network using a specified printer IP address.
Media
imagePROGRAF Printer Driver 2005 (→ Chapter 5 “Using the Printer in a Network

Environment”) Chapter 3
This is a software application that required for the Printing Methods for
printer to print. This must be installed on every If you use a Remote UI, you must set the IP address in Different Objectives
computer that will use the printer. The printer driver not the printer.
only allows the printer to print, the driver also provides
many other important functions such as enlargement/ Printing Beautiful Digital Camera Images Chapter 4
Maintaining the
reduction, borderless printing, color adjustment, (for the Professional) Printer
multiple copy printing, and others.
imagePROGRAF Print Plug-In for Photoshop
The printer driver is stored on the provided User Chapter 5
imagePROGRAF Print Plug-In for Photoshop
Software CD-ROM for Mac OS 8.6/9.x and Mac OS X. Using the Printer in a
(hereafter "Print Plug-In) makes it possible to Network Environ-
Displaying the Printer Status reproduce and print the vivid RGB color of Adobe ment
created in PhotoShop. This software is intended for
GARO Printmonitor professionals and high-end users who want to obtain Chapter 6
Troubleshooting
This is the utility software that displays details about the best finished color hues.
printer errors on the Macintosh. This utility is installed After installation of Print Plug-In, you can view a
together with the printer driver. Preview within PhotoShop that allows you to confirm
Chapter 7
how faithful the colors are reproduced and then adjust Operation of the
them. Because you can process RGB 16-bit data just Function Menus
as it is with PhotoShop, you can print without losing
the high color gradations of the originals. Also, you
can save the used settings so when you want to print
with the same settings you only have to open and read
that information to print again. Contents
(→ Print Plug-In for Photoshop Guide)
3- 126 Index
TOP
Select the Media Type
Media Configuration Tool Chapter 1
Basic Procedures
Media Configuration Tool is the software used to
register information about print media (paper, film,
etc.) that can be used with the printer as it becomes
available. The functions of this software are provided Chapter 2
Using a Variety of
for users who have an in-depth knowledge of printers Media
and print media.
You an use this software to upload and download
Chapter 3
media information to and from the printer about media Printing Methods for
names, thickness, printhead height, suction fan Different Objectives
strength, default margins, and other information. A
function is also provided that allows the user to
Chapter 4
acquire the most recent information about media for Maintaining the
printing when using the printer connected to a Printer
network.
This is installed together with the printer driver. Chapter 5
(→ Media Configuration Tool Guide) Using the Printer in a
Network Environ-
ment
Important
z If you are using the Remote UI with Mac OS 8.6/9.x, Chapter 6
Troubleshooting
open TCP/IP on the Control Panel and make sure
that Built-in Ethernet is selected for the Connect via.
Chapter 7
Operation of the
Function Menus
Contents
3- 127 Index
TOP
Chapter 4 Maintaining the Printer

Chapter 1
Basic Procedures
Replacing Ink Tanks ...................................................................................4-2
How to Confirm Ink Levels ..................................................................................... 4-2 Chapter 2
When to Replace an Ink Tank ............................................................................... 4-3 Using a Variety of
Ink Tank Handling Precautions .............................................................................. 4-4 Media
Replacing an Ink Tank ........................................................................................... 4-5
Cautions About Using Refilled Ink Tanks for This Printer ..........................4-8
Switching the Ink Level Detection Function Off ..................................................... 4-8 Chapter 3
Executing a Print Job ............................................................................................. 4-9 Printing Methods for
Cleaning the Printer ..................................................................................4-10
Cleaning the Exterior Covers ............................................................................... 4-10
Cleaning Inside the Upper Cover ........................................................................ 4-11 Chapter 4
Cleaning the Paper Restraint ...................................................................4-14 Maintaining the
Replacing the Maintenance Cartridge ......................................................4-16 Printer
Checking Spacing Remaining in the Maintenance Cartridge .............................. 4-16
When to Replace the Maintenance Cartridge ...................................................... 4-17
Maintenance Cartridge Handling Precautions ..................................................... 4-18 Chapter 5
Maintenance Cartridge Replacement Procedure ................................................ 4-18 Using the Printer in a
Network Environ-
Replacing the Printhead ...........................................................................4-23 ment
Printhead Handling Precautions .......................................................................... 4-23
How to Replace the Printhead ............................................................................. 4-24 Chapter 6
Replacing the Cutter Blade ......................................................................4-29 Troubleshooting
Transporting the Printer ............................................................................4-32
Checking the Condition of the Printer .......................................................4-36
Cleaning the Printhead .............................................................................4-38 Chapter 7
Types of Printhead Cleaning ............................................................................... 4-38 Operation of the
Printhead Cleaning Procedures ........................................................................... 4-38 Function Menus
Aligning the Printhead ..............................................................................4-40
Adjusting Amount of Media Feed .............................................................4-42
Media Feed Adjustment Procedure ..................................................................... 4-42
Adjusting Line Feed Manually ............................................................................. 4-43
Reducing the Amount of Cutting Dust ......................................................4-45 Contents
Changing the Black Ink Type ...................................................................4-47
Black Ink Tank Exchange Procedure .................................................................. 4-48
Replacing Ink Tanks
TOP
Replacing Ink Tanks Chapter 1

Basic Procedures
When the supply of ink in an ink tank runs low, a message
appears on the operation panel display or on the printer How to Confirm Ink Levels
driver screen to tell you that it is time to replace the ink tank. You can confirm the ink level at any time by checking the Chapter 2
You can change any one of the ink tanks among the seven printer operation panel display. You should always check Using a Variety of
when it runs out of ink: Yellow (Y), Magenta (M), Photo the ink levels in the ink tanks and replace any ink tank that Media
Magenta (PM), Cyan (C), Photo Cyan (PC), Photo Black is low before starting a long print job or any other job that
(BK), and Matte Black (MBK). will consume a large amount of ink. Chapter 3
Online Status Display Different Objectives
Chapter 4
Maintaining the
Printer
z Yellow Ink BCI-1451Y Online
z Magenta Ink BCI-1431M Bk Chapter 5
z Photo Magenta Ink BCI-1431PM Using the Printer in a
Network Environ-
z Cyan Ink BCI-1431C ment
z Photo Cyan Ink BCI-1431PC
z Photo Black Ink BCI-1431BK The ink levels are displayed in the bottom line of the dis- Chapter 6
Troubleshooting
z Matte Black Ink BCI-1451MBK play from left to right in the following order: Black (K),
Photo Cyan (PC), Cyan (C), Photo Magenta (PM),
Magenta (M), Yellow (Y).
Chapter 7
Operation of the
Function Menus
Contents
4- 2 Index
Replacing Ink Tanks
TOP
Information Button Display When to Replace an Ink Tank
Chapter 1
You should have extra ink tanks on hand ready for Basic Procedures
Information Power
replacement when either of the conditions below occurs.
Ink
Cleaning Important Chapter 2
z An ink tank cannot be replaced during printing Using a Variety of
You can check the ink level at any time (during a print job Media
because the right cover is locked.
or while an error is displayed) by pressing the Informa- z The printed image may become uneven if the printer is
tion button. The ink levels are displayed from left to right stopped during a print job to replace an ink tank. Chapter 3
in the following order: Black (K), Photo Cyan (PC), Cyan z Never open the right cover or operate the release lever Different Objectives
(C), Photo Magenta (PM), Magenta (M), Yellow (Y). while the Initializing message is displayed. This could
damage the printer.
How to Read the Ink Level Display Chapter 4
Maintaining the
The height of a small graphic indicates the ink level in When the Check Ink Level Message is Printer
each tank. Displayed
The Check Ink Level message displays when the ink Chapter 5
level in a tank becomes low. Printing may continue. The Using the Printer in a
Network Environ-
100% 80% 60% 40% 20% 0% message display tells you that an ink tank is about to run
ment
(100~90%) (90~70%) (70~50%) (50~30%) (30~6.9%) (6.9~0%) out of ink. Check the amount of ink remaining in the
tanks in the Status Monitor (Windows), Printmonitor Chapter 6
Troubleshooting
(Macintosh) or on the printer operation panel, and make
sure that you have replacement ink tanks for the colors
that are running low.
Chapter 7
Operation of the
Note Function Menus
z When the level of ink in a tank runs low, the printer
may not have sufficient ink to complete Cleaning B or
another maintenance operation that consumes a large
amount of ink. In such a case, perform print head Contents
cleaning after replacing the ink tank.
4- 3 Index
Replacing Ink Tanks
TOP
When the Rep. Ink Tank (Replace Ink Ink Tank Handling Precautions
Tank) Message Is Displayed Chapter 1
Obey the following precautions when you handle ink tanks. Basic Procedures
When the ink in a tank runs out, the Rep. Ink Tank mes-
sage displays and the printer stops printing. Replace the
ink tank as soon as this message appears. When you Caution
z Always store ink tanks in a safe location where they Chapter 2
open the right cover, you will see the amount of ink Using a Variety of
remaining for each color along with its notation (Y= Yel- are out of the reach of small children. If a child licks or Media
low, M= Magenta, PM= Photo Magenta, C= Cyan, PC= ingests ink accidentally, seek medical assistance
Photo Cyan, Bk= Photo Black/Matte Black). A flashing immediately.
Chapter 3
color display means the ink tank of that color should be Printing Methods for
replaced. Important Different Objectives
z Before installing an ink tank, slowly rotate it from side
Note to side about 7 or 8 times before breaking its seal. If Chapter 4
z If more than one color has disappeared, replace the you do not shake the tank the ink will precipitate, Maintaining the
Printer
ink tanks of the missing colors to recover printing. causing a deterioration in the print quality.
z After breaking the seal on an ink tank, avoid dropping
or shaking it. Spilled ink can stain the work area. Chapter 5
z The ink supply ports of empty ink tanks may be Network Environ-
covered with ink. Always handle ink tanks carefully. ment
The ink could spill on your clothing and make stains
Chapter 6
that cannot be removed. Troubleshooting
z An ink tank should be used up within six months after
its seal has been broken or after it has been removed
from its package. After this time period has elapsed for Chapter 7
the ink tank, this could cause the quality of printing to Operation of the
deteriorate. Function Menus
z Never leave an ink tank removed from the printer for a
long period (over one month). The ink could clog and
lead to poor print quality.
Contents
4- 4 Index
Replacing Ink Tanks
TOP
Replacing an Ink Tank 2 Open the right cover.

Chapter 1
Follow the procedure below to replace an ink tank. You can Basic Procedures
follow this same procedure to replace any ink tank.
Caution Chapter 2
Using a Variety of
z Always confirm that the replacement ink tank is the Media
same type as the tank that is installed in the printer. If
you mistakenly exchange a Photo Black ink tank and a The ink level is shown in the display; a flashing color Chapter 3
Matte Black ink tank, this could damage the printer. To means that the ink tank of that color must be Printing Methods for
change the type of black ink tank, you must execute replaced. Different Objectives
ChangeBkInkType on the printer operation panel and
then exchange the black ink tanks. (→ P.4-47) Ink
Chapter 4
Cleaning
1
(3 sec.)
Stop/Eject
Maintaining the
(1 sec.) Online
Printer
Look at the printer display and make sure
that the printer is not operating.
Chapter 5
You can replace an ink tank while the display shows Using the Printer in a
any of the following: Online, Offline, Check Ink Important Network Environ-
Level, or Rep. Ink Tank. z The right cover cannot be opened while the printer is ment
initializing immediately after the printer is switched on, Chapter 6
Information Power
Data
Message
Error!
Rep. Ink Tank
E02818 during printhead cleaning, or during a print job. Please Troubleshooting
Cleaning
(3 sec.)
Stop/Eject
wait until processing is completed.
(1 sec.) Online
Offline
Offline Chapter 7
Menu Please Wait...
Operation of the
Function Menus
Contents
4- 5 Index
Replacing Ink Tanks
TOP
3 Press the ink tank lever of the color to 5 Slowly rotate a new ink tank still in its
replace, then open the ink tank cover. package 7 or 8 times, then remove it from its Chapter 1
package. Basic Procedures
Chapter 2
Using a Variety of
Media
Chapter 3
Important
4
Hold the empty ink tank by the grips on the z Always confirm that the replacement ink tank is the
same type as the tank that is installed in the printer. If
left and right side of the ink tank, then Chapter 4
you mistake a Photo Black Ink tank for a Matte Black Maintaining the
remove it. Ink tank, this will cause poor print quality. To change Printer
the type of black ink tank, you must execute
ChangeBkInkType on the printer operation panel and Chapter 5
then exchange the black ink tanks. (→ P.4-47) Using the Printer in a
z Always hold an ink tank by its left and right grips (b) Network Environ-
ment
while you are handling it.
Chapter 6
b Troubleshooting
Place each ink tank in a vinyl or plastic bag and seal it. Chapter 7
Operation of the
z Never touch the ink supply port (a) or the electrical Function Menus
Important
terminal (c). This could damage the ink tank, cause
z If ink remains in a removed ink tank, store the ink tank
poor print quality, or stain the work area.
with the ink supply port (a) pointing up. Ink leaked from
ink tanks will stain the work area. a
a
c
Contents
4- 6 Index
Replacing Ink Tanks
TOP
6 With the ink supply port facing down and the 9 When you finish replacing ink tanks, close
label facing front as shown, insert the ink the right cover. Chapter 1
tank into its holder. Basic Procedures
Chapter 2
Using a Variety of
Media
Chapter 3
The printer returns to the Online or Offline mode. Printing Methods for
Printing restarts if the Rep. Ink Tank message Different Objectives
displayed during a print job.
7 Close the ink tank cover until you hear it Important

Chapter 4
Maintaining the
catch. z If an ink tank has not been installed, then in the printer Printer
display you will see a Exxxx error code in the top line
and the No X Ink Tank message in the bottom line. Go Chapter 5
to Step 2 to correct this problem and make sure that all Network Environ-
the color ink tanks are installed. ment
Chapter 6
Troubleshooting
Important Chapter 7
Operation of the
z The ink tanks are shaped so the cover will not close If Function Menus
you set the wrong ink tank in a holder. If the ink tank
cover does not close, confirm that the color labels on
the holder match the color of the ink tank and the
direction of the ink tank.
Contents
8 To replace an ink tank of any other color,
repeat Step 3 to Step 7.
4- 7 Index
Cautions About Using Refilled Ink Tanks for This Printer
TOP
Cautions About Using Refilled Ink Tanks for This Printer Chapter 1
Basic Procedures
Ink tanks specified for use with the printer provide an ink
level detection function where the printer can detect when Switching the Ink Level Detection Func-
ink runs out during printing to prevent damage to the tion Off Chapter 2
printhead. Using a Variety of
If you use a refilled ink tank, the ink level detection function
will no longer function correctly, and the printer will halt
1 Press the Online button to display MAIN
Media
MENU.
when ink runs out. Before you can use tanks like this, you Chapter 3
2
must switch off the ink level detection function. Printing Methods for
Press the [ ] or [ ] button to select Different Objectives
If you print with the ink level detection switched off, this
System Setup then press [ ].
could damage the printer (especially the printhead) or
Chapter 4
cause other problems. Canon, Inc. can assume no
responsibility for damages caused by using ink tanks not 3 Press [ ] or [ ] to select Stop Ink Check,
Maintaining the
Printer
designed for use with the printer. then press [ ].
4
Chapter 5
Press [ ] or [ ] to select Bk Ink Tank etc., Using the Printer in a
Caution Network Environ-
z Once the ink level detection function is switched off, then press the OK button. ment
the ink level detection function cannot be recovered for
Chapter 6
the ink tanks in the printer. To recover the ink level Note Troubleshooting
display, the ink tanks must be replaced with new ink z To cancel the procedure of the ink level detection
tanks designed for use with the printer. function off at any time, just press the Online button.
z If the same ink tank is repeatedly removed and
5
Chapter 7
reinserted, this could damage the connection points When Stop Function? appears press [ ] Operation of the
between the ink tank and the printer, leading to ink Function Menus
or [ ] to select Yes, then press OK button.
leakage which could damage the printer.
An equals sign (=) appears as a prefix to the setting
and the ink remains detection function of the
selected ink tank is switched off. Contents
4- 8 Index
Cautions About Using Refilled Ink Tanks for This Printer
TOP
Executing a Print Job

Chapter 1
After switching off the ink level detection function, every Basic Procedures
time you execute a print job from the computer the Ink
level? message appears on the printer operation panel
display and the printer goes offline. To start the print job, Chapter 2
just press the Online button on the printer operation panel. Using a Variety of
Media
Chapter 3
Chapter 4
Maintaining the
Printer
Chapter 5
Network Environ-
ment
Chapter 6
Troubleshooting
Chapter 7
Operation of the
Function Menus
Contents
4- 9 Index
Cleaning the Printer
TOP
Cleaning the Printer Chapter 1

Clean the printer periodically to maintain high print quality 2 Disconnect the power cord at the power supply.
Basic Procedures
and to avoid problems.

Obey the following precautions when you clean the printer. Chapter 2
Using a Variety of
Media
Caution
z When you clean the printer, always switch the printer
Chapter 3
off and unplug its power cord from the power supply. If Printing Methods for
3
the printer is accidentally switched on while you are Different Objectives
cleaning it, moving parts inside the printer could cause Dampen a clean cloth, wring it out
personal injury if you are touching them. completely, then use it to clean dirt and Chapter 4
z Never use a flammable liquid like thinner, benzene, paper dust from the printer exterior surfaces, Maintaining the
alcohol, etc. to clean the printer. If such combustible feed slot (a), and power cord plug, then wipe Printer
materials come into contact with electrical component the cleaned surfaces with a dry cloth.
inside the printer, this could cause a fire or electrical Chapter 5
shock. Using the Printer in a
Network Environ-
ment
Cleaning the Exterior Covers a

Chapter 6
Troubleshooting
During normal use the printer surfaces require cleaning at
least once a month.
1 4
Chapter 7
Hold down the Power button for more than 1 Insert the plug of the power cord into the power Operation of the
source. Function Menus
sec. to display Shut Down.. then switch the
printer off.
Information Power
Data
Message
Shut Down..
Please Wait..
Cleaning
Contents
(3 sec.)
Stop/Eject
(1 sec.) Online
Offline
Menu
4- 10 Index
TOP
Cleaning Inside the Upper Cover 2 Disconnect the power cord at the power supply.
Chapter 1
To maintain optimum use of the printer, you should clean Basic Procedures
the interior surfaces of the upper cover when you see the
print surfaces or back sides of printouts fouled with ink,
after printing one complete roll, or at least once a month. Chapter 2
Also, you should clean the printer after replacing media, Using a Variety of
especially after printing on small size media, after a Media
3
borderless printing job or after printing on the paper that
contains many paper dust. Open the upper cover. Chapter 3
Important
z Immediately after borderless printing or printing on
Chapter 4
small size paper, be sure to open the top cover and Maintaining the
clean around the platen. You should also diligently Printer
clean the platen area at other times as well. If the
platen area is dirty, this could cause ink stains on the Chapter 5
back sides of printed sheets. Using the Printer in a
Network Environ-
1 Hold down the Power button for more than 1
ment
Chapter 6
sec. to display Shut Down.. then switch the Important Troubleshooting
printer off. z Do not touch any areas other than those indicated.
Information Power Your hands could get dirty or this could damage the
printer.
Data
Message
Shut Down..
Please Wait..
Cleaning
Chapter 7
(3 sec.)
Stop/Eject
Operation of the
(1 sec.) Online
Function Menus
Offline
Menu
Contents
4- 11 Index
TOP
4 If paper dust has collected in the suction 5 Use a damp cloth (well wrung out) to clean
ports (a) on the platen and the borderless the upper cover handles, upper cover rollers Chapter 1
print ink groove (b), use the provided (c), the area around the platen (d), the paper Basic Procedures
cleaning brush to remove the dust and dirt pressure plate (e), the exit guide (f), the
from the ports and groove. borderless print ink groove (b), and the
Chapter 2
auxiliary output guide (g). Using a Variety of
a Media
c
d e f
Chapter 3
Chapter 4
Maintaining the
b Printer
Note Chapter 5
g b Using the Printer in a
z Wash the cleaner brush with water if it is dirty. Network Environ-
ment
Important
z Never polish the areas under the upper cover with a Chapter 6
Troubleshooting
dry cloth during cleaning. This could create static
electricity that attracts dust and dirt that could lower
print quality.
Chapter 7
Operation of the
Function Menus
Contents
4- 12 Index
TOP
6 While raising the flexible wire (h) with one 8 Insert the plug of the power cord into the
hand, wipe away the dirt on the flexible wire power source. Chapter 1
guide (i). Basic Procedures
Chapter 2
Using a Variety of
Media
Chapter 3
i
Chapter 4
7
Maintaining the
Printer
Raise the upper cover stopper to release the
Chapter 5
Network Environ-
ment
Chapter 6
Troubleshooting
Chapter 7
Operation of the
Function Menus
Contents
4- 13 Index
Cleaning the Paper Restraint
TOP
Cleaning the Paper Restraint Chapter 1

To maintain the proper use of the printer, use a piece of 2 Disconnect the power cord at the power
Basic Procedures
plain paper to clean the back surface of the paper pressure supply.
plate when you see the print surface or back surface of
Chapter 2
media fouled with ink, especially before switching from a Using a Variety of
small roll size to a larger size, or once a month. Media
Before starting this procedure, prepare some plain paper
(or any media other than film). Chapter 3
Important
3
z The paper you use for cleaning should be plain paper
Chapter 4
that does not easily produce cutting dust. If you use Push the release lever back to open it, fold a Maintaining the
film or any type of media that produces cutting dust sheet of plain paper (a) 2 or 3 times, insert it Printer
that could hang up, this could lower the print quality. from the back of the printer so it is under the
1 paper restraint (b), then use the paper to Chapter 5

Hold down the Power button for more than 1 Using the Printer in a
clean the under side of the plate. Network Environ-
sec. to display Shut Down.. and switch the ment
Be sure to wipe clean the entire length of the paper
printer off.
restraint. When you are finished, pull the release Chapter 6
Information Power lever to the front to close it. Troubleshooting
Data Shut Down..
Message Please Wait..
Cleaning
(3 sec.)
Stop/Eject
(1 sec.) Online
b Chapter 7
Offline
Menu a Operation of the
Function Menus
Contents
4- 14 Index
Cleaning the Paper Restraint
TOP
4 Insert the plug of the power cord into the
power source. Chapter 1
Basic Procedures
Chapter 2
Using a Variety of
Media
Chapter 3
Chapter 4
Maintaining the
Printer
Chapter 5
Network Environ-
ment
Chapter 6
Troubleshooting
Chapter 7
Operation of the
Function Menus
Contents
4- 15 Index
Replacing the Maintenance Cartridge
TOP
Replacing the Maintenance Cartridge Chapter 1

Basic Procedures
The maintenance cartridge vacuums excess ink that
accumulates as a result of borderless printing, printhead Checking Spacing Remaining in the
cleaning, and ink mist produced by other operations. When Maintenance Cartridge Chapter 2
you see the message prompt that tells you to replace the Using a Variety of
You can confirm the amount of space remaining in the
maintenance cartridge, replace the cartridge. Media
maintenance cartridge at any time by checking the printer
z Maintenance Cartridge MC-01 operation panel display. You should always check the
Chapter 3
amount of space remaining in the maintenance cartridge
before Heading Cleaning B, moving the printer, or any other Different Objectives
operation that could use up space in the maintenance
cartridge, and then replace the cartridge in advance. Chapter 4
Maintaining the
Information Button Display Printer
Information Power
Chapter 5
Ink Using the Printer in a
Network Environ-
Cleaning ment
You can check on how much space remains in the mainte- Chapter 6
Troubleshooting
nance cartridge at any time (during a print job or error dis-
play) by pressing the Information button. The icon at the
right end of the bottom line shows you the amount of space
Chapter 7
that remains in the maintenance cartridge. Operation of the
Function Menus
Reading the Maintenance Cartridge Display
The height of the bar tells you how much more ink the
maintenance cartridge vacuum and store.
Contents
~700ml ~600ml ~500ml ~400ml ~300ml ~200ml 200ml~0ml
(7dot) (6dot) (5dot) (4dot) (3dot) (2dot) (1dot)
4- 16 Index
TOP
When to Replace the Maintenance Car- When You See the Replace MT-Cart.
Message Chapter 1
tridge This message means that the maintenance cartridge is Basic Procedures
When the maintenance cartridge becomes full of ink, the full, and the print job will stop when the Replace MT-
printer driver screen or the printer operation panel will Cart. message appears. Replace the ink tank as soon as
display a message to tell you that it is time to replace the Chapter 2
this message appears. Using a Variety of
maintenance cartridge. Media
ERROR E02818
When You See the MTCart Full Soon Replace MT-Cart.
Chapter 3
Message Printing Methods for
When you see this message, this means that the mainte- Different Objectives
Note
nance cartridge is nearly full. You can continue to oper- z While this message is displayed, you cannot replace
ate the printer. When the MTCart Full Soon message the black ink tank, replace the printhead, or move the Chapter 4
appears, this means that the maintenance cartridge is Maintaining the
printer. First, you must replace the maintenance Printer
about to be full. Obtain a new maintenance cartridge. cartridge.
Online Chapter 5
MTCart Full Soon Using the Printer in a
Network Environ-
ment
Note Chapter 6
z While this message is displayed, you cannot replace Troubleshooting
an black ink tank or move the printer. First, you must
replace the maintenance cartridge.
Chapter 7
Operation of the
Function Menus
Contents
4- 17 Index
TOP
Maintenance Cartridge Handling Pre- Maintenance Cartridge Replacement

Chapter 1
cautions Procedure Basic Procedures
Follow the guidelines below when you handle the Follow the procedure below to replace a maintenance
maintenance cartridge. cartridge.
z Replacing the maintenance cartridge (→ P.4-18) Chapter 2
Using a Variety of
Important z Replacing the Shaft Cleaner (→ P.4-21) Media
z Never remove a maintenance cartridge until you are
ready to replace it. Chapter 3
z To avoid ink spills with a maintenance cartridge that is
full of ink, never drop it and always lay it flat (never at 1 Look at the printer display and make sure
an angle). Spilled ink can stain the work area. that the printer is not operating.
z Ink adheres to the top of a used maintenance Information Power
Chapter 4
cartridge. Handle maintenance cartridges carefully. Data ERROR! E02818 Maintaining the
Message Replace MT-Cart.
Cleaning Printer
The ink could spill on your clothing and make stains (3 sec.)
Stop/Eject
(1 sec.) Online
that cannot be removed.
z Once a maintenance cartridge has been installed in Offline Chapter 5
Menu
one printer, it cannot be installed in another printer.
2
Network Environ-
ment
Open the maintenance cartridge cover.
Chapter 6
Troubleshooting
Chapter 7
Operation of the
Function Menus
Contents
4- 18 Index
TOP
3 Pull out the tabs (a) of the used maintenance 4 While holding the used maintenance
cartridge and remove it horizontally with the cartridge level, slip it into the protective vinyl Chapter 1
handles (b) on both sides. bag that held the new cartridge, press down Basic Procedures
on the bag to expel excess air, then close the
b zipper completely.
Chapter 2
Using a Variety of
Media
a
Chapter 3
Caution
z Always store a used maintenance cartridge in a safe Chapter 4
location out of the reach of children. If a child licks or Important Maintaining the
ingests ink accidentally, seek medical assistance z In accordance with its active and on-going policy to Printer
immediately. protect the environment, Canon collects used
maintenance cartridges. Follow the instructions Chapter 5
provided with the new maintenance cartridge that Using the Printer in a
Network Environ-
describe how to process the used cartridge. ment
b
5 Check the top and bottom of the bag holding
Chapter 6
Troubleshooting
the used maintenance cartridge, place it in
the packing box, then store it flat in a safe
Important
location. Chapter 7
z An full maintenance cartridge is heavy. Grip the Operation of the
cartridge tightly by the left and right handles (b) and Function Menus
hold it level when removing or storing it. If you drop a
maintenance cartridge or lay it down at an angle, this
could cause ink to leak and stain the work area.
Contents
4- 19 Index
TOP
7 Close the maintenance cartridge cover.
Important Chapter 1
z Be sure to store the removed maintenance cartridge in Basic Procedures
a packing box and store it on a flat surface. An ink leak
can stain the work area.
z Before you place the vinyl bag into the packing box, Chapter 2
make sure that the zipper is closed completely. Using a Variety of
Media
6 Place the new maintenance cartridge into the

maintenance cartridge cover and make sure
that it is inserted completely.
8 Press the Information button.
Chapter 3
Cleaning
(3 sec.)
Stop/Eject
Chapter 4
(1 sec.) Online
Maintaining the
Printer
The initialization of the new maintenance cartridge Chapter 5

finishes after about 5 seconds, then the printer Using the Printer in a
enters the Online or Offline mode. Network Environ-
ment
Important
Important Chapter 6
z Never touch the terminal (c). Touching the terminal on Troubleshooting
the back of the maintenance cartridge could damage z Never attempt to remove or re-attach the maintenance
it. cartridge within 5 seconds after it enters the online
mode. The maintenance cartridge could be damaged.
Chapter 7
Operation of the
c Note Function Menus
z The maintenance cartridge can also be replaced with
the printer switched off. In this case, never attempt to
remove or re-attach the maintenance cartridge for at
least 5 seconds after you switch the printer on again. Contents
4- 20 Index
TOP
Replacing the Shaft Cleaner
Important
1
Chapter 1
Press the Online button to display Offline. z Do not touch any areas other than those indicated. Basic Procedures
Data Offline
Information Power
printer.
Feed Paper
4
Message
Cleaning
(3 sec.) Chapter 2
Stop/Eject
(1 sec.) Online
Grip the lever of the shaft cleaner and pull it Using a Variety of
Media
Offline
Menu
toward you.
2
Chapter 3
Hold down the [ ] button for more than 1 Printing Methods for
second.
Data
Information Power Chapter 4
Message
MAIN MENU
Chng Head Hght
Cleaning
Maintaining the
(3 sec.)
Stop/Eject
Printer
(1 sec.) Online
Offline
Menu
5 Remove the cap of a new shaft cleaner Chapter 5
The carriage moves to the center and Open Upper provided with the maintenance cartridge. Network Environ-
Cover message appears on the display. ment
3 Open the upper cover.

Chapter 6
Troubleshooting
Chapter 7
Operation of the
Function Menus
Note
z Remove the cap from a new shaft cleaner and attach it
to the used shaft cleaner, place the used shaft cleaner
in its box, place it in the original box with the used
maintenance cartridge, and dispose of them together.
Contents
4- 21 Index
TOP
6 Install the new shaft cleaner into the
carriage. Chapter 1
Basic Procedures
Push in the shaft cleaner until you hear it catch.
Chapter 2
Using a Variety of
Media
Chapter 3
lock then close the upper cover. Chapter 4
Maintaining the
Printer
Chapter 5
Network Environ-
ment
Chapter 6
Troubleshooting
The carriage returns to the home position and the
printer enters the Online mode.
Chapter 7
Operation of the
Function Menus
Contents
4- 22 Index
Replacing the Printhead
TOP
Replacing the Printhead Chapter 1

Basic Procedures
Replace the printhead if two consecutive Head Cleaning B z Never touch a printhead immediately after printing has
executions do not restore acceptable print quality, if stopped. A printhead becomes extremely hot during
ERROR E02813 is displayed, or if a customer service printing and can cause minor burns.
Chapter 2
center instructs you to replace the printhead. You can easily Using a Variety of
stain your hands during printhead replacement, so wear the Important Media
plastic gloves provided in the box with the new printhead. z Try to avoid dropping or shaking a printhead. Spilled
z Printhead BC-1350 ink can stain the work area. Chapter 3
z The ink supply port of a removed printhead may be Printing Methods for
covered with ink. Always handle a printhead carefully.
The ink could spill on your clothing and make stains
that cannot be removed. Chapter 4
Maintaining the
z Never break the seal on a printhead package until Printer
immediately before you install the printhead. Always
handle a printhead carefully after breaking its seal. If a
Chapter 5
printhead is stored with its seal broken this can cause Using the Printer in a
Note the nozzles to dry and lead to poor print quality. Network Environ-
z When the ink supply runs low in an ink tank, procure a z If you need to store a printhead temporarily, set it with ment
new ink tank for replacement as soon as possible. its nozzles (a) and electrical contact points (b) pointing Chapter 6
down. Damage to the nozzles or electrical contacts Troubleshooting
can lead to poor print quality.
Printhead Handling Precautions a
Chapter 7
Always follow these precautions when handling a b Operation of the
printhead. Function Menus
Caution
z Always store a printhead in a safe location where it is z Never attempt to disassemble or alter a printhead.
out of the reach of small children. If a child licks or This could damage the printer. Contents
ingests ink accidentally, seek medical assistance z Never touch the nozzles (a) or the electrical contacts
immediately. (b) on the printhead. This could cause poor paper
feed.
4- 23 Index
TOP
How to Replace the Printhead 2 Press the Online button to display MAIN
MENU. Chapter 1
To replace the printhead, execute Replace P.head on the Basic Procedures
Maintenance menu then follow the messages on the MAIN MENU
Head Cleaning
printer operation panel display to perform the procedure. Cleaning
(3 sec.)
Stop/Eject
Before you adjust the position of the printhead after (1 sec.) Online
Chapter 2
replacing it, make sure a roll or cut sheets A3 (L) size or Using a Variety of
wider is loaded in the printer. Media
z Remove printed and other media from the platen.
z Clean the paper pressure plate. (→ P.4-14) 3 Press [ ] or [ ] to select Maintenance, Chapter 3
z Execute Replace P.head then press [ ]. Printing Methods for
z After ink has drained from the printhead, remove it.
MAIN MENU
z Install the new printhead. Maintenance ↓
Chapter 4
4
Maintaining the
Important Select Replace P.head then press [ ]. Printer
z Always follow the prescribed procedure to replace a
printhead. If you fail to follow the prescribed Maintenance Chapter 5
Replace P.head ↓
procedure, this could cause the printhead to leak ink Using the Printer in a
5
that will stain the printer and the work area. Network Environ-
Press [ ] or [ ] to select Yes, then press ment
1 If the printer power is off, press the Power OK button. Chapter 6

Troubleshooting
button to switch the printer on. Replace P.head
Yes
Information Power
Data
Message Chapter 7
Cleaning
(3 sec.)
Stop/Eject
Printhead replacement processing starts when you Operation of the
(1 sec.) Online
see Please Wait.. displayed. The processing Function Menus
Offline requires about 3 minutes to complete.
Menu
When preparation is finished, Open UpperCover is

Within a short time, Online or Offline is displayed. displayed.
Contents
4- 24 Index
TOP
6 Open the upper cover. 7 If the printhead adjustment lever is in either
the high or low position, return it to the center Chapter 1
(normal) position, then raise the carriage Basic Procedures
cover completely.
Chapter 2
Using a Variety of
Media
Chapter 3
Rep. P.head OK is displayed on the printer

Chapter 4
operation panel.
8
Maintaining the
Raise the carriage cover so it is completely Printer
Important open.
z Do not touch any areas other than those indicated. Chapter 5
Your hands could get dirty or this could damage the Using the Printer in a
printer. Network Environ-
ment
z Before you start the procedure, wring out a damp cloth
and clean the carriage cover, printhead cover, and Chapter 6
printhead lock lever if they are dirty. Troubleshooting
Chapter 7
Operation of the
Function Menus
Contents
4- 25 Index
TOP
9 Pull the printhead lock lever completely 11 Remove the old printhead.
forward to open it. Chapter 1
Basic Procedures
Chapter 2
Using a Variety of
Media
Chapter 3
Caution
10 Raise the printhead lock cover completely to z If you are going to replace the printhead immediately
Chapter 4
Maintaining the
open it. after printing, wait a few minutes before performing the Printer
replacement. The metal components of the printhead
may be hot immediately after printing, and touching Chapter 5
these parts could cause a minor burn. Using the Printer in a
Network Environ-
ment
Important
z Never touch the carriage terminal. This could damage Chapter 6
Troubleshooting
the printer.
Chapter 7
Operation of the
Function Menus
Contents
4- 26 Index
TOP
12 While holding the new printhead by the grips 13 With the nozzles pointing down and the
(c), remove it from its package; remove the electrical contacts facing the printer, insert Chapter 1
orange protective cap 1 (d), then on both the new printhead into the carriage. Basic Procedures
sides of protective cap 2 (e), while pressing Handle the printhead carefully so its nozzles do not
in both grips (f) as shown, pull down to touch the carriage, then press down to ensure that it
Chapter 2
remove the cap. is installed completely. Using a Variety of
Media
c
d
Chapter 3
f Printing Methods for
f
Chapter 4
e Maintaining the
Printer
14
Important Chapter 5
z The inside surface protective cap 2 (e) is covered with Pull the printhead lever toward you and down Network Environ-
ink to protect the nozzles. Do not touch this area of the to lock the printhead in place. ment
cap or drop it. Performing so could cause problems.
Chapter 6
z When handling the printhead, always hold it by the Troubleshooting
grips (c) on the left and right sides.
z Never touch the nozzles (a) or the electrical contacts
(b). This could damage the printhead, cause poor print Chapter 7
quality, or stain the work area. Operation of the
Function Menus
a
Contents
z Never try to re-attach the protective caps or packing
material removed from the printhead.
4- 27 Index
TOP
15 Push the printhead lever toward the back of 17 Raise the upper cover stopper to release the
the printer and down, then press down until lock then close the upper cover. Chapter 1
you hear it click and lock. Basic Procedures
Chapter 2
Using a Variety of
Media
Chapter 3
16
Lower the carriage cover and press down As soon as you close the upper cover of the printer, Different Objectives
Please Wait.. is displayed in the bottom line of the
until you hear it click and lock.
display and processing begins. The processing Chapter 4
requires about 10 minutes to complete. Maintaining the
Printer
As soon as processing is finished, Advanced Adj. is
displayed and the printhead is adjusted
automatically. (→ P.4-40) Chapter 5
Network Environ-
Important ment
z The printhead adjustment does not execute if the Auto
Chapter 6
Print feature on the Main menu is set to Off. After Troubleshooting
replacing the printhead, perform Advanced Adj. under
Auto Head Adj. on the printer operation panel to
adjust the printhead automatically. (→ P.4-40) Chapter 7
z The printhead adjustment cannot be performed if the Operation of the
loaded roll paper or cut sheets are not at least A3 (L) Function Menus
size or larger. Printhead adjustment continues as soon
as the media is set.
z Never attempt to remove an ink tank when the ink
tanks are filling during the installation procedure and Contents
immediately after replacing the printhead, or during the
printer cleaning operation.
4- 28 Index
Replacing the Cutter Blade
TOP
Replacing the Cutter Blade Chapter 1

Follow the procedure below to change the position of a 3 Press [ ] or [ ] to display System Setup
Basic Procedures
blade that no longer cuts cleanly. The cutting position can then press [ ].
be changed twice for one blade. Once the cutting position
Chapter 2
adjustment dial is set to 3, replace the blade with a new MAIN MENU Using a Variety of
System Setup ↓
one. Media
z Cutter Blade CT-02 4 Press [ ] or [ ] to select Change Cutter, Chapter 3

then press [ ]. Printing Methods for
System Setup
Change Cutter ↓
Chapter 4
5
Maintaining the
1 Press [ ] or [ ] to select Yes, then press Printer

If the printer power is off, press the Power OK button.
button to switch the printer on. Chapter 5
Change Cutter Using the Printer in a
Data
Information Power Yes Network Environ-
Message
Cleaning ment
(3 sec.)
Stop/Eject Carriage Moving appears in the bottom line of the
(1 sec.) Online
Chapter 6
display, and Open Upper Cover appears after the Troubleshooting
Offline
Menu carriage moves to the center of the platen.
Within a short time, Online or Offline is displayed.
Chapter 7
Operation of the
Function Menus
MENU.
MAIN MENU
Head Cleaning
Contents
Cleaning
(3 sec.)
Stop/Eject
(1 sec.) Online
4- 29 Index
TOP
6 Open the upper cover.
Important Chapter 1
z After removing the cutter blade, never touch the Basic Procedures
cutting edge (b). This could cause personal injury.
Chapter 2
Using a Variety of
Media
b
Chapter 3
8
Rotate the cutter position adjustment dial 1 Different Objectives
notch in the direction shown.

Chapter 4
Important If the dial is already at notch 3 replace the cutter Maintaining the
z Do not touch any areas other than those indicated. blade with a new one. Printer
printer. Chapter 5
z If the cutter blade or the carriage is dirty, before you Using the Printer in a
perform the procedure to adjust the operation of the Network Environ-
ment
cutter blade, wring out a damp, clean cloth and use it
to clean the cutter blade and the carriage. Chapter 6
Troubleshooting
7 Grasp the cutter blade (a) by the grips then

Note
remove it from the carriage. z The position adjustment dial has 3 positions that can Chapter 7
be adjusted; the blade can be used at three steps (1, Operation of the
Function Menus
2, 3). The blade cannot be used with the dial returned
to a position.
a z Once you have set the cutter blade dial to position 3,
procure a new cutter blade for future replacement.
Contents
4- 30 Index
TOP
9 Install the cutter blade back into the carriage. 10 Raise the upper cover stopper to release the
lock then close the upper cover. Chapter 1
Basic Procedures
Chapter 2
Using a Variety of
Media
Chapter 3
Please Wait.. appears in the bottom line of the Different Objectives
Note
display, the carriage moves, then the Reset Cut
z To remove the protective cap from a new cutter blade, Count message displays. Chapter 4
turn the cap in the direction of the arrow. Also, you Maintaining the
must attach the removed cap to the used cutter blade
and discard the used blade in accordance with local
11 Once you have set the cutter position dial to
Printer
laws and regulations. 2 or 3 and pressed the Stop button and

Chapter 5
replaced the cutter blade, press the OK Using the Printer in a
button. Network Environ-
ment
Reset Cut Count
Chapter 6
Press/OK Stop
Troubleshooting
The printer returns to the Online or Offline mode.
Chapter 7
Operation of the
Function Menus
Contents
4- 31 Index
Transporting the Printer
TOP
Transporting the Printer Chapter 1

Before you transport the printer, follow the procedure below 1 If the printer power is off, press the Power
Basic Procedures
to prepare the printer for shipping so its internal button to switch the printer on.
mechanisms are protected. To pack the printer for
Chapter 2
transport, refer to the Quick Start Guide and follow the Data
Information Power
Using a Variety of
installation procedure in reverse order.
Message
Cleaning
(3 sec.) Media
Stop/Eject
(→ Quick Start Guide) (1 sec.) Online
Offline
Menu
Chapter 3
Within a short time, Online or Offline is displayed. Different Objectives
z Before you move the printer always perform this
2
procedure by executing the Move Printer menu and
following the instructions on the display. The printer Press the Online button to display MAIN Chapter 4
Maintaining the
could be damaged if you attempt to move it after MENU. Printer
disconnecting the power cord before switching off the
printer. If you accidentally disconnect the power cord MAIN MENU
Head Cleaning
Chapter 5
before switching the printer off, reattach the power Cleaning
(3 sec.)
Stop/Eject Using the Printer in a
cord, reinstall the ink tanks, then perform the (1 sec.) Online
Network Environ-
procedure again from Step 1. (→ Quick Start Guide) ment
z You cannot execute Move Printer once the MTCart Chapter 6
Full Soon or Replace MT-Cart appears. You can
execute Move Printer after the maintenance cartridge
3 Press [ ] or [ ] to select Maintenance, Troubleshooting
has been replaced. then press [ ].

z Never tilt the printer while you are moving it. This could MAIN MENU
Chapter 7
spill ink inside the printer and foul the work area. Maintenance ↓ Operation of the
z If you cannot avoid tilting or standing the printer on end Function Menus
in order to move, please contact the dealer where you
purchased the printer or the nearest service center.
4 Press [ ] or [ ] to select Move Printer
then press [ ].
Maintenance
Contents
Move Printer ↓
4- 32 Index
TOP
5 Press [ ] or [ ] to select Yes, then press 7 Open the ink tank covers and remove all of
OK button. the ink tanks. Chapter 1
Basic Procedures
Move Printer
Yes
Open RightCover is displayed. Chapter 2

Using a Variety of
6 Open the right cover.

Media
Chapter 3
Chapter 4
Maintaining the
Place each ink tank in a vinyl or plastic bag and seal Printer
it.
Remove Ink Tank is displayed on the operation Chapter 5
panel. Using the Printer in a
Note
Network Environ-
z Store the removed tanks with the ink supply ports up ment
(a). Ink leaked from ink tanks will stain the work area.
Chapter 6
a Troubleshooting
Chapter 7
Operation of the
Function Menus
Contents
4- 33 Index
TOP
8 Close and lock all the ink tank covers and 11 Lower the lever of the holder stopper,
close the right cover. remove the stopper, remove the roll from the Chapter 1
roll holder, then store the roll holder and the Basic Procedures
holder stopper.
Chapter 2
Using a Variety of
Media
Chapter 3
Please Wait.. appears followed by Ink Draining Printing Methods for
while the ink is sucked from inside the tubes. This
processing requires about 4 minutes to complete.
The printer switches off automatically once 12 Open the upper cover.
Chapter 4
Maintaining the
processing is completed. Printer
9 Disconnect the power cord and the interface Chapter 5

cable. Using the Printer in a
Network Environ-
10 Remove the roll holder.

ment
Chapter 6
Troubleshooting
Chapter 7
Important Operation of the
Function Menus
z Do not touch any areas other than those indicated.
This could damage the printer.
Contents
4- 34 Index
TOP
13 Clamp the belt with the belt stopper then use 16 If you are using the optional stand, follow the
the hex wrench to fasten the belt stopper. installation procedure in reverse to remove it. Chapter 1
17
Basic Procedures
Remove the printer in reverse order of setup
procedure.
Chapter 2
18 If you are using the stand, follow the

Using a Variety of
Media
installation procedure in reverse to
disassemble it. Chapter 3
19 Reattach the tapes and shipping materials to

the roll holder and printer, then pack them in Chapter 4

Note the original shipping box. Maintaining the
z Attach the belt stopper that was removed at installation Printer
This completes preparing the printer for moving.
and stored.
14
Chapter 5
Important Using the Printer in a
Raise the upper cover stopper to release the
z Follow the procedures in the Quick Start Guide to re- Network Environ-
lock then close the upper cover. ment
install the printer at the new location after moving the
printer. Chapter 6
z If you execute Move Printer and then unplug the Troubleshooting
power cord from the power source before switching
the printer off, this could damage the printer. Connect
the power cord, install the ink tanks, and perform the Chapter 7
procedure again from Step 1.(→ Quick Start Guide) Operation of the
Function Menus
15 Tape each printer cover in the reverse order Contents

of tape removal during setup.
4- 35 Index
Checking the Condition of the Printer
TOP
Checking the Condition of the Printer Chapter 1

When you see that the printouts are faded and uneven, or 2 Press the Online button to display MAIN
Basic Procedures
streaked with white lines, print a nozzle check pattern to MENU.

determine whether the nozzles are blocked. Before you
Chapter 2
print a nozzle check pattern, make sure roller paper or cut MAIN MENU Using a Variety of
Head Cleaning
sheets A3 (L) size or wider are loaded in the printer. Cleaning
(3 sec.) Media
Stop/Eject
(1 sec.) Online
Note Chapter 3
z If you are using cut sheets, make sure at least one Printing Methods for
3
sheet of unused A3 paper (not the blank sides of used
paper) or larger are set.
Press [ ] or [ ] to select Test Print then
press [ ]. Chapter 4
1 If the printer power is off, press the Power MAIN MENU

Maintaining the
Printer
button to switch the printer on. Test Print ↓
Data
Message
Information Power
4 Press [ ] or [ ] to select Nozzle Check,
Chapter 5
Network Environ-
then press OK button.
Cleaning
(3 sec.)
Stop/Eject
(1 sec.) Online ment
Offline
Menu
Test Print Chapter 6
Nozzle Check Troubleshooting
The nozzle check pattern prints. The printer returns
to the online mode and displays Online in the Chapter 7
display as soon as printing completes. Operation of the
Function Menus
Contents
4- 36 Index
Checking the Condition of the Printer
TOP
If there are no breaks in the horizontal lines of each
color, the nozzle check pattern is normal.
Chapter 1
• Sample: Printhead Operation Normal Basic Procedures
Chapter 2
Using a Variety of
Media
Chapter 3
• Sample: Printhead Operation Not Normal Different Objectives
Chapter 4
Maintaining the
Printer
Chapter 5
Network Environ-
If any of the lines are broken, perform the following ment
procedure: Chapter 6
Troubleshooting
1. Execute printhead cleaning. (→ P.4-38)
2. Print the nozzle check pattern again.
3. If the nozzle check patterns are still broken Chapter 7
Operation of the
after repeating this procedure several times, Function Menus
call the dealer where you purchased the
printer or call the nearest service center.
Contents
4- 37 Index
Cleaning the Printhead
TOP
Cleaning the Printhead Chapter 1

Basic Procedures
If the nozzles become blocked, cleaning the printhead may
recover optimum printer operation. Printhead Cleaning Procedures
Follow this procedure to clean the printhead. The procedure Chapter 2
Note is almost the same for each cleaning method. Using a Variety of
z When you set Nozzle Check, the printer performs a Media
If one execution of Head Cleaning A does not correct the
nozzle check and recovery automatically for every problem, perform Head Cleaning B. If Head Cleaning B
page specified for printing. Before shipping a printer, does not correct the problem, repeat Head Cleaning B two Chapter 3
the setting is set for 10 Pages. Printing Methods for
or three times. If the printer operation does not recover after
performing Head Cleaning B, the printhead may be at the
end of its service life. Call for service or contact the dealer
Types of Printhead Cleaning where you purchased the printer. (→ P.4-23)
Chapter 4
Maintaining the
There are two methods for printhead cleaning. Printer
Note
Head Cleaning A: z You can execute Head Cleaning A by holding down Chapter 5
Execute when printing appears uneven, or when the the Information button for more than three seconds. Using the Printer in a
Network Environ-
1
printhead is dirty. This cleaning method consumes the ment
least amount of ink. Head Cleaning A requires about 1 If the printer power is off, press the Power
minute. Chapter 6
button to switch the printer on. Troubleshooting
Head Cleaning B: Data
Information Power
Perform this cleaning if no ink is coming out of the print- Message

Cleaning
(3 sec.)
Chapter 7
head or if Head Cleaning A did not correct the problem.
Stop/Eject
(1 sec.) Online
Operation of the
Head Cleaning B requires about 3 minutes. Offline Function Menus
Menu
Contents
4- 38 Index
Cleaning the Printhead
TOP
MENU. Chapter 1
Basic Procedures
MAIN MENU
Head Cleaning
Cleaning
(3 sec.)
Stop/Eject
(1 sec.) Online
Chapter 2
Using a Variety of
Media
3 Select Head Cleaning then press [ ]. Chapter 3

MAIN MENU Different Objectives
Head Cleaning ↓
4 Press [ ] or [ ] to select the printhead

Chapter 4
Maintaining the
cleaning method then press OK button. Printer
Head Cleaning Chapter 5

Head Cleaning A
Network Environ-
Printhead cleaning starts. When printhead cleaning ment
is finished, the printer returns Online.
Chapter 6
5 Print the nozzle check pattern to determine if

Troubleshooting
printing has been recovered. (→ P.4-36)

Chapter 7
Operation of the
Function Menus
Contents
4- 39 Index
TOP
Aligning the Printhead Chapter 1

Basic Procedures
Aligning Printhead Procedure
1 If the printer power is off, press the Power

Chapter 2
Using a Variety of
button to switch the printer on. Media
Information Power
Data Chapter 3
If printed vertical lines are bent, or if the colors are faded
Message
Cleaning
(3 sec.) Printing Methods for
and uneven, perform the printhead position adjustment.
Stop/Eject
(1 sec.) Online Different Objectives
The printer will adjust the position of the printhead Offline
Menu
automatically as it reads the pattern used to adjust the Chapter 4
position of the printhead. Before you adjust the position of Within a short time, Online or Offline is displayed. Maintaining the
Printer
2
the printhead, make sure a roll or cut sheets A3 (L) size or
wider are loaded in the printer. Press the Online button to display MAIN
MENU. Chapter 5
Use the following procedure to adjust the position of the Using the Printer in a
printhead. Network Environ-
MAIN MENU
Head Cleaning
ment
Cleaning
Note
(3 sec.)
Stop/Eject
(1 sec.) Online
Chapter 6
z When you adjust the printhead, you should use the Troubleshooting
media of the type (other than film) that you use most
frequently.
z If you are using cut sheets, make sure at least one
3 Press [ ] or [ ] to select Adjust Printer, Chapter 7
Operation of the
then press [ ]. Function Menus
paper) or larger are set.
MAIN MENU
Adjust Printer ↓
4 Press [ ] or [ ] to select Auto Head Adj., Contents

then press [ ].
Adjust Printer
4- 40
Auto Head Adj. ↓ Index
TOP
5 Press [ ] or [ ] to select Advanced Adj. or
Standard Adj., then press [ ]. Chapter 1
Basic Procedures
Advanced Adj. adjusts the gaps between the even
and odd numbered nozzles, the color boundaries,
and print direction boundaries.
Chapter 2
Standard Adj. adjusts only the print direction Using a Variety of
boundaries. Media
Auto Head Adj.

Advanced Adj. ↓ Chapter 3
6 Press [ ] or [ ] to select Yes, then press

OK button. Chapter 4
Maintaining the
Advanced Adj. Printer
Yes
As the printhead adjustment pattern prints, the Chapter 5

printer reads the pattern and automatically adjusts Using the Printer in a
Network Environ-
the settings for position of the printhead. ment
After the printhead adjustment is finished, Online
Chapter 6
appears in the printer operation display. Troubleshooting
Chapter 7
Operation of the
Function Menus
Contents
4- 41 Index
Adjusting Amount of Media Feed
TOP
Adjusting Amount of Media Feed Chapter 1

Basic Procedures
z There is no automatic adjustment for highly
transparent film. Execute Fine Tuning to perform the
adjustment with manual entry. (→ P.4-43)
Chapter 2
Using a Variety of
Media
Media Feed Adjustment Procedure
Chapter 3
Perform the procedure below to perform Adjust Band to
adjust the amount of line feed if you see white lines or dark 1 If the printer power is off, press the Power
color lines in your printed images. As the band adjustment button to switch the printer on.
pattern prints, the printer reads the results of the print and Information Power Chapter 4
automatically adjusts the settings of the amount of line feed for Data
Message
Maintaining the
the media currently loaded in the printer. Before you perform
Cleaning
(3 sec.) Printer
Stop/Eject
(1 sec.) Online
the band adjustment, make sure a roll or cut sheet A3 (L) size
or wider is loaded in the printer. Offline
Menu
Chapter 5
Within a short time, Online or Offline is displayed. Network Environ-
Important ment
z Before you adjust line feed, you must use the
operation panel to select media type for the paper
2 Press the Online button to display MAIN Chapter 6
Troubleshooting
MENU.
loaded for printing. If the value of the media type
selection does not match the paper loaded for printing,
MAIN MENU
you will not achieve good print results and the quality Head Cleaning
Cleaning
(3 sec.)
Chapter 7
of the printing will be poor. Stop/Eject
(1 sec.) Online Operation of the
z Select Feed Priority > Band Joint in order to perform Function Menus
Adjust Band.
Note 3 Press [ ] or [ ] to select Adjust Printer,

Contents
z If you are using cut sheets, make sure at least one then press [ ].
paper) or larger are set. MAIN MENU
Adjust Printer ↓
4- 42 Index
TOP
4 Press [ ] or [ ] to select Adjust Band,
Adjusting Line Feed Manually
then press [ ]. Chapter 1
The line feed can be fine adjusted manually to increase or Basic Procedures
Adjust Printer decrease the amount of feed. Follow the procedure below
Adjust Band ↓
to perform this adjustment manually.
5 Press [ ] or [ ] to select Standard Adj., 1 Press the Online button to display MAIN
Chapter 2
Using a Variety of
then press [ ]. MENU.
Media
Adjust Band
Chapter 3
Standard Adj. ↓ MAIN MENU
Head Cleaning Printing Methods for
6
Cleaning
(3 sec.)
Stop/Eject
(1 sec.) Online
Press [ ] or [ ] to select Yes, then press

Maintaining the
Auto Adjustment
Yes 2 Press [ ] or [ ] to select Adjust Printer,
Printer
then press [ ]. Chapter 5

As the band adjustment pattern prints, the printer Using the Printer in a
reads the results of the print and automatically MAIN MENU
Network Environ-
Adjust Printer ↓
adjusts the settings of the amount of line feed for the ment
3
media currently loaded in the printer.
Chapter 6
After the amount of line feed has been adjusted, the Press [ ] or [ ] to select Adjust Band, Troubleshooting
printer returns to the Online mode. then press [ ].
Adjust Printer
Adjust Band ↓ Chapter 7
Operation of the
4
Function Menus
Press [ ] or [ ] to select Fine Tuning,
then press [ ].
Adjust Band
Fine Tuning ↓ Contents
Displays the values of the current settings.
4- 43 Index
TOP
5 Press the [ ] or [ ] button to select the
desired setting value then press the OK Chapter 1
button. Basic Procedures
If you want to widen the gap between the bands,

enter a number from 1 to 3.
Chapter 2
If you want to narrow the gap between the bands, Using a Variety of
enter a number from -1 to -3. Media
Fine Tuning
=0 Chapter 3
The selected setting is prefixed with an equals sign
(=) to denote the current setting.
Chapter 4
6 Press the Online button.
Maintaining the
Printer
Information Power
Data Online
Message Bk
Cleaning
Chapter 5
(3 sec.)
Stop/Eject
(1 sec.) Online
Network Environ-
Offline
ment
Menu
Chapter 6
The Online lamp lights and the printer is ready to Troubleshooting
print.
Note Chapter 7
z The value for the amount of feed adjustment can be Operation of the
performed during printing. However, if you change the Function Menus
amount of feed during printing, the print result may be
distorted by about 3 cm immediately after the change.
z Adjust in the plus (+) direction if white stripes are
visible in the output image, or adjust in the minus (−) Contents
direction if dense color stripes are visible.
4- 44 Index
Reducing the Amount of Cutting Dust
TOP
Reducing the Amount of Cutting Dust Chapter 1

When using a media like backlight film that easily creates 1 If the printer power is off, press the Power
Basic Procedures
cutting dust you can perform the setting to reduce the button to switch the printer on.
amount of cutter waste that can cause a deterioration in the
Chapter 2
quality of printing or damage the printhead. The cutter dust Data
Information Power
Using a Variety of
reduction function can be set for each media type.
Message
Cleaning
(3 sec.) Media
Stop/Eject
(→ P.1-21) (1 sec.) Online
If you set the cutter dust reduction function, black lines will Offline
Menu
Chapter 3
print at the leading edge and trailing edge of the printed Printing Methods for
sheets.

Maintaining the
The cutter MENU. Printer
dust reduction
The position
lines that will
that will be cut MAIN MENU
Head Cleaning
Chapter 5
be printed. Cleaning
(3 sec.)
Stop/Eject
(1 sec.) Online
Network Environ-
ment
Chapter 6
Important
3 Press [ ] or [ ] to select Med.Detail Set.,
Troubleshooting
then press [ ].
z Do not use this function for plain paper, thin paper, or
any other media that buckles easily. This type of media Chapter 7
MAIN MENU
may not cut properly and cause paper jams. Med. Detail Set. ↓ Operation of the
Function Menus
4
z Borderless printing cannot be performed with the
cutter dust reduction feature is set. In order to perform Press [ ] or [ ] to select the name of the
borderless printing, you must switch the cutter dust media type then press [ ].
reduction function off.
Med.Detail Set.
Contents
Backlit Film ↓
4- 45 Index
Reducing the Amount of Cutting Dust
TOP
5 Press [ ] or [ ] to display
CutDustReduct. then press [ ]. Chapter 1
Basic Procedures
Backlit Film
CutDustReduct. ↓
6 Press [ ] or [ ] to select a value for the

Chapter 2
Using a Variety of
setting then press OK button. Media
To switch the cutter dust reduction function on for the

Chapter 3
selected media type, select On or to release the
function for the media type select Off. Different Objectives
CutDustReduct.
On Chapter 4
Maintaining the
The selection is prefixed with an equals sign (=) to Printer
denote that the cut waste reduction function is
selected. Chapter 5
Network Environ-
ment
Chapter 6
Troubleshooting
Chapter 7
Operation of the
Function Menus
Contents
4- 46 Index
Changing the Black Ink Type
TOP
Changing the Black Ink Type Chapter 1

Basic Procedures
This printer employs two types of black ink, either Photo
Black Ink or Matte Black Ink, to best match the media type Important
and the requirements of the print job. For more details z When you execute ChangeBkInkType, the printer Chapter 2
about the types of black ink, please refer to Chapter 2 “The consumes about 45 ml of black ink and about 15 ml of Using a Variety of
Suitable Black Ink for Media”. (→ P.2-2) the colored inks in total. Before you change the ink Media
tanks, confirm that there is sufficient ink in the tank. It
z Photo Black Ink Tank BCI-1431BK
is recommended that you use a new ink tank Chapter 3
whenever possible. (→ P.4-2) Printing Methods for
z Matte Black Ink Tank BCI-145IMBK Different Objectives
z The Photo Black and Matte Black ink tanks cannot be
installed at the same time.
z You cannot execute ChangeBkInkType once the Chapter 4
Maintaining the
MTCart Full Soon or Replace MT-Cart appears. You Printer
can execute ChangeBkInkType after the
maintenance cartridge has been replaced.
Follow this procedure to switch the type of black ink. Chapter 5
Remove printed and other media from the platen. Network Environ-
On the operation panel perform ChangeBkInkType. ment
After the processing to drain the ink is finished, remove Chapter 6

Troubleshooting
the black ink tank.
Install the black ink that you want to use.
Confirm the installed ink tank. Chapter 7
Operation of the
Aligning the Printhead Function Menus
Contents
4- 47 Index
TOP
Black Ink Tank Exchange Procedure 4 Press [ ] or [ ] to select Yes, then press
1 If the printer power is off, press the Power ChangeBkInkType

Yes
Basic Procedures
button to switch the printer on.

The black ink drains while the Please Wait... Chapter 2
Information Power
Data
message is displayed. The draining requires about 1 Using a Variety of
Message
Cleaning Media
(3 sec.)
Stop/Eject
minute to complete.
(1 sec.) Online
As soon as processing is completed, the Open Chapter 3

Offline
Menu RightCover message is displayed. Printing Methods for
5
Open the right cover.
Maintaining the
MENU. Printer
MAIN MENU
Head Cleaning
Cleaning
Chapter 5
(3 sec.)
Stop/Eject Using the Printer in a
(1 sec.) Online
Network Environ-
ment
6
Chapter 6
3 Press [ ] or [ ] to select Press down on the lever of the black ink tank Troubleshooting
ChangeBkInkType, then press [ ]. and open the ink tank cover.

Chapter 7
MAIN MENU
ChangeBkInkType ↓
Operation of the
Function Menus
Contents
4- 48 Index
TOP
7 Hold the black ink tank by the grips and 8 With the black ink tank that you are going to
remove it. use still in is bag, slowly rotate it 7 or 8 times Chapter 1
then remove from the bag. Basic Procedures
Chapter 2
Using a Variety of
Media
Chapter 3
Place each ink tank in a vinyl or plastic bag and seal
it. z Always hold an ink tank by its left and right grips (b)
while you are handling it. Chapter 4
Maintaining the
Important b Printer
z If ink remains in a removed ink tank, store the ink tank
with the ink supply port (a) pointing up. Ink leaked from Chapter 5
ink tanks will stain the work area. Using the Printer in a
Network Environ-
a z Never touch the ink supply port (a) or the terminal (c). ment
This could damage the ink tank, cause poor print
Chapter 6
quality, or stain the work area. Troubleshooting
a
c
Chapter 7
Operation of the
Function Menus
Contents
4- 49 Index
TOP
9 With the ink supply port facing down and the 11 Close the right cover.
label facing front as shown, insert the black Chapter 1
ink tank into its holder. Basic Procedures
Chapter 2
Using a Variety of
Media
The name of the ink tank type you just set is Chapter 3
displayed. Printing Methods for
12
Confirm that the ink type is correct then
Important press OK button. Chapter 4
Maintaining the
z The ink tanks are shaped so the cover will not close if If the ink type display is incorrect press Stop, open Printer
you set the wrong ink tank in a holder. If the ink tank the right cover, and replace the black ink tank.
cover does not close, confirm that the color label on
z For a matte black ink tank: Chapter 5
the holder matches the color of the ink tank, and make Using the Printer in a
sure that ink tank is facing the proper direction. ChangeBkInkType
Network Environ-
ment
10
MBk Ink Tank OK?
Close the ink tank cover until you hear it Chapter 6

z For a photo black ink tank: Troubleshooting
catch.
ChangeBkInkType
Bk Ink Tank OK?
Chapter 7
The operation panel displays Ink Filling.. while the Operation of the
Function Menus
ink fills. Ink filling requires about 15 minutes.
When the procedure is finished, the printer returns
Online.
13 Align the printhead.

Contents
(→ P.4-40)
4- 50 Index
TOP
Chapter 5 Using the Printer in a Network Environment

Chapter 1
Basic Procedures
Before Using the Printer .............................................................................5-2
Required System Environment .............................................................................. 5-2 Chapter 2
The Network Environment ..................................................................................... 5-3 Using a Variety of
TCP/IP Network Settings (Windows, Macintosh, UNIX) .............................5-5 Media
Procedures Required for a TCP/IP Network .......................................................... 5-5
Connecting the LAN Cable .................................................................................... 5-5 Chapter 3
Setting the Printer IP Address ............................................................................... 5-7 Printing Methods for
Performing the TCP/IP Protocol Settings ............................................................ 5-15 Different Objectives
Setting the Printer for Sharing ............................................................................. 5-18
Macintosh Network Settings .....................................................................5-20 Chapter 4
Procedures Required for a Macintosh Network ................................................... 5-20 Maintaining the
Setting a Macintosh ............................................................................................. 5-21 Printer
Setting AppleTalk Protocol .................................................................................. 5-25
Install the Printer Driver ....................................................................................... 5-31
NetWare Settings (Windows) ...................................................................5-33 Chapter 5
Procedures Required for a NetWare Network ..................................................... 5-33
Network Environ-
Setting the Printer Frame Type ........................................................................... 5-34 ment
Setting Up a NetWare Print Service .................................................................... 5-37
Setting NetWare Protocol .................................................................................... 5-40 Chapter 6
Setting the Computer for NetWare ...................................................................... 5-44 Troubleshooting
Printing with UNIX ....................................................................................5-45
Using LPD to Print ............................................................................................... 5-45
Using FTP to Print ............................................................................................... 5-46 Chapter 7
Initializing the Settings ..............................................................................5-47 Operation of the
List of Network Settings ............................................................................5-48 Function Menus
Software Applications that can be used for Network Settings ..................5-51
Contents
Before Using the Printer
TOP
Before Using the Printer Chapter 1

Basic Procedures
This section describes some points that you should know
about checking the compatibility of network environments Note
or the network that you are using before you use the z If you are using Windows NT 4.0, install Service Pack Chapter 2
optional network interface expansion board. For more 6 or later. Using a Variety of
details about the network settings, we recommend that you z If you are using Mac OS X Ver. 10.2.5 or later, you can Media
consult your network administrator. use the Mac OS Zeroconf function to connect. (Also, if
you are using Mac OS 8.6, 9.x with the Canon Chapter 3
imagePROGRAF printer driver for Macintosh installed, Printing Methods for
Required System Environment you can also use the Zeroconf function to connect the Different Objectives
printer.)
This section describes the system environments that are Chapter 4
supported by the network interface of the printer. The lists Using an AppleTalk Network for Printing Maintaining the
below describe the system environments required to Printer
z Compatible Computer
support the network in use.
• A Macintosh Series computer equipped with a
Chapter 5
Using a TCP/IP Network for Printing Power PC processor.
z Compatible Operating Systems: z Compatible Operating Systems Network Environ-
• Windows Server 2003 • Mac OS 8.6 or later ment
• Windows XP • Mac OS X v10.1 or later Chapter 6
z Compatible AppleTalk Troubleshooting
• Windows 2000
• Windows NT 4.0 • EtherTalk Phase 2
z Required Memory
• Windows Me, Windows 98 Chapter 7
• 24 MB or more for Mac OS 8.6, 32 MB or more for
• Mac OS 8.6 or later Operation of the
Mac OS 9.x Function Menus
• Mac OS X v10.1 or later
• 128 MB or more is required for Mac OS X.
• Solaris Version 9
• Red Hat Linux 9
Note
• IBM PC or IBM compatible PC
z This printer is not compatible with a Macintosh Contents
LocalTalk Network.
• A Macintosh Series computer equipped with a
Power PC processor
5- 2
• Sun Microsystems SPARC platform computer Index
TOP
Using a NetWare Network for Printing The Network Environment
z Compatible Server Chapter 1
• Novell NetWare Version 4.2/5.1/6.0 Use the diagrams as reference to determine the type of Basic Procedures
z Compatible Clients network where the printer is connected, and then follow the
• Windows XP Professional required procedure.
• Windows 2000 Server Chapter 2
z Windows Network Examples Using a Variety of
• Windows 2000 Professional If you are using Windows network, you can use TCP/IP Media
• Windows NT Server 4.0 as the protocol. (→ P.5-5)
• Windows NT Workstation 4.0 Chapter 3
• Windows Me, Windows 98
Windows 98 Windows Me Windows XP Printing Methods for
• IBM PC or IBM compatible PC
Chapter 4
Maintaining the
Note Printer
TCP/IP
z NetWare Version 6.0 iPrint is not supported.
Chapter 5
Network Environ-
Windows 2000 Server W6400 ment
Chapter 6
z When you perform the settings for a TCP/IP network on a
Windows computer, each computer can send print jobs
directly to the printer connected to the network and have Chapter 7
them print. Also, if a print server is set up for Windows Operation of the
Function Menus
Server 2003, Windows XP, Windows 2000, or Windows
NT, each printer can send print jobs to the print server, the
print server can manage these jobs, and then send them
directly to the printer on the network. This greatly
increases the efficiency of job execution. For more details Contents
about print server settings, please refer to “Setting the
Printer for Sharing”. (→ P.5-18)
z The NetBIOS protocol cannot be used with this printer.
5- 3 Index
TOP
z Macintosh Network Examples
For a Macintosh computer, the AppleTalk (EtherTalk) or Note Chapter 1
TCP/IP, or Zeroconf (Mac OS X Ver. 10.2.5 or later) pro- z The TCP/IP and AppleTalk protocols can be used Basic Procedures
tocol is used. (→ P.5-20) together even in a NetWare server network
environment, In such a case, be sure to set which
Macintosh Macintosh protocol to use. Chapter 2
Using a Variety of
Media
Chapter 3
AppleTalk, TCP/IP Printing Methods for
Chapter 4
W6400 Maintaining the
Printer
z NetWare Network Examples
The NetWare protocol is used for printing in the network Chapter 5
environment shown in the illustration below. The Net- Using the Printer in a
Network Environ-
Ware client software must be installed on every Server
ment
and Client computer. (→ P.5-33)
Chapter 6
Windows 98 Windows Me Windows 2000 Troubleshooting
Chapter 7
Operation of the
Function Menus
NetWare
NetWare Server W6400

Contents
5- 4 Index
TCP/IP Network Settings (Windows, Macintosh, UNIX)
TOP
TCP/IP Network Settings (Windows, Macintosh, UNIX) Chapter 1

Basic Procedures
This chapter describes the setting methods and procedures → Quick Start
for connecting the printer to a TCP/IP network. 4 Install the Printer Driver
Guide
Install the Canon imagePROGRAF printer driver for Chapter 2
either Windows or Macintosh (OS X). Follow the Using a Variety of
Procedures Required for a TCP/IP Net- procedure on the Quick Start Guide to install the Media
work printer driver. There is no printer driver for UNIX.

Performing the TCP/IP Protocol Chapter 3
Here is a summary of the procedures required to set the 5 → P.5-15 Printing Methods for
Settings
printer for use on a TCP/IP network. Different Objectives
Performing the TCP/IP protocol settings according to
The following procedure should be performed by the you needs as required. You can use the Web Browser
network system administrator. Chapter 4
to perform these settings from your computer. Maintaining the
Printer
→ Quick Start
1 Installing the network interface board
Guide Connecting the LAN Cable Chapter 5
First, install the optional network interface board Using the Printer in a
2 Connecting the LAN Cable → P.5-5 1 Use a LAN cable to connect the printer LAN
Network Environ-
ment
Connect the LAN port to the HUB with the LAN cable. port to the HUB port.
Chapter 6
Troubleshooting
3 Setting the Printer IP Address → P.5-7
a
Set an IP address that will allow the printer to
communicate with the computer that you want to use. Chapter 7
Use either of the utilities below to perform this setting. Operation of the
• GARO Device Setup Utility (Canon software Function Menus
application provided with the printer.)
• ARP/PING Command
• Printer operation panel
Contents
5- 5 Index
TOP
2 Use a LAN cable to connect the computer 5. Press [ ] or [ ] to select Off, then press OK
LAN port to the HUB port. button.
Chapter 1
6. Press [ ] or [ ] to select Comm. Mode then Basic Procedures
press [ ].
Note
7. Press [ ] or [ ] to select Half Duplex or Full
z When this printer is connected to and used on a
Duplex then press OK button. Chapter 2
network, switch the printer on then check the LINK
8. Press [ ] or [ ] to select Ethernet Type then Using a Variety of
lamp (a) to confirm that it lights and remains on. This Media
press [ ].
lamp lights green with a 100-Base-TX connection and
9. Press [ ] or [ ] to select 10 Base-T or 100
lights yellow for a 10-BaseT connection.
Base-TX then press OK button. Chapter 3
z If the LINK lamp does not light, check the following 10.Press [ ] or [ ] to select Spanning Tree then Printing Methods for
points: press [ ].
• Is the HUB switched on? 11.Press [ ] or [ ] to select Not Use or Use then
press OK button. Chapter 4
If the HUB is switched off, switch it on. Maintaining the
12.Press [ ] twice to display Store Setting then
• Is the LAN cable connected correctly? Printer
press [ ].
Confirm that the LAN cable connectors are clicked
13.Press the OK button.
and locked in place correctly. Chapter 5
• Is the LAN cable defective? Using the Printer in a
Network Environ-
Connect another LAN cable and visually check the ment
lamp again.
Chapter 6
• Is the communication method correct for the HUB? Troubleshooting
If the communication method (mode and speed) set
for the printer and the HUB with auto recognition do
not match, follow the procedure below to perform the Chapter 7
connection settings manually. Operation of the
Function Menus
1. Press the Online button to display MAIN MENU.
2. Press [ ] or [ ] to select Interface Setup then
press [ ].
3. Press [ ] or [ ] to select Ethernet Driver then
press [ ]. Contents
4. Press [ ] or [ ] to select Auto Detect then
press [ ].
5- 6 Index
TOP
Setting the Printer IP Address Setting the frame type with GARO Device
Setup Utility Chapter 1
Before setting the printer protocol, you must set the IP Basic Procedures
If you are using Windows, use the GARO Device Setup
address to enable communication between the printer and
Utility, the software utility provided with the printer, to
the computer. Use either of the utilities below to perform
perform the printer network settings.
this setting. Use whichever is easiest to perform the Chapter 2
settings. z Installing GARO Device Setup Utility Using a Variety of
Media
z GARO Device Setup Utility (→ P.5-7)
Use this software utility to perform the computer settings Important
Chapter 3
if you are using a Windows computer. Perform the sub- z If you are using Windows Server 2003, Windows XP, Printing Methods for
nets mask and default gateway settings with the Remote Windows 2000, or Windows NT 4.0, you must log in as Different Objectives
UI. a member of the Administrators group.
1
Chapter 4
z ARP/PING Command (→ P.5-10) Mount the provided User Software CD-ROM Maintaining the
Printer
Use this command to perform the printer IP address set- in the computer CD-ROM drive.
ting on the command prompt screen. Performing the
Setup Menu window appears. Chapter 5
subnets mask and default gateway settings with the
Remote UI. Network Environ-
Note
ment
z Printer Operation Panel (→ P.5-12) z If the AutoPlay function is switched off, double-click the
To connect a Macintosh via an AppleTalk connection, My Computer icon on the desktop, click the CD-ROM Chapter 6
Troubleshooting
perform the settings on the printer operation panel. drive icon, and then from the File menu select
However, you can print without performing the printer AutoPlay.
network settings if you use the Zeroconf function (IP
Chapter 7
Print (Auto)) with Max OS X Ver. 10.2.5 or later to con- Operation of the
nect the printer. Function Menus
Important
z Before setting the IP address, confirm that the printer
is switched on and connected to the network. Contents
5- 7 Index
TOP
2 Click the Install Individual Software button. 4 Follow the instructions on the screen.
This completes the installation of the GARO Device Chapter 1
Setup Utility. Basic Procedures
z Setting Network Information
1
Chapter 2
On the desktop, click the Start button, point Using a Variety of
Media
to Programs, then select GARO Device
Setup Utility > GARO Device Setup Utility. Chapter 3
Chapter 4
Maintaining the
Printer
3 Click the Install button of the GARO Device
Setup Utility. Chapter 5
Network Environ-
ment
2
Chapter 6
Select the name of the printer you want to Troubleshooting
set from the list of printer names, then select
Protocol Settings from the Printer menu.
Chapter 7
Operation of the
Function Menus
Contents
5- 8 Index
TOP
3 Enter the IP Address, Subnet Mask, and 4 Click the OK button when the confirmation
Gateway Address assigned to the printer message is displayed. Chapter 1
and click the Set button. Basic Procedures
If the IP address is set automatically, select

Automatic for the Setting IP Address, then click
Chapter 2
the check boxes for DHCP, BOOTP, or RARP for the Using a Variety of
5
features you want to use. To specify a fixed IP Media
address, select Manual for the Setting IP Address. When you are finished performing the
settings, select Exit from the Printer menu. Chapter 3
Chapter 4
Maintaining the
Printer
Chapter 5
Network Environ-
ment
Chapter 6
The printer is shipped from the factory with Troubleshooting
AppleTalk and NetWare disabled for use. When
printing via AppleTalk, select Phase2 for AppleTalk
Phase. Chapter 7
Operation of the
When printing with NetWare, select the frame type in
Function Menus
use for NetWare Frame Type.
Contents
5- 9 Index
TOP
Setting with the ARP/PING Command 2 Press the Online button to display MAIN
To perform the setting with the ARP/PING command, MENU. Chapter 1
you need the MAC address of the printer. The MAC Basic Procedures
address can be found printed on the status print or on MAIN MENU
Head Cleaning
Cleaning
the seal attached to the expansion board, or on the (3 sec.)
Stop/Eject
(1 sec.) Online
Information menu displayed on the printer operation Chapter 2
panel. Using a Variety of
Media
z Checking the Printer MAC Address
Perform the procedure below to print a Status Print so
3 Press [ ] or [ ] to select Test Print then Chapter 3
you can check the MAC address. Before printing, set a press [ ]. Printing Methods for
roll of media larger than A3. MAIN MENU
Test Print ↓
Chapter 4
4
z The MAC address can be found printed on the nozzle Press [ ] or [ ] to select Status Print, Printer
check pattern or the printhead adjustment pattern, or then press OK button.
on the printer operation panel: MAIN MENU > Chapter 5
Information > MAC Address. Test Print Using the Printer in a
Status Print Network Environ-
1 If the printer power is off, press the Power The information about the printer settings is printed.
ment
Chapter 6
button to switch the printer on. After the nozzle check pattern has printed Online is Troubleshooting
displayed in the operation panel and the printer is
Information Power
Data ready to print.
Message
Cleaning
(3 sec.)
Stop/Eject
(1 sec.) Online
Chapter 7
Operation of the
Offline Function Menus
Menu
After a few moments, Online appears in the display.
Contents
5- 10 Index
TOP
The MAC Address is printed in the Status Print at the z Setting the IP Address
location indicated in the sample below.
1
Chapter 1
If you are using a Windows computer, start Basic Procedures
from the MS-DOS prompt or the command
prompt.
Chapter 2
If you are using UNIX or Linux, open the Console Using a Variety of
screen. Media
2 Execute the following commands to add Chapter 3

static entries to the arp table. Different Objectives
arp -s <IP Address> <MAC Address>
IP Address: Chapter 4
Maintaining the
Specify the IP address assigned to the printer. Enter Printer
the 4-digit numbers (decimal number 0 to 255) using
periods (.) as delimiters. Confirm the allocated Chapter 5
address with the network system administrator. Using the Printer in a
Network Environ-
MAC Address: ment
Specify the fixed MAC address of the printer. 2 digits
Chapter 6
for each column, using hyphens as delimiters. Troubleshooting
Entry Sample:
arp -s XXX.XXX.XXX.XXX 00-00-85-XX-XX-XX
Chapter 7
Operation of the
Function Menus
Contents
5- 11 Index
TOP
3 Execute the following commands to set the Setting with the Printer Operation Panel
IP address for the printer. The network information can be set up on the printer Chapter 1
operation panel. Enter the settings for the IP address, Basic Procedures
ping <IP Address> -l 479
subnet mask, and default gateway.
IP address:
Specify the same IP address used in Step 2. 1 Press the Online button to display MAIN Chapter 2
Using a Variety of
Entry Sample: MENU. Media
ping XXX.XXX.XXX.XXX -l 479
(For Windows)
MAIN MENU
Head Cleaning
Cleaning
Chapter 3
(3 sec.)
Stop/Eject
ping –s 479 XXX.XXX.XXX.XXX (1 sec.) Online
(For Red Hat Linux)
Chapter 4
2
ping –s XXX.XXX.XXX.XXX 479 Maintaining the
(For Solarius) Press [ ] or [ ] to select Interface Setup Printer
then press [ ].
Note Chapter 5
MAIN MENU Using the Printer in a
z The “l” of the “-l” entry is an alphabetic lower case “l” Set Interface ↓
Network Environ-
(el).
3
ment
z The subnet mask and gateway address are set to Press [ ] or [ ] to select TCP/IP, then Chapter 6
“0.0.0.0”.
press [ ]. Troubleshooting
After completing the above settings, use the Remote
UI or the printer operation panel to perform the subnet Interface Set
mask and gateway address settings for your network. TCP/IP ↓
Chapter 7
4
(→ P.5-12, P.5-15) Operation of the
Press [ ] or [ ] to select IP Setting, then Function Menus
This completes the preparation for printer protocol set- press [ ].
tings.
TCP/IP
IP Setting ↓
Contents
5- 12 Index
TOP
5 Press [ ] or [ ] to select IP Address, then 9 Press [ ] once then press [ ] or [ ] to
press [ ]. select Subnet Mask then press [ ]. Chapter 1
Basic Procedures
IP Setting IP Setting
IP Address ↓ Subnet Mask ↓
6 Press [ ] or [ ] to change the number 10 Press [ ] or [ ] to change the number

Chapter 2
Using a Variety of
setting of the IP address, then press the OK setting of the subnet mask, then press OK Media
button. button.
Chapter 3
IP Address Subnet Mask Printing Methods for
=0.0.0.0 =0.0.0.0 Different Objectives
7 To enter the IP address allocated for the 11 Press [ ] or [ ] to set the number of the Chapter 4
printer, press [ ] or [ ] to change the subnet mask in use on the network, then Maintaining the
Printer
number, then press [ ] or the OK button. press OK button.
The selected digit increments by 1 every time you The selected digit increments by 1 every time you Chapter 5
press [ ]. However, at 255 the number rolls up to 0. press [ ]. However, at 255 the number rolls up to 0. Using the Printer in a
The selected digit decrements by 1 every time you Network Environ-
The selected digit decrements by 1 every time you ment
press [ ]. However, at 0 the number rolls up to 255. press [ ]. However, at 0 the number rolls up to 255.
Chapter 6
IP Address
Subnet Mask Troubleshooting
=XXX.0.0.0
=XXX.0.0.0
Note 12 Repeat Steps 10 to 11 to enter the subnet Chapter 7

Operation of the
z If you press and hold the [ ] or [ ] button, the value mask that the network is using. Function Menus
increases or decreases in steps of 10
Subnet Mask
8 Repeat Steps 6 to 7 to enter the IP address

=255.255.255.0
assigned to the printer. Enter the default gateway. Contents

IP Address
=XXX.XXX.XXX.XXX
5- 13 Enter the subnet mask. Index

TOP
13 Press [ ] once then press [ ] or [ ] to 18 Press the OK button.
select Default G/W then press [ ]. If you want to cancel the setting, press Stop button Chapter 1
for at least 1 second. Basic Procedures
IP Setting
Default G/W ↓
Store Setting
14
OK?
Chapter 2
Press [ ] or [ ] to change the number Using a Variety of
setting of the default subnet mask, then The printer restarts after Storing appears on the Media
display.
press OK button.
When you are finished with the settings, the printer Chapter 3
Default G/W returns Online. Printing Methods for
=0.0.0.0 Different Objectives
If an error occurs, check the settings then set them
15 To enter the default gateway IP address,
again.
Chapter 4
press [ ] or [ ] to select the number to Maintaining the
Important Printer
change, then press OK button. z If you need to change the IP address, subnet mask, or
The selected digit increments by 1 every time you default gateway, you must perform Step 18 to register Chapter 5
press [ ]. However, at 255 the number rolls up to 0. the setting. If the setting is not registered, the entered Using the Printer in a
The selected digit decrements by 1 every time you value will not be enabled. Network Environ-
ment
press [ ]. However, at 0 the number rolls up to 255.
Chapter 6
Default G/W Troubleshooting
=XXX.0.0.0
16 Repeat Steps 14 to 15 to enter the default Chapter 7

gateway IP address. Operation of the
Function Menus
Now you are ready to register the IP address, subnet
mask, and default gateway setting.
17 Press the [ ] button 3 times.

Contents
Default G/W
=XXX.XXX.XXX.XXX
Store Setting is displayed. Index

5- 14
TOP
Performing the TCP/IP Protocol Set- Note Chapter 1

tings z When the Remote UI is running with the printer name, Basic Procedures
Remote UI, the software application built into the network make sure that the DNS settings for the DNS
interface of this printer, allows you to use a Web browser on environment and board have been set up correctly.
1
your computer to monitor the status of the printer and Chapter 2
Start the Web Browser, enter the following Using a Variety of
perform the network information settings for the printer. Media
URL for the Location or the Address, then
Setting up with a Web Browser (Remote UI) press the Enter key. Chapter 3
The procedure below describes how to use Remote UI to Printing Methods for
http://<Printer IP Address or name>/
perform the network information settings. Different Objectives
Entry Sample : http://XXX.XXX.XXX.XXX/
Important Chapter 4
z For the Web Browser, use Netscape Navigator/ Maintaining the
Communicator 6.0 or later, or use Internet Explorer Printer
5.01 or later. The Safari web browser for the Macintosh
is not compatible. Chapter 5
z The connection cannot be set up through a proxy
Network Environ-
server. If the network environment employs a proxy ment
server, in the Web Browser proxy server settings add
Chapter 6
the IP address of the printer to the Exceptions
Troubleshooting
(addresses not used by the proxy). (The settings may
differ depending on the environment.)
z In the Web Browser perform the settings so JavaScript Chapter 7
and cookies can be used. Operation of the
z If more than one remote UI is being used, then the Function Menus
most recent settings remain enabled. Starting and
using only one Remote UI at a time is recommended.
Starting and using only one Remote UI at a time is
recommended. Contents
5- 15 Index
TOP
2 Click and select Administrator Mode then 3 Select Network in the Device Manager
click the Logon button. menu on the left. Chapter 1
Basic Procedures
English is set as the default display language for the
Remote UI mode. Select Administrator Mode, then
click the Logon button.
Chapter 2
Using a Variety of
Media
Chapter 3
Chapter 4
Maintaining the
Printer
The Network page appears.
4
Chapter 5
Click the Edit... button to the right of TCP/IP Using the Printer in a
Network Environ-
The Remote UI starts. protocol. ment
Chapter 6
z If a password has been set for the printer, enter the
password and then click the Logon button. If no
password has been set, then no password entry is Chapter 7
required. Operation of the
Function Menus
The Edit TCP/IP Protocol Settings page opens.

Contents
5- 16 Index
TOP
5 Perform the settings for each item.
Note Chapter 1
z With DHCP, BOOTP, or RARP used to set the IP Basic Procedures
address setting when the printer starts up, or when it is
reset, a query determines whether DHCP, BOOTP, or
RARP can be used, then the first setting method that Chapter 2
can be recognized and used to assign the IP address. Using a Variety of
If the check box for Use DHCP, Use BOOTP, or Use Media
RARP is clicked off, the check is not performed with
that function. Chapter 3
If any of the items cannot be used, then the setting for Printing Methods for
IP Address is assigned as the IP address.
z The check to determine whether DHCP, BOOTP, or
Chapter 4
RARP can be used requires about 1 or 2 minutes to
Maintaining the
execute. Clicking off the check boxes for a method that Printer
cannot be used is recommended.
z When DHCP, BOOTP, or RARP is used to assign the
If the IP address is to be acquired automatically, Chapter 5
IP address, the server in the network that uses this Using the Printer in a
click on the check box for the method to be used:
protocol must be running. Network Environ-
Use DHCP, Use BOOTP, or Use RARP. Remove all ment
z If you are using a DNS server, click the Enable DNS
three of the checkmarks if you specify the IP
address. Dynamic Update check box on, and then enter the Chapter 6
Primary DNS Server Address, Secondary DNS Troubleshooting
Server Address, DNS Host Name, and DNS Domain
Name.
z Enter the text or hyphen (-) for the name of the host in Chapter 7
the DNS Host Name box (Limit: 63 characters). Operation of the
Function Menus
However, you cannot enter a number or hyphen at the
beginning of the name or enter a hyphen at the end of
the name.
z Enter characters, hyphens, or periods for the DNS
Domain Name (Limit: 64 characters). However, you Contents
cannot enter a number, hyphen, or period at the
beginning of the name or enter a hyphen or period at
the end of the name.
5- 17 Index
TOP
6 Click the OK button.
Setting the Printer for Sharing
7
Chapter 1
When you return to Network under Device Performing the print server settings in the following procedure Basic Procedures
Manager, press the Reset button. for a network set up with Windows Server 2003, Windows XP,
Windows 2000, or Windows NT 4.0, greatly improves the
efficiency of managing the network printer. After you set up the Chapter 2
print server, print jobs are managed by the print server. Also, if Using a Variety of
you install alternate drivers for the print server beforehand, Media
each computer can install the printer driver via the network.
Chapter 3
z The printer share settings should be performed by the
network system administrator. These settings cannot
Chapter 4
be done on a Windows 98 server. Maintaining the
1
Printer
Open the Sharing sheet of the Printer
Properties dialog box. Chapter 5
Click the Start button then select Settings > Network Environ-
Printers. ment
The printer network interface restarts and enables
Click the icon of the printer to use, then from the Chapter 6
the settings. Troubleshooting
File menu select Sharing.
Chapter 7
Operation of the
Function Menus
Contents
5- 18 Index
TOP
2 Perform the settings for printer sharing. To install the printer driver on other computers, when you
select Network Printer on the Printer Wizard screen for the
Select Shared as then enter the desired name Chapter 1
selection of the destination for the printer connection, be Basic Procedures
of the printer for sharing.
sure to select the printer set up for sharing by the print
Click the Additional Drivers... button (click the server.
Alternate Drivers button in Windows NT 4.0) Chapter 2
and select the printer driver to install. Note Using a Variety of
Media
Press the OK button. A screen appears so you z If the printer is shared where IIS is installed on
can select the location of the printer driver files Windows Server 2003, Windows XP, or Windows
when you install additional (alternative) drivers, 2000, install DSE (Device Status Extension) stored Chapter 3
so mount the User Software CD-ROM provided on the provided User Software CD-ROM so you can Different Objectives
for this printer in the CD-ROM drive and select use the Web Browser on the client computer to
the folder. manage information displays and print jobs. For more
Chapter 4
details about how to install DSE, refer to the Maintaining the
Readme.txt in the DSE file located in the DSE folder Printer
on the User Software CD-ROM.
Chapter 5
Network Environ-
ment
Chapter 6
Troubleshooting
Chapter 7
Operation of the
Function Menus
Important
z If you are using Windows NT 4.0 you will need Service
Pack 6 or later for Windows NT installed on the Contents
computer in order to use the alternate drivers function.
This completes the settings for printer sharing.

5- 19 Index
Macintosh Network Settings
TOP
Macintosh Network Settings Chapter 1

Basic Procedures
This section describes how to connect to a network using
4 Setting AppleTalk Protocol → P.5-25
AppleTalk, IP Print, Canon IP (GARO) and Zeroconf and
how to perform the settings so the printer can be used. Enable the AppleTalk protocol to connect the printer
via AppleTalk. Set the IP address on the printer Chapter 2
Using a Variety of
operation panel then use the Web browser to set the Media
protocol for the printer name and zone settings and IP
Procedures Required for a Macintosh Print or Canon IP (GARO) connection.
Network • Web Browser (Remote UI) Chapter 3
• Printer operation panel Different Objectives
Here is a summary of the procedures required to set the
printer for use on a Macintosh network. 5 Install the Printer Driver → P.5-31
The following procedure should be performed by the Follow the procedure in the Quick Start Guide to Chapter 4
Maintaining the
network system administrator. install Canon imagePROGRAF printer driver on the
Printer
Macintosh.
→ Quick Start
1 Installing the network interface board Chapter 5
Guide Note Using the Printer in a
First, install the optional network interface board. z Here we will describe as an example connection to a Network Environ-
Macintosh computer with its built-in, standard Ethernet ment
2 Connecting the LAN Cable → P.5-5 port. If you are installing a expansion network interface Chapter 6
Connect the LAN port to the HUB with the LAN cable. board or a wireless LAN, be sure to select the name of Troubleshooting
that port.
3 Setting a Macintosh → P.5-21 z If you are using Mac OS 8.6/9x, you can use the
• Confirm the network settings for the Macintosh. printer on an IP Print network. IP Print uses the TCP/ Chapter 7
IP protocol. If the TCP/IP settings are enabled with IP Operation of the
Function Menus
Print (Auto) then the printer can be used by simply
connecting it to the LAN. If the printer is connected
with an IP Printer, first register the IP Address
(Chooser > Registering IP Address) then select the
IP Printer and the printer name. Contents
5- 20 Index
TOP
z If you are using Mac OS Ver. 10.1 or later, you can use
the printer on a Canon IP (GARO) network. Canon IP Setting a Macintosh
Chapter 1
(GARO) uses the TCP/IP protocol. The printer can be
used as soon as the TCP/IP settings are enabled
Setting the AppleTalk Network Functions Basic Procedures
between the Macintosh computer and the printer and z For Mac OS 8.6/9.x
the printer IP address has been defined. Chapter 2
Use Chooser and the AppleTalk item of Control Panel
z If you are using Mac OS X Ver. 10.2.5 or later, you can Using a Variety of
to confirm the Macintosh network settings. Media
use the Zeroconf function to connect. Zeroconf uses
the TCP/IP protocol. As soon the TCP/IP settings are
enabled for the Macintosh computer, the printer can be 1 Confirm that AppleTalk can be used. Chapter 3
used by simply connecting it to the LAN. Zeroconf (the From the Apple menu select Chooser. Printing Methods for
abbreviation for Zero Configuration) is network
Confirm that Active is selected for AppleTalk.
technology that requires neither an IP address nor a
If Inactive is selected, select Active. Chapter 4
DNS service name.
Maintaining the
Printer
Chapter 5
Network Environ-
ment
Chapter 6
Troubleshooting
Chapter 7
Operation of the
Function Menus
Contents
5- 21 Index
TOP
2 Confirm that Ethernet is selected for the z For Mac OS X
AppleTalk connection. Confirm the AppleTalk settings with Network of System Chapter 1
Preferences. Basic Procedures
Start AppleTalk on Control Panel.
Select Ethernet.
1 Open Network under System Preferences.
Chapter 2
2 At the Show setting select Built-in Ethernet.

Using a Variety of
Media
3 Select the AppleTalk sheet and confirm that Chapter 3

Make AppleTalk Active is selected. Different Objectives
Close AppleTalk to save the setting.
If this item is not checked, select it and then click the
This completes the AppleTalk network settings for a Apply Now button. Chapter 4
Macintosh. Maintaining the
Printer
Important
Chapter 5
z Be sure to select the Printer Port if Ethernet is Using the Printer in a
connected via LocalTalk. Network Environ-
ment
Chapter 6
Troubleshooting
Chapter 7
Operation of the
Function Menus
4 Close Network to save the settings.

Contents
This completes the AppleTalk network settings for a
Macintosh.
5- 22 Index
TOP
TCP/IP Network Function Settings 1 Confirm that TCP/IP is selected for the
Confirm the operating system TCP/IP function settings Ethernet connection. Chapter 1
when using the Remote UI and IP Print connection, Basic Procedures
Start TCP/IP on Control Panel.
Canon IP (GARO) connection, or Zeroconf function con-
nection. For the Connect via select Ethernet.
Chapter 2
z For Mac OS 8.6/9.x Using a Variety of
Media
Use Chooser and the TCP/IP on the Control Panel con-
firm the TCP/IP network settings.
Chapter 3
z If a fixed IP address has already been allocated to
your Macintosh computer, please use that assigned Chapter 4
setting. No setting is required. For more details about Maintaining the
network settings, please contact your network system Printer
administrator. Set Using DHCP Server for Configur.
z If the computer is connected to the printer with IP Print Close TCP/IP to save the setting. Chapter 5
(Auto), then the computer and the printer must be Using the Printer in a
connected to the same network as the router. The Network Environ-
This completes the TCP/IP network settings for a Macin- ment
computer cannot be connected through a router to a tosh.
printer on another network.For more details about Chapter 6
network settings, please contact your network system Troubleshooting
administrator.
z If the DHCP server cannot be recognized when Using
Chapter 7
DHCP Server is selected, then 169.254.xxx.xxx is set
Operation of the
as the Link Local Address. Function Menus
Contents
5- 23 Index
TOP
z For Mac OS X 3 Select the TCP/IP panel and confirm the
Confirm the TCP/IP settings at Network under System enabled IP address, subnet mask, and router Chapter 1
Preferences. settings. Basic Procedures
Important
z If the computer is connected to the printer with Chapter 2
Using a Variety of
Zeroconf, then the computer and the printer must be Media
connected to the same network as the router. The
computer cannot be connected with the Zeroconf
Chapter 3
function through the router to a printer on another Printing Methods for
network. For more details about network settings, Different Objectives
please contact your network system administrator.
z If the DHCP server cannot be recognized when Using Chapter 4
DHCP is selected, then 169.254.xxx.xxx is set as the Maintaining the
Link Local Address. Printer
1 Open Network under System Preferences. Chapter 5

2
Network Environ-
At the Show setting select Built-in Ethernet. ment
4 Close Network to save the settings.

Chapter 6
Troubleshooting
This completes the TCP/IP network settings for a Macin-

tosh. Chapter 7
Operation of the
Function Menus
Contents
5- 24 Index
TOP
Setting AppleTalk Protocol Setting the Protocol with Web Browser

(Remote UI) Chapter 1
The AppleTalk protocol of this printer is set to disable before Basic Procedures
the printer is shipped. Enable the AppleTalk protocol to
connect the printer via AppleTalk. The printer protocol Important
settings can be set with either a Web browser (Remote UI) z For the Web Browser, use Netscape Navigator/
Chapter 2
Communicator 6.0 or later, or use Internet Explorer Using a Variety of
or the printer operation panel. This setting is not required if
5.01 or later. The Safari web browser for the Macintosh Media
connected with IP Print, Canon IP (GARO), or Zeroconf.
is not compatible.
z Remote UI (→ P.5-25) z The connection cannot be set up through a proxy
Chapter 3
server. If the network environment employs a proxy Printing Methods for
On a Macintosh computer where the TCP/IP setting is server, in the Web Browser proxy server settings add Different Objectives
completed, you can use a Web browser to perform the the IP address of the printer to the Exceptions
AppleTalk settings. To perform the settings, first enter the (addresses not used by the proxy). (The settings may
IP address with the printer operation panel, then use the Chapter 4
differ depending on the environment.)
Maintaining the
Web browser to set the protocol. (→ P.5-25) z In the Web Browser perform the settings so JavaScript Printer
and cookies can be used.
z Printer operation panel (→ P.5-30) z If more than one remote UI is being used, then the
You can perform the AppleTalk settings on the printer most recent settings remain enabled. Starting and Chapter 5
operation panel. using only one Remote UI at a time is recommended. Network Environ-
ment
Important Note Chapter 6
z Before AppleTalk settings, confirm that the printer is z When the Remote UI is running with the printer name, Troubleshooting
switched on and connected to the network. make sure that the DNS settings for the DNS
environment and board have been set up correctly.
z Follow the procedure below to start Remote UI on a Chapter 7
system using Mac OS X Ver. 10.2.5 or later and the Operation of the
Zeroconf function to connect the printer. Function Menus
1. Open the Printer Setup Utility (Print Center).
2. Select the name of this printer from the print list
and click the Set button.
Contents
5- 25 Index
TOP
1 Start the Web Browser, enter the following
URL for the Location or the Address, then Note Chapter 1
press the Enter key. z If a password has been set for the printer, enter the Basic Procedures
password and then click the Logon button. If no
http://<Printer IP Address or name>/ password has been set, then no password entry is
Entry Sample : http://XXX.XXX.XXX.XXX/ required. Chapter 2
2
Using a Variety of
Select Administrator Mode then click the 3 Select Network in the Device Manager
Media
Logon button. menu on the left.

Chapter 3
English is set as the default display language for the Printing Methods for
Remote UI mode. Select Administrator Mode, then Different Objectives
Chapter 4
Maintaining the
Printer
Chapter 5
Network Environ-
ment
Chapter 6
Troubleshooting
Chapter 7
The Network page appears. Operation of the
Function Menus
The Remote UI starts.
Contents
5- 26 Index
TOP
4 To perform the AppleTalk protocol settings, 5 For Phase Type, select Phase 2.
click the Edit... button to the right of Chapter 1
AppleTalk. Basic Procedures
Chapter 2
Using a Variety of
Media
Chapter 3
Chapter 4
z If Disabled is selected, the printer will not be Printer
The Edit AppleTalk Protocol Settings page is
displayed. recognized on the AppleTalk network.
Chapter 5
If connected with the IP Print (Auto) (Mac OS 8.6/
9x) function or Zeroconf Mac OS X function, go to 6 For Name enter the name of the printer on
Network Environ-
the Step 9. the network. ment
Enter the printer name displayed in Chooser (Mac Chapter 6

OS 8.6/9.x) or the name displayed in Setup Utility Troubleshooting
(Print Center) (Mac OS X).
Chapter 7
Important Operation of the
z If more than one printer is in the same zone, be sure to Function Menus
assign a unique name for each printer.
Note
z The initial (default) network interface name is Canon Contents
NB 15FB (xxxxxx). Where xxxxxx is the 6-digit MAC
address of the printer.
5- 27 Index
TOP
z To change Name, enter a 15-character name. 9 If you are using the Zeroconf function for the
However, these symbols and characters are not printer connection, click the Edit... button to Chapter 1
permitted: @ * : = the right of TCP/IP. Basic Procedures
7 When a zone is set on the network, enter the

name of zone where the printer belongs. Chapter 2
Using a Variety of
If no zone is set, then leave the asterisk (*) entry as Media
it is.
Chapter 3
z The zone name must be the name of a zone that is Different Objectives
already entered. If you enter the name of a zone that is
not yet set, the recognition of the printer by the The Edit TCP/IP Protocol Setting page opens. Chapter 4
Macintosh will be lost. For more details about zone Maintaining the
Printer
names, please contact your network system
administrator.
Chapter 5

Network Environ-
ment
If you are using AppleTalk only, go to Step 13.
Chapter 6
Troubleshooting
Chapter 7
Operation of the
Function Menus
Contents
5- 28 Index
TOP
10 Click the Use Zeroconf Function check box 12 Click the OK button.
on.
13
Chapter 1
When you return to the Network screen of Basic Procedures
Device Manager, click the Reset button.
Chapter 2
Using a Variety of
Media
Chapter 3
Chapter 4
Maintaining the
Printer
The printer network interface restarts and enables
the settings. Chapter 5
Network Environ-
This completes the protocol settings for the printer.
ment
Chapter 6
Troubleshooting
11 Enter the name of the printer on the network

Chapter 7
into the Multicast DNS Service Name box. Operation of the
Function Menus
Enter the printer name displayed in Chooser (Mac
OS 8.6/9.x) or the name displayed in Print Setup
Utility (Print Center) (Mac OS X).
Note Contents
z You can change the Multicast DNS Service name with
up to 63 characters (including hyphens, spaces).
5- 29 Index
TOP
Setting with the Printer Operation Panel 6 Press the OK button.
You can use the printer operation panel to select Apple- If you want to cancel the setting, press Stop button Chapter 1
Talk protocol. for at least 1 second. Basic Procedures

Store Setting
OK?
Chapter 2
MENU. Using a Variety of
The printer restarts after Storing appears on the Media
MAIN MENU
display.
Head Cleaning
Cleaning
(3 sec.)
Stop/Eject
When completed, the printer returns to the Online or Chapter 3
Offline mode.
(1 sec.) Online
2 Press [ ] or [ ] to select Interface Setup

Chapter 4
Maintaining the
then press [ ]. Printer
MAIN MENU
Interface Setup ↓
Chapter 5
3
Network Environ-
Use [ ] or [ ] to select AppleTalk then ment
press [ ]. Chapter 6
Troubleshooting
Interface Set
AppleTalk ↓
4 Press [ ] or [ ] to select On, then press

Chapter 7
Operation of the
Function Menus
OK button.
AppleTalk
On
Contents
5 Press the [ ] button.
Interface Setup
AppleTalk ↓
5- 30 Index
TOP
Install the Printer Driver 1 Make sure that the printer is on.
2
Chapter 1
After completing the printer protocol settings, install the After the Macintosh has restarted, open Basic Procedures
printer driver on every Macintosh that will be used for Finder and select Utilities or Applications
printing and perform the print destination settings.
from the Go menu.
Chapter 2
Installing the Printer Driver Using a Variety of
In order for the printer to operate, a printer driver compat- Media
ible with the printer must be installed. Install the Printer
Driver (→ Quick Start Guide) Chapter 3
Selecting a Printer Different Objectives
z For Mac OS 8.6/9.x

Selecting the printer with the Chooser completes the
3 Open the Utilities folder then open Printer Chapter 4
Maintaining the
Setup Utility (Print Center). Printer
settings. The Destination can select AppleTalk, IP
Print, or IP Print (Auto). (→ Quick Start Guide)
Chapter 5
z For Mac OS X Using the Printer in a
Network Environ-
For Mac OS X, open the printer setup utility (Print Cen-
ment
ter), and then add the name of the printer under Add
Printer. For the Destination select AppleTalk, Canon Chapter 6
IP (GARO) or Zeroconf.
4 If the name of the printer is not in the Printer
Troubleshooting
List, click the Add icon.

Chapter 7
Operation of the
Function Menus
Contents
5- 31 Index
TOP
5 From the connection destination menu,
select AppleTalk, Canon IP (GARO), or Chapter 1
Zeroconf for the network connection, click Basic Procedures
the name of the printer in the displayed list,
then click the Add button.
Chapter 2
Using a Variety of
Media
Chapter 3
Chapter 4
Maintaining the
This completes the selection of the printer. Printer
Chapter 5
Network Environ-
ment
Chapter 6
Troubleshooting
Chapter 7
Operation of the
Function Menus
Contents
5- 32 Index
NetWare Settings (Windows)
TOP
NetWare Settings (Windows) Chapter 1

Basic Procedures
The chapter describes the setting methods and procedures
4 Setting Up a NetWare Print Service → P.5-37
for connecting the printer to a NetWare network.
Perform the NetWare printer service settings. Use
one of the utilities below to perform the settings on Chapter 2
Using a Variety of
the computer.
Procedures Required for a NetWare • NWADMIN or PCONSOLE (Novell software
Media
Network application provided with NetWare)

Chapter 3
Here is a summary of the procedures required to set the 5 Setting NetWare Protocol → P.5-40 Printing Methods for
printer for use on a NetWare network. Different Objectives
Perform the printer protocol settings. You can use a
The following procedure should be performed by the Web Browser from a computer on the network to
network system administrator. perform the network settings. Chapter 4
Maintaining the
• Web Browser (Remote UI)
Printer
Installing the Network Interface → Quick Start 6 Setting the Computer for NetWare → P.5-44
1
Board Guide
Perform these settings on every computer to be used Chapter 5
First, install the optional network interface board. with the printer. Using the Printer in a
Network Environ-
2 Connecting the LAN Cable → P.5-5 ment
Connect the LAN port to the HUB with the LAN cable. Chapter 6
Troubleshooting
3 Setting the Printer Frame Type → P.5-34
Perform the printer frame type setting. Use the
software below to setup communication between your Chapter 7
computer and the printer. Operation of the
Function Menus
• GARO Device Setup Utility (Canon utility pro-
vided with the printer)
• Printer Operation Panel
Contents
5- 33 Index
TOP
Setting the Printer Frame Type Setting the frame type with GARO Device
Setup Utility Chapter 1
Before setting the printer protocol, you must set the frame Basic Procedures
If you are using Windows, use the GARO Device Setup
type to enable communication between the printer and the
Utility, the software utility provided with the printer, to
computer. Use the utility below to perform this setting.
perform the printer network settings.
Chapter 2
z GARO Device Setup Utility (→ P.5-34)
z Printer operation panel (→ P.5-35)
1 On the desktop, click the Start button, point
Using a Variety of
Media
to Programs, then select GARO Device
Setup Utility > GARO Device Setup Utility. Chapter 3
z In order to use GARO Device Setup Utility, it must be Different Objectives
installed on your computer. Install GARO Device Setup
Utility on your computer. (→ P.5-34) Chapter 4
z Before setting the printer frame type, confirm that the Maintaining the
Printer
printer is switched on and connected to the network.
Chapter 5
Network Environ-
ment
2 Select from the list the name of the printer Chapter 6

Troubleshooting
you want to set, then select Protocol
Settings from the Printer menu.
Chapter 7
Operation of the
Function Menus
Contents
5- 34 Index
TOP
3 Select the type of frame you are using for 5 When you are finished performing the
NetWare Frame Type, select ETHERNET II settings, select Exit from the Printer menu. Chapter 1
for TCP/IP Frame Type, enter the assigned Basic Procedures
settings for IP Address, Subnet Mask and
Gateway Address, then click the Set button.
Chapter 2
Using a Variety of
Media
Setting with the Printer Operation Panel Chapter 3

The NetWare network information can be set on the Printing Methods for
printer operation panel.

Chapter 4
Maintaining the
MENU. Printer
MAIN MENU
Head Cleaning Chapter 5
Cleaning
(3 sec.) Using the Printer in a
Stop/Eject
(1 sec.) Online Network Environ-
Note ment
z The IP address setting is required here to allow the Chapter 6
printer protocol setting to be performed with the Web
browser (Remote UI). 2 Press [ ] or [ ] to select Interface Setup
Troubleshooting
then press [ ].
4 Click the OK button when the confirmation MAIN MENU
Chapter 7
Operation of the
message is displayed. Interface Setup ↓ Function Menus
3 Press [ ] or [ ] to select NetWare, then

press [ ].
Contents
Interface Setup
NetWare ↓
5- 35 Index
TOP
4 Press [ ] or [ ] to select Netware, then 8 Press [ ] or [ ] to select Print Service,
press [ ]. then press [ ]. Chapter 1
Basic Procedures
NetWare NetWare
NetWare ↓ Print Service ↓
5 Press [ ] or [ ] to select On, then press 9 Press [ ] or [ ] to select the print service
Chapter 2
Using a Variety of
OK button. then press [ ]. Media
NetWare
The available selections for Print Service are
Chapter 3
On BindaryPserver, RPrinter, NDSPserver, and
NPrinter. Different Objectives
After the equals mark (=) appears on the left, the
display returns to the NetWare menu. Print Service
RPrinter Chapter 4
6 Press [ ] or [ ] to select Frame Type, After the equals mark (=) appears on the left, the
Maintaining the
Printer
then press [ ]. display returns to the NetWare menu.
10
Chapter 5
NetWare
Frame Type ↓
Press the [ ] button twice. Using the Printer in a
Network Environ-
7
NetWare
ment
Press [ ] or [ ] to select the setting for the Print Service ↓
Chapter 6
11
frame type to use then press OK button. Troubleshooting
Press the OK button.
The available frame type selections are Auto
Detect, Ethernet 2, Ethernet 802.2, Ethernet 802.3 If you want to cancel the setting, press Stop button
Chapter 7
and Ethernet SNAP. for at least 1 second. Operation of the
Function Menus
Frame Type Store Setting
Ethernet 802.3 OK?
After the equals mark (=) appears on the left, the The printer restarts after Storing appears on the
display returns to the NetWare menu. display. Contents
When completed, the printer returns to the Online or
Offline mode.
5- 36 Index
TOP
z NDS (Novell Directory Service) and Bindery
Setting Up a NetWare Print Service Either NDS or Bindery is supported. Select the mode Chapter 1
A print service for the print server, queue, and so on, must that is best suited for your network environment. Basic Procedures
be set up before you can use a NetWare network to print. z Queue Server Mode and Remote Printer Mode
Use one of the following software applications to perform Both Queue Server Mode and Remote Printer Mode
the print service settings from your computer. Use are supported. Chapter 2
whichever is easiest to perform the settings. z Queue Server Mode Using a Variety of
When Queue Server Mode is used, all of the print Media
z NWADMIN or PCONSOLE (Novell software server functions are provided so no other hardware for
applications provided with NetWare) the print service is required. The printer and computer Chapter 3
use the NDS print server in the NDS Queue Mode Printing Methods for
(NDS PServer). The printer and computer use the Different Objectives
Important
Bindery print server in the Bindery Queue Mode (Bind-
z If you perform the print service settings with
ery PServer). Chapter 4
NWADMIN, Novell Client (the Novell NetWare client) Maintaining the
Also, a NetWare user license is required for each net-
must be installed as the client software application. Printer
work interface used in the Queue Server Mode.
z The procedure described here is for the NetWare print z Remote Printer Mode
service settings. The procedure may be different in the Chapter 5
If you use the Remote Printer Mode, the NetWare print
environment that you are using. Using the Printer in a
server exercises control. For this reason, the NetWare
Network Environ-
Types of Print Services print service is required. Use the NDS print server in ment
NDS Remote Printer Mode (NPrinter) to print, and use
Before performing the print service settings, be sure to the Bindery print server in the Bindery Print Mode Chapter 6
read the description below then select the printer service (RPrinter) to print. Troubleshooting
type.
Note Chapter 7
Operation of the
z You can use NDPS as the print service with NetWare Function Menus
5.1/6.0. When you use NDPS, use the Novell printer
gateway provided by NetWare as the gateway. The
setup procedure for NDPS is not described in this
guide, so for more details refer to the NetWare
instructions.
Contents
5- 37 Index
TOP
Setting Up the Print Server With
NWADMIN, PCONSOLE Note Chapter 1
z You are going to need the name of the print server to Basic Procedures
z If You Are Using NDS Queue Server Mode or perform the printer protocol settings so be sure to note
Remote Printer Mode the printer name.
z When you perform the Quick Setup, “0” is assigned to Chapter 2
1 Log into NetWare as the System
the printer as its number. If you intend to use the
Queue Server Mode, do not change the printer
Using a Variety of
Media
Administrator, or as a user with equivalent number.
access rights, then start NWADMIN. Chapter 3
2 Execute the Quick Setup.

3 Set the password.
Select the print server created in Step 2, then
Select Print Services Quick Setup from the right-click Details. Chapter 4
Tools menu. Maintaining the
Click the Change Password button to open the Printer
Enter a Print Server Name of your choice. If you password entry screen, then enter the desired
want to use an existing server, click the button to password. Chapter 5
the right of the name to select it from the list. Using the Printer in a
Click the OK button to close the password entry
For the printer Name enter the desired name. Network Environ-
screen. ment
If you intend to use Queue Server Mode, select Click the OK or Cancel button to close the Chapter 6
Other/Unknown for the Type. If you intend to use Details screen. Troubleshooting
the Remote Printer Mode, select Parallel for
Type, click the Communicate button then select
LPT1 for Port and Manual Load for Connection
4 Follow the procedure below to start the print
server when you use the Remote Printer Chapter 7
Type. Operation of the
Mode. Function Menus
For the print queue Name enter the desired name.
To use the NetWare file server as the print
For Volume enter the volume object to create the server, on the file server enter LOAD
queue (the object that appears as the physical PSERVER.NLM then press the Enter key.
volume on the network). Click the button on the Contents
right to select from the list.
Perform any other settings that are required, then
click the OK button.
5- 38 Index
TOP
4 Set the printer type.
Note Chapter 1
If you intend to use Queue Server Mode, select
z The step to use the NetWare file server as the print Other/Unknown for the Type. If you intend to Basic Procedures
server, is not required if you intend to use the Queue use the Remote Printer Mode, under Printer
Server Mode. Type select Parallel then set Manual Load for
This completes the NetWare print service settings. Next, the Location. Chapter 2
perform the printer protocol settings. (→ P.5-40) Using a Variety of
Press the ESC key. Media
z If You Are Using the Bindery Queue Server When the confirmation message appears, click
Mode or Remote Printer Mode Yes then press the Enter key. Chapter 3
1 Log into NetWare as the Supervisor, then 5 Set the password.

start PCONSOLE. From Available Options select Print Servers, Chapter 4

Maintaining the
2
then press the Enter key.
Printer
Switch to the Bindery Mode.
Select the print server created in Step 2, then
3 If the print server has not been created,

press the Enter key.
Select Password, then press the Enter key.
Chapter 5
perform the following procedure to create the Network Environ-
When the password entry screen opens, enter ment
print server. the desired password, then press the Enter
Chapter 6
From Available Options select Quick Setup key. Troubleshooting
6
then press the Enter key.
Enter the name of the print server to create, the Press ESC several times to display the
name of the new printer, and name of the confirmation to close PCONSOLE, then click Chapter 7
queue. Yes to close PCONSOLE. Operation of the
Function Menus
Note This completes the NetWare print service settings. Next,

z You are going to need the name of the print server to perform the printer protocol settings. (→ P.5-40)
perform the printer protocol settings so be sure to note
the printer name.
Contents
5- 39 Index
TOP
Setting NetWare Protocol 1 Start the Web Browser, enter the following
URL for the Location or the Address, then Chapter 1
The printer protocol settings can be set with a Web browser press the Enter key. Basic Procedures
(Remote UI) from your computer. Set the IP address before
you perform these settings. (→ P.5-7) http://<Printer IP Address or name>/
Entry Sample : http://XXX.XXX.XXX.XXX/ Chapter 2
Setting the Protocol with Web Browser
2
Using a Variety of
(Remote UI) Click and select Administrator Mode then Media
click the OK button.

Important Chapter 3
English is set as the default display language for the Printing Methods for
z For the Web Browser, use Netscape Navigator/ Remote UI mode. Select Administrator Mode, then Different Objectives
Communicator 6.0 or later, or use Internet Explorer 5.01 click the Logon button.
or later.
Chapter 4
z The connection cannot be set up through a proxy server. Maintaining the
If the network environment employs a proxy server, in the Printer
Web Browser proxy server settings add the IP address of
the printer to the Exceptions (addresses not used by the
Chapter 5
proxy). (The settings may differ, depending on the
network environment.) Network Environ-
z In the Web Browser perform the settings so JavaScript ment
and cookies can be used.
z If more than one remote UI is being used, then the most Chapter 6
Troubleshooting
recently used settings remain enabled. Starting and using
only one Remote UI at a time is recommended.
Chapter 7
z When the Remote UI is running with the printer name, The Remote UI starts. Function Menus
make sure that the DNS settings for the DNS
environment and board have been set up correctly. Note
z When print history is displayed with RPrinter/NPrinter
with the Remote UI running, the Document Name and
User information cannot be acquired. For this reason
password and then click the Logon button. If no Contents
the Document Name is set to Unknown the User is password has been set, then no password entry is
set to RPRINTER/NPRINTER (only these settings are required.
displayed).
5- 40 Index
TOP
3 Select Network in the Device Manager 5 Check the Frame Type box and make sure
menu on the left. the setting is correct for your NetWare Chapter 1
network. Basic Procedures
Chapter 2
Using a Variety of
Media
Chapter 3
Chapter 4
Maintaining the
Printer
The Network page appears.
4 Click the Edit... button to the right of

Chapter 5
NetWare.
6 If you intend to use the burst mode, select
Network Environ-
ment
On for NCP Burst Mode. Chapter 6
Troubleshooting
Note
z The burst mode is used in the queue server mode to
transfer data rapidly at very high speed during printing. Chapter 7
Operation of the
z Normally, leave the setting on. Function Menus
Contents
The Edit IPX/SPX Protocol Settings page appears.
5- 41 Index
TOP
7 For Print Application select the service to 9 Perform the following settings as required for
use. the selected service. Chapter 1
Basic Procedures
z Bindery PServer Selected: Queue Server Mode
Note (Using a Bindery Print Server)
z Here we will show only one service selected and
enabled. More than one service cannot be enabled at Enter the file server name into File Server Chapter 2
Name. Using a Variety of
the same time. Media
For Print Server Name, enter the name of the
8 When using the packet signature settings, for print server created in “Setting Up a NetWare
Print Service” (→ P.5-37).
Chapter 3
Packet Signature be sure to select If Printing Methods for
Requested by Server. For Print Server Password, enter the print
server password created in “Setting Up a
NetWare Print Service” (→ P.5-37). Chapter 4
Maintaining the
Set the Polling Interval. Set the time interval Printer
for the printer to confirm the NetWare print
queue. Chapter 5
z RPrinter Selected: Remote Printer Mode (using a Network Environ-
Bindery Print Server) ment
For Print Server Name, enter the advertised Chapter 6
name of the print server created in “Setting Up Troubleshooting
a NetWare Print Service” (→ P.5-37).
For Printer Number, enter the same printer
Chapter 7
number that you entered in “Setting Up a Operation of the
NetWare Print Service” (→ P.5-37). Function Menus
Contents
5- 42 Index
TOP
z NDS PServer Selected: Queue Server Mode 11 When you return to Network under Device
(Using an NDS Print Server) Manager, press the Reset button. Chapter 1
Enter the Tree Name and Context Name for Basic Procedures
the tree and context name of the print server.
Enter a context name of less than 255
characters. Chapter 2
Using a Variety of
For Print Server Name, enter the name of the Media
print server created in “Setting Up a NetWare
Print Service” (→ P.5-37). Chapter 3
For Print Server Password, enter the print
server password created in “Setting Up a
NetWare Print Service” (→ P.5-37). The printer network interface restarts and enables Chapter 4
Set the Polling Interval. Set the time interval the settings. Maintaining the
for the printer to confirm the NetWare print Printer
queue. This completes the NetWare protocol settings.
Chapter 5
z NPrinter Selected: Remote Printer Mode (using an Using the Printer in a
NDS Print Server) Network Environ-
ment
For Print Server Name, enter the advertised
name of the print server created in “Setting Up Chapter 6
a NetWare Print Service” (→ P.5-37). The Troubleshooting
advertised name and common name of the
printer is set the same.
Chapter 7
For Printer Number, enter the same printer Operation of the
number that you entered in “Setting Up a Function Menus
NetWare Print Service” (→ P.5-37).

Contents
5- 43 Index
TOP
Setting the Computer for NetWare

Chapter 1
Perform these settings for each computer after you have Basic Procedures
selected the NetWare print service and protocol.
Connecting to a NetWare Network Chapter 2

Install NetWare client software on all the computers that Using a Variety of
will be used to print, then log in to the NetWare server or Media
tree. For more details about connection methods, refer to
the NetWare or operating system instructions. Chapter 3
Installing the Printer Driver Different Objectives
The printer driver is required for printing. Install the
printer driver under the direction of the network system Chapter 4
Maintaining the
administrator.
Printer
When you install the printer driver, be sure to select Net-
work Printer and select the print queue that you created
Chapter 5
with the NetWare print service settings. Using the Printer in a
Network Environ-
Setting the Printer Port ment
Press the Start button then select Settings > Printers > Chapter 6
Printer icon > File > Properties. Display either the Troubleshooting
Details or Port sheet and specify the print queue you
created with the NetWare print service settings as the
setting for the print destination. (→ P.5-37) Chapter 7
Operation of the
Function Menus
Note
z This procedure is not required if you set the connection
destination for the printer during the installation of the
printer driver.
Contents
5- 44 Index
Printing with UNIX
TOP
Printing with UNIX Chapter 1

Basic Procedures
If a filter is to be used, select the filter.
Using LPD to Print
If there is no filter for the printer, you can temporarily Chapter 2
This section describes printing with LPD. select any filter, shut down the Printer Configuration Using a Variety of
1
Utility, and then change the postscript.cfg file in the Media
Log into the root of the work station. spool directory so it matches your printer. For more
details, please refer to the Ghostscript descriptions.
2
Chapter 3
Set up the spooling system. Printing Methods for
z Example Using Solaris 9: z The Admintool Utility is provided with the operating
Start the Admintool utility. system. For more details about how to use this utility, Chapter 4
please refer to the operating system instructions. Maintaining the
Select Browse > Printers. Printer
z The setting procedure above is an example. The
Select Edit > Add > Access to Printer. procedure may be different in the environment that you
are using. Chapter 5
Following the format restrictions, enter the Using the Printer in a
Printer Name and Print Server name. z This completes the printing settings. Network Environ-
ment
Press the OK button.
Chapter 6
z Example Using Red Hat Linux Troubleshooting
Start the Printer Configuration utility on the
control panel.
Chapter 7
Select Add > Other UNIX (lpd) queue > OK. Operation of the
Function Menus
For the Printer Name, Remote Host, Remote
Queue enter the desired print queue name,
printer IP address or name, and lp.
Contents
5- 45 Index
Printing with UNIX
TOP
Using FTP to Print

Chapter 1
1 Start at the MS-DOS prompt or command

Basic Procedures
line.
Chapter 2
If you are using UNIX, open the Console screen.
Using a Variety of
2
Media
Execute the following commands.
ftp <Printer IP Address> Chapter 3
3 Enter any user name.

Just press the Enter key without entering a Chapter 4

password. Maintaining the
Printer
You can perform the procedure below.
•To print a file: Chapter 5
put <filename to print>
Network Environ-
ment
Note
Chapter 6
z Print the file in binary mode. Troubleshooting
Chapter 7
Operation of the
Function Menus
Contents
5- 46 Index
Initializing the Settings
TOP
Initializing the Settings Chapter 1

Follow the procedure below to use the Web browser 3 From the Device Manager menu on the left,
Basic Procedures
(Remote UI) to restore all the network settings to the default select Network.
values set before shipping the printer from the factory.
4
Chapter 2
Click the Reset to Default settings button. Using a Variety of
Note Media
z In addition to using the Web browser to restore the
initial settings, you can also use GARO Device Setup
5 Confirm the message then click the OK Chapter 3
Utility or the printer operation panel to restore the button. Printing Methods for
network default settings. All the network information is restored to the factory
default settings.
1 Start the Web Browser, enter the following
Chapter 4
Maintaining the
URL for the Location or the Address, then Note Printer
press the Enter key. z When you initialize all the network settings, the printer
IP address is also restored to its factory default Chapter 5
http://<Printer IP Address or name>/ (0.0.0.0) so the Remote UI screen cannot be displayed Using the Printer in a
Entry Sample : http://XXX.XXX.XXX.XXX/ in the browser again. Use the GARO Device Setup Network Environ-
Utility or the printer operation panel when you need to ment
2 Click and select Administrator Mode then perform the network settings again. Chapter 6
Troubleshooting
English is set as the default display language for the
Remote UI mode. Select Administrator Mode, then Chapter 7
click the Logon button. Operation of the
Function Menus
The Remote UI starts.
Note
password and then click the OK button. If no password
Contents
has been set, then no password entry is required.
5- 47 Index
List of Network Settings
TOP
List of Network Settings Chapter 1

Basic Procedures
If you are using a Web Browser (Remote UI), you can TCP/IP Settings
change the settings of the network interface. The settings
that can be changed are listed in the tables below.
Initial Chapter 2
Item Content Using a Variety of
General Settings Value
Media
The setting in the IP address
Use DHCP that determines whether OFF
Initial Chapter 3
Item Content DHCP is used
Value Printing Methods for
The setting in the IP address Different Objectives
Device name
Device Name Blank Use BOOTP that determines whether OFF
(Range: 0 to 32 chars.)
BOOTP is used
Device location Chapter 4
Location Blank The setting in the IP address Maintaining the
(Range: 0 to 32 chars.) Printer
Use RARP that determines whether OFF
Device Administrator Name RARP is used
Administrator Blank
Determines whether bi- Chapter 5
Telephone number of RAW Mode Bi- Using the Printer in a
directional communication is OFF
Phone Administrator for the device Blank direction Network Environ-
used for RAW mode.
(Range: 0 to 32 chars.) ment
Determines whether DNS
Comments of the Device DNS Dynamic Chapter 6
Comment Server Registration Update OFF
Administrator Blank Update Troubleshooting
(E-mail) is Automatic.
Use Zeroconf Determines whether
Administrator Device password ON
Blank function Zeroconf function is used.
Password (Range: 0 to 15 chars.) Chapter 7
IP Address The IP address of the printer 0.0.0.0 Operation of the
Function Menus
The subnet mask of the
Subnet mask 0.0.0.0
printer.
Gateway The gateway address of the
0.0.0.0
Address printer.
Contents
Primary DNS IP Address of primary DNS
0.0.0.0
Server Address server
5- 48 Index
TOP
Initial NetWare Settings
Item Content
Value Chapter 1
Item Content Initial Value Basic Procedures
Secondary DNS Secondary DNS Server IP
0.0.0.0 The frame type used by
Server Address Address. Frame Type Disabled
NetWare.
NB-15FB Chapter 2
Printer Host Name Determines whether the NCP Using a Variety of
DNS Host Name xxxxxxxxx
(Range: 1 to 63 chars.) burst mode is used. Media
xxx NCP Burst Mode ON
(Normally, leave this setting
DNS Domain Printer Domain Name on.)
Blank Chapter 3
Name (Range: 0 to 64 chars.) The print service to use. Printing Methods for
Printer Multicast DNS Canon NDS Different Objectives
Multicast DNS Print Application (Only one print service can
Service Name W6400P PServer
Service Name be selected and enabled.)
(Range: 1 to 63 chars.) G (xxxxxx) Chapter 4
Determines whether the Maintaining the
AppleTalk Settings Packet packet sign is used If Requested Printer
Signature (normally leave set to If by Server
Initial Requested by Server)
Item Content Chapter 5
Value Bindery PServer Using the Printer in a
The name of the phase type Network Environ-
Name of the NetWare file ment
Phase Type in use (determines whether Disabled File Server server of the NetWare print
AppleTalk is used.) Blank Chapter 6
Name server. Troubleshooting
The names of the printers (Range: 0 to 47 chars.)
Canon
displayed in the Chooser and
Name NB-15FB The name of the NetWare
Printer Center lists Print Server
(xxxxxx) print server in use. Blank Chapter 7
(Name length: 1 to 31 chars.) Name
(Range: 0 to 47 chars.) Operation of the
The name of the printer zone Function Menus
Zone * The password required by
(Name length: 1 to 31 chars.) Printer Server
the print server setting. Blank
Password
(0 to 20 chars.)
The time interval between job
Polling Interval confirmations. 5 Contents
(Range: 1 to 15 sec.)
5- 49 Index
TOP
Item Content Initial Value
RPrinter Chapter 1
Basic Procedures
The name of the NetWare
Print Server
print server in use. Blank
Name
Chapter 2
The number used for the Using a Variety of
printer connection to the Media
Printer Number 0
NetWare print server.
(Range: 0 to 15)
Chapter 3
NDS PServer Printing Methods for
The name of the NDS tree of Different Objectives
Tree Name the NetWare print server. Blank
(Range: 0 to 32 chars.) Chapter 4
Maintaining the
The name of the context of
Printer
Context Name the NetWare Print server. Blank
Chapter 5
The name of the NetWare Using the Printer in a
Print Server
print server in use. Blank Network Environ-
Name
(Range: 0 to 64 chars.) ment
The password required by Chapter 6
Printer Server
the print server setting. Blank Troubleshooting
Password
(0 to 20 chars.)
The time interval between job
Polling Interval confirmations. 5 Chapter 7
(Range: 1 to 255 sec.) Operation of the
Function Menus
NPrinter
The name of the NetWare
Print Server
print server in use. Blank
Name
Contents
The number used for the
printer connection to the
Printer Number 0
NetWare print server.
(Range: 0 to 254)
5- 50 Index
Software Applications that can be used for Network Settings
TOP
Software Applications that can be used for Network Settings Chapter 1

Basic Procedures
Use the following listed software to perform the network settings.
Printer Chapter 2
GARO Device Web Browser ARP/PING Using a Variety of
Type of Setting operation
Setup Utility (Remote UI) command Media
panel
Setting IP Addresses Chapter 3
(→ P.5-7) Printing Methods for
Set TCP/IP protocol *1 *1
(→ P.5-15)
Chapter 4
Setting AppleTalk protocol *2 *2 Maintaining the
(→ P.5-25) Printer
Setting the NetWare printer
service Chapter 5
(→ P.5-37) Using the Printer in a
Network Environ-
Setting the NetWare protocol *3 *3 ment
(→ P.5-40)
Chapter 6
*1. Only these settings are allowed: IP address, subnet mask, default gateway, DHCP, Troubleshooting
BOOTP, RAPP, frame type, phase settings.
*2. Only phase settings are possible.
*3. Only frame type are possible. Chapter 7
Operation of the
Function Menus
Contents
5- 51 Index
TOP
Chapter 6 Troubleshooting
Chapter 1
Basic Procedures
Responding to Error Messages ..................................................................6-2
Operation Panel Message List .............................................................................. 6-3 Chapter 2
Media Messages ................................................................................................... 6-4 Using a Variety of
Ink Messages ...................................................................................................... 6-11 Media
Other Messages .................................................................................................. 6-14
When You Cannot Print ............................................................................6-18 Chapter 3
Printing Will Not Start .......................................................................................... 6-18 Printing Methods for
Printing Halts During Print Job ............................................................................ 6-21 Different Objectives
Cannot Print on Network ..................................................................................... 6-22
Unexpected Printing Results ....................................................................6-27 Chapter 4
Poor Quality ......................................................................................................... 6-28 Maintaining the
Abnormal Content ................................................................................................ 6-31 Printer
Other Problems ................................................................................................... 6-34
Handling Jams ..........................................................................................6-35
Removing a Roll Media Jam ................................................................................ 6-35 Chapter 5
Removing a Cut Sheet Jam ................................................................................. 6-38
Network Environ-
Updating the Firmware .............................................................................6-41 ment
Obtaining the Firmware Update ........................................................................... 6-41
Confirming the Firmware Version ........................................................................ 6-41 Chapter 6
Reinstalling the USB or IEEE1394 Driver ................................................6-42 Troubleshooting
Uninstalling Software Applications ...........................................................6-43
Deleting the Printer Driver ................................................................................... 6-43
Deleting the GARO Status Monitor ...................................................................... 6-44 Chapter 7
Deleting the GARO Device Setup Utility .............................................................. 6-44 Operation of the
Function Menus
Contents
TOP
Responding to Error Messages Chapter 1

Basic Procedures
When the printer requires attention, messages are displayed on the operation panel and in the GARO Status Monitor
(Windows) or GARO Printmonitor (Macintosh).
Chapter 2
• Operation Panel • GARO Status Monitor (Windows) Using a Variety of
Media
Information Power
Data Error! E02010
Message Media Skewed Chapter 3
Cleaning
(3 sec.) Printing Methods for
Stop/Eject Different Objectives
(1 sec.) Online
Chapter 4
Offline
Menu
Maintaining the
Read the displayed message and perform the appropri- Printer
Follow the procedures on the following pages to confirm
ate procedure.
and solve problems indicated by the messages.
Chapter 5
ment
z The printer status cannot be displayed with a USB connection to Mac OS X.
z If the GARO Status Monitor is not installed on Windows, look at the message on the printer operation panel. Chapter 6
Troubleshooting
Chapter 7
Operation of the
Function Menus
Contents
6- 2
Index
TOP
Operation Panel Message List

Chapter 1
Basic Procedures
Media Messages Ink Messages Other Messages
Close xxx Cover (xxx name of the
Load Roll Media Check Ink Level
cover) Chapter 2
Remove Roll Media Rep. Ink Tank Reset Lever Using a Variety of
Media
End of Roll No Bk/PC/C/PM/M/Y Ink Tank Check Head Hght L/M/H → L/M/H
RllMed.Shortage Chapter 3
Check Bk/PC/C/PM/M/Y Ink Tank Turn Power Off!!
Replace RllMed. Printing Methods for
Load Cut Sheet Not Enough Ink No Printhead Different Objectives
Remove Cut Sheet Ink level? Printhead Error!

Chapter 4
Eject Cut Sheet Remove Ink Tank Check Printhead Maintaining the
Incorrect Media Chk Bk Ink Type Scale Read Error Printer
Med.SizeNoMatch MTCart Full Soon Mist Full Soon

Chapter 5
No Borderless Replace MT-Cart Mist Count Error Using the Printer in a
Network Environ-
Illegal Med Pos No MT-Cartridge Adj. Failed ment
NoBordlessData Check MT-Cart. Incorrect Value Chapter 6
Size undetected ERROR nnnnnn (n = Numbers) Troubleshooting
Media Skewed
Media Too Large Chapter 7
Operation of the
Media Too Small Function Menus
Media Jam
Cut Failed
Drying..
Contents
Feed Limit..
Cut by Stop key
6- 3
Index
TOP
Media Messages Remove Roll Media

Chapter 1
Problem1: The printer is waiting for you to remove the
Basic Procedures
Load Roll Media ejected roll media.
Problem1: The printer is waiting for you to load the roll

Chapter 2
media. Using a Variety of
Media
Chapter 3
Chapter 4
Maintaining the
Solution1: Perform the procedure below to remove the roll. Printer
Solution1: Follow the procedure below set the Media Type 1. Open the upper cover.
and Media Size settings the same as those for 2. Push the release lever to the rear and
Chapter 5
the roll media. (→ P.2-26) remove the roll. Using the Printer in a
1. Load a roll with media that is the same type 3. Pull the release lever toward you to close it. Network Environ-
and size as the printer settings. 4. Raise the upper cover stopper to release the ment
2. Select the media type. lock then close the upper cover. Chapter 6
3. Select length if the media remaining detection Troubleshooting
feature for roll media is on.
4. Press the OK button.
Chapter 7
Solution2: Hold down the Stop/Eject button for at least 1 Operation of the
second to stop printing. Function Menus
Contents
6- 4
Index
TOP
End of Roll RllMed.Shortage

Replace RllMed. Chapter 1
Problem1: The roll media has run out.
Basic Procedures
Problem1: The length of the media required for the received
print job is longer than the amount of media
remaining on the roll. Chapter 2
Using a Variety of
Media
Chapter 3
Solution1: Perform the procedure below to load the same
size and type of roll media in use. (→ P.2-26)
1. Load the size and type of roll in use. Chapter 4
Maintaining the
2. Select the media type. Solution1: Follow the procedure below to load a new roll in Printer
3. Select length if the media remaining detection the printer. (→ P.2-26)
feature for roll media is on. 1. Load a new roll of the size and type to be
Chapter 5
4. Press the OK button. used. Using the Printer in a
2. Select the Media Type. Network Environ-
3. If the roll remaining media function is on, ment
select the length of the media. Chapter 6
4. Press the OK button. Troubleshooting
Solution2: Hold down the Stop/Eject button for more than 1

second to stop printing.
Chapter 7
Operation of the
Function Menus
Contents
6- 5
Index
TOP
Load Cut Sheet Remove Cut Sheet

Chapter 1
Problem1: The printer is waiting for a cut sheet to be Problem1: The printer waits for you to remove the ejected
Basic Procedures
loaded. sheet.
Chapter 2
Using a Variety of
Media
Chapter 3
Solution1: Follow the procedure below to set the media Solution1: Perform the procedure below to remove the cut
type and media size settings the same as those sheet. (→ P.2-39) Chapter 4
for the cut sheet. (→ P.2-35) 1. Open the upper cover. Maintaining the
1. Load a cut sheet that is the same type and 2. Push the release lever to the rear and Printer
size as the printer settings. remove the cut sheet.
2. Select the media type. 3. Pull the release lever to close it. Chapter 5
3. Press the OK button. 4. Raise the upper cover stopper to release the Using the Printer in a
lock then close the upper cover. Network Environ-
Solution2: Hold down the Stop/Eject button for at least 1 ment
second to stop printing. Chapter 6
Troubleshooting
Chapter 7
Operation of the
Function Menus
Contents
6- 6
Index
TOP
Eject Cut Sheet Incorrect Media

Chapter 1
Problem1: The printer received print data for the roll media Problem1: The media type specified for printing does not
Basic Procedures
while a cut sheet was loaded. match the setting for the setting for the media in
the feed source.
Chapter 2
The specified
media type
Using a Variety of
[Media Type] when loaded
Media
Glossy
Photo Paper
Chapter 3
Printer driver
Solution1: Perform the procedure below to remove the cut
sheet. (→ P.2-39) Chapter 4
1. Open the upper cover. Solution1: Perform the procedure below to correct the Maintaining the
2. Push the release lever to the rear and media type setting on the printer. Printer
remove the cut sheet. 1. Confirm the type of media loaded for the print
3. Pull the release lever to close it. job. Chapter 5
4. Raise the upper cover stopper to release the 2. Enter the confirmed media type on the printer Using the Printer in a
lock then close the upper cover. operation panel. (→ P.2-32) Network Environ-
ment
5. Load the roll. Solution2: Perform the procedure below to correct the
Chapter 6
Solution2: Hold down the [ ] / [ ] button for at least 1 Media Type setting on the printer. Troubleshooting
second to stop printing. 1. Hold down the Stop/Eject button for at least
1 second to stop printing.
2. Use the printer driver to select the media type Chapter 7
so the value matches the loaded media type, Operation of the
then re-start the print job. Function Menus
Med.SizeNoMatch
Problem1: A roll of a width that cannot be used with Contents
borderless printing is loaded in the printer.
Solution1: Load a roll media of a width that can be used
with borderless printing. (→ P.2-26)
6- 7
Index
TOP
No Borderless NoBordlessData
Chapter 1
Problem1: The data received cannot be used for borderless Problem1: The data received cannot be used for borderless
Basic Procedures
printing. printing.
Solution1: Follow the procedure below to correct the Media Solution1: Press the Online button to continue borderless
Type setting on the printer. printing. Chapter 2
1. Hold down the Stop/Eject button for 1 sec- Using a Variety of
ond or longer to stop printing. Solution2: Do the procedure below to correct the selection Media
2. Use the printer driver to confirm size of the for the media type.
print data and enlargement/reduction set- 1. Hold down the Stop/Eject button for at least Chapter 3
tings, then perform printing. 1 second to stop printing. Printing Methods for
2. Use the printer driver to confirm size of the Different Objectives
Problem2: The skew detection function is off.
print data and enlargement/reduction set-
Solution1: For the selected print media, select Standard or tings, then perform the print. Chapter 4
Loose for Set Skew Check Lv., then load the Maintaining the
media. Printer
Size undetected
Illegal Med Pos Problem1: The media has shifted out of the correct load Chapter 5
position, or the media is curled. Network Environ-
Problem1: The position of the loaded media is incorrect.
ment
Solution1: Load 10", 14", 16", JIS B2, or ARCH24 roll
paper. Chapter 6
Troubleshooting
Solution2: Re-set the roll paper correctly on the roll holder.
(→ P.2-26)
Problem2: The width of the media in the data received for Chapter 7
printing cannot be used with borderless printing. Operation of the
Function Menus
Solution1: Follow the procedure below to correct the setting
so the printer can print on a media that can be
Solution1: Set the media correctly. (→ P.2-26, P.2-35)
used for borderless printing.
1. Hold down the Stop/Eject button for at least
1 second to stop printing.
Problem2: The printer interior is dusty or dirty. Contents
2. In the printer driver change the setting for Solution1: Open the upper cover and clean inside the
Roll Paper Width to a size that can be used printer. (→ P.4-11)
with borderless printing, then print again.
6- 8
Index
TOP
Media Skewed Media Too Large

Chapter 1
Problem1: The loaded media is skewed. Problem1: The loaded media is larger than any media size
Basic Procedures
allowed for loading in the printer.
Solution1: Set the correct size media then try again.
(→ P.2-26, P.2-35) Chapter 2
Using a Variety of
Media Too Small Media
Problem1: The loaded media is smaller than any media size

Chapter 3
allowed for loading in the printer. Printing Methods for
Solution1: Set the correct size media then try again. Different Objectives
(→ P.2-26, P.2-35)
Solution1: Perform the procedure below if roll media is in
Chapter 4
use. (→ P.2-26) Problem2: Media size smaller than the required size was Maintaining the
1. Open the upper cover. set for printing the print pattern or the nozzle Printer
2. Press the release lever to the rear to open. check pattern.
3. Align the right edge of the roll media with the Solution1: Load A3 size media or larger for printing. Chapter 5
line aligned with the right edge of the roll, Using the Printer in a
then pull the release lever to the front to Media Jam Network Environ-
close. ment
4. Raise the upper cover stopper to release the Problem1: Media has jammed in the printer. Chapter 6
lock then close the upper cover. Troubleshooting
5. Select the media type and press the OK but-
Error! E02E01
ton. Turn Power Off!!
Chapter 7
Solution2: Perform the procedure below if you are using cut Operation of the
sheets. (→ P.2-35) Function Menus
1. Open the upper cover.
2. Press the release lever to the rear to open.
3. Align the right edge of the cut sheet with the
right side, align the leading edge of the sheet Solution1: Perform the procedure below to remove the Contents
inside the printer, then pull the release lever jammed sheet. (→ P.6-35)
toward you to close. 1. Switch the printer off.
4. Raise the upper cover stopper to release the 2. Remove the jammed sheet.
6- 9
lock then close the upper cover. 3. Switch the printer on. Index
TOP
Cut Failed Cut by Stop key

Chapter 1
Problem1: Leading edge of the roll media not detected after Problem1: The loaded media cannot be cut automatically.
Basic Procedures
cutting.
Solution1: The printer stops after the print job ends to
Solution1: Perform the procedure below to remove the protect the printing surface. Support the printout
jammed sheet. (→ P.2-33) with your hand to prevent it from falling into the Chapter 2
output stacker, and then press the Stop/Eject Using a Variety of
Media
2. Use a cutter to cut the sheet manually and button to cut the printout.
remove the sheet.
Chapter 3
3. Re-load the roll. Printing Methods for
4. Raise the upper cover stopper to release the Different Objectives
Chapter 4
Drying.. Maintaining the
Printer
Problem1: The printer is waiting for the ink to dry on the
printout. Chapter 5
Solution1: Wait until the printed sheet ejects automatically. Network Environ-
ment
Feed Limit.. Chapter 6
Troubleshooting
Problem1: You pressed [ ] button on the operation panel
to feed more media than allowed.
Solution1: Release the [ ] button to stop feeding the Chapter 7
Operation of the
media.
Function Menus
Contents
6- 10
Index
TOP
Ink Messages No Bk/PC/C/PM/M/Y Ink Tank

Chapter 1
Problem1: The ink tank of the displayed color is not
Basic Procedures
Check Ink Level installed.
Problem1: Ink in ink tank is running low. BK PC C PM M Y Chapter 2

Using a Variety of
Media
Chapter 3
Solution1: Obtain a new ink tank. If a long print job is in Chapter 4

Maintaining the
progress, or if you need to print a job of many Printer
sheets, you should replace the ink tank with a
new one. Solution1: Install correctly the ink tank named in the
message. (→ P.4-2) Chapter 5
Rep. Ink Tank Problem2: A problem has occurred with the ink tank Network Environ-
ment
indicated on the display.
Problem1: Ink in an ink tank has run out. Chapter 6
Solution1: Replace the ink tank with a new one. Troubleshooting
(→ P.4-2)
Chapter 7
Operation of the
Function Menus
Solution1: Open the right cover and install a new ink tank
for the color that is flashing on the printer
operation panel. (→ P.4-2)
Contents
6- 11
Index
TOP
Check Bk/PC/C/PM/M/Y Ink Tank Not Enough Ink

Chapter 1
Problem1: The installed ink tank named in the display by Problem1: Ink in the tank is low and there is not enough ink
Basic Procedures
the color of its holder cannot be used. for Head Cleaning B, or any other job that
requires a large amount of ink.
Chapter 2
Using a Variety of
Media
Chapter 3
Solution1: Make sure that the ink tank indicated on the
display is installed correctly. (→ P.4-2) Solution1: Replace the ink tank where the ink level is low.
Chapter 4
(→ P.4-2) Maintaining the
Important Printer
z If the ink does not eject properly as a result of installing Ink level?
the wrong ink tank, or if the images are very poor Chapter 5
Problem1: The ink level detection function is set to off. Using the Printer in a
quality, and the Bk tank was mistakenly installed,
Network Environ-
perform the ChangeBkInkType operation (→ P.4-48). Solution1: This message is displayed every time a print job ment
If you mistakenly installed any other ink cartridge, is executed and the printer goes offline. Press
perform the Move Printer operation, and then install the Online button to continue printing. Chapter 6
Troubleshooting
new ink tanks. (→ P.4-32)
Solution2: To retrieve the ink level display, replace with the
Problem2: A problem has occurred with the ink tank ink tanks specified for use with this printer.
indicated on the display. Chapter 7
Operation of the
Solution1: Replace the ink tank with a new one. Function Menus
(→ P.4-2)
Contents
6- 12
Index
TOP
Remove Ink Tank No MT-Cartridge

Chapter 1
Problem1: While the Move Printer message is displayed, Problem1: A maintenance cartridge is not installed.
Basic Procedures
the right cover is closed without removing the ink
Solution1: Install a maintenance cartridge. (→ P.4-16)
tanks.
Solution1: Remove the ink tank. Check MT-Cart. Chapter 2
Using a Variety of
Media
Chk Bk Ink Type Problem1: The maintenance cartridge installed is either
used (full) or is a maintenance cartridge that
Problem1: The black ink type does not match the loaded cannot be used with this printer. Chapter 3
media. Different Objectives
Solution1: Install a new maintenance cartridge intended for
Solution1: Check the black ink setting in the printer driver use with this printer. (→ P.4-16)
and make sure that it is correct. Chapter 4
Maintaining the
Solution2: In the printer driver check the media selection Printer
setting to determine whether the selected media
type is a type that cannot be used with the Chapter 5
current black ink type. (→ P.2-2) Using the Printer in a
Network Environ-
ment
MTCart Full Soon
Chapter 6
Problem1: The maintenance cartridge is almost full. Troubleshooting
Solution1: The current print job can continue. Obtain a new

MT cartridge. Chapter 7
Operation of the
Function Menus
Replace MT-Cart
Problem1: The maintenance cartridge is full.
Solution1: Replace the maintenance cartridge after
stopping the print job. (→ P.4-16)
Contents
6- 13
Index
TOP
Other Messages Check Head Hght L/M/H → L/M/H

Chapter 1
Problem1: The current height of the printhead (displayed at
Basic Procedures
Close xxx Cover (xxx name of the cover) the left end of the bottom display line) is not the
appropriate height (displayed at the right end of
Problem1: The named cover is open. the bottom display line) for printing on the type of Chapter 2
media loaded for the print job. Using a Variety of
Media
Solution1: Confirm the height (H/M/L) named at the right
end of the bottom display line, then perform
procedure below to adjust the height of the print Chapter 3
head. Different Objectives
1. Press the Online button to set the printer
offline.
Chapter 4
Solution1: Close the cover named in display on the 2. Hold down [ ] or [ ] for more than 1 sec. to Maintaining the
operation panel. move the carriage to the center. Printer
4. Set the printhead height adjustment lever to Chapter 5
Reset Lever the correct position for the media. Using the Printer in a
5. Raise the upper cover stopper to release the Network Environ-
Problem1: Open the release lever. ment
Chapter 6
Troubleshooting
Chapter 7
Operation of the
Function Menus
Solution1: Pull the release lever toward you to close it. Contents
6- 14
Index
TOP
Turn Power Off!! Problem3: A problem occurred in the printer.

Solution1: Switch the printer off, wait for over 3 seconds, Chapter 1
Problem1: The tape inside the upper cover or the belt
Basic Procedures
stopper has not been removed. then switch the printer on again.
Solution2: If the message appears again after performing
the procedure above, read the content of the Chapter 2
message and write down the first line, switch the Using a Variety of
Media
printer off, then contact a Canon service center.
Chapter 3
No Printhead Printing Methods for
Problem1: The printhead is not installed.
Solution1: Install the printhead correctly. (→ P.4-24) Chapter 4
Maintaining the
Solution1: Switch the printer off, open the upper cover, Printer
remove the tape and belt stopper, then press the Printhead Error!
Power button. (→ Quick Start Guide) Chapter 5
Problem1: A problem has occurred with the printhead.
Problem2: Media has jammed in the printer. Using the Printer in a
Solution1: Switch the printer off, wait for over 3 seconds, Network Environ-
then switch the printer on again. ment
Chapter 6
Error! E02E01 Solution2: If the message appears again after performing Troubleshooting
Turn Power Off!!
the procedure above, read the content of the
message and write down the first line, switch the
printer off, then contact a Canon service center. Chapter 7
Operation of the
Function Menus
Solution1: Switch the printer off and remove the jammed

sheet, reset the media, then switch the printer on
again. (→ P.6-35) Contents
6- 15
Index
TOP
Check Printhead Scale Read Error

Chapter 1
Problem1: A printhead that cannot be used with the printer Problem1: A problem has occurred with the carriage.
Basic Procedures
is installed.
Solution1: Open the upper cover and make sure a foreign
Solution1: Install the printhead for this printer. (→ P.4-24) object has not fallen into the printer.
Chapter 2
Problem2: Printhead abnormal. Solution2: Switch the printer off, wait for over 3 seconds, Using a Variety of
then switch the printer on again. Media
Solution1: Open the upper cover. If the carriage is out,
replace the printhead. (→ P.4-23) Solution3: If the message appears again after performing
Chapter 3
Solution2: If the carriage is in, close the upper cover, press the procedure above, read the content of the
the Online button, select Replace P.head then message and write down the first line, switch the Different Objectives
replace the printhead. (→ P.4-23) printer off, then contact a Canon service center.
Chapter 4
Problem3: If you see this message when the print job starts, Maintaining the
Mist Full Soon
the condition of the printhead is poor and cannot Printer
eject ink properly. Problem1: The printer mist processing is full.
Chapter 5
Solution1: Press the Stop/Eject button to stop the print job, Solution1: Printing can continue. While performing a long Using the Printer in a
perform Head Cleaning B, then start the print job print job or borderless printing, you can pause a Network Environ-
again. (→ P.4-38) print job so you can contact a Canon service ment
If this does not solve the problem, replace the center. Chapter 6
printhead. (→ P.4-24) Troubleshooting
Solution2: Although you can perform the print job if you Mist Count Error
press the Online button, the print quality may
Problem1: The printer has reached the limit for ink mist Chapter 7
become poor. Operation of the
processing.
Function Menus
Problem4: Ink is not filled in the printhead properly. Solution1: Read the message in the display and jot down
Solution1: Remove all ink tanks and reinsert them properly. the content of the message, switch the printer
(→ P.4-2) off, then contact a Canon service center.
Contents
6- 16
Index
TOP
Adj. Failed ERROR nnnnnn (n = Numbers)

Chapter 1
Problem1: Printhead nozzles are clogged. Problem1: Error in the print data.
Basic Procedures
Solution1: Reload the media and then print the nozzle Solution1: If the job does not print correctly, check the
check pattern to check the condition of the settings then restart the print job.
nozzles. (→ P.4-36) If the printhead is not Chapter 2
Solution2: Switch the printer off, wait for over 3 seconds, Using a Variety of
operating properly, perform Head Cleaning.
then switch the printer on again. Media
(→ P.4-38)
Solution3: If the message appears again after performing
Problem2: The high-transparency film for which the Chapter 3
the procedure above, write down the number of
printhead or amount of line feed cannot be Printing Methods for
the error displayed in the first line, switch the
adjusted is loaded. (→ P.4-40, P.4-42) Different Objectives
printer off, then contact a Canon service center.
Solution1: When you adjust the printhead (Auto Head Chapter 4
Adj.), you should use the media of the type Maintaining the
(other than film) that you use most frequently. Printer
(→ P.4-40)
Solution2: To adjust the amount of line feed (Adjust Band), Chapter 5
perform the procedure for “Adjusting Line Feed Network Environ-
Manually”. (→ P.4-43) ment
Chapter 6
Incorrect Value Troubleshooting
Problem1: The IP address, subnet mask setting, or the

default gateway setting is not correct. Chapter 7
Operation of the
Solution1: Set the correct settings for the IP address, Function Menus
subnet mask and default gateway. For more
details about the values of the printer network
information settings, contact your system
administrator. (P.5-5)
Contents
6- 17
Index
When You Cannot Print
TOP
When You Cannot Print Chapter 1

Basic Procedures
Check the following items when the printer does not operate and will not print.
Printing Will Not Start Printing Halts During Print Job Cannot Print on Network Chapter 2
Cannot Print from a TCP/IP Using a Variety of
No error message is displayed Error Message Displayed Media
Network
Error Message Displayed Ejected Paper Is Blank Cannot Print on AppleTalk Network Chapter 3
Ink initialization operation starts Cannot print from the NetWare Different Objectives
unexpectedly network.
The printer is not recognized, even Chapter 4
with IP Print (Auto) selected with Maintaining the
Mac OS 8.6. Printer
Chapter 5
Printing Will Not Start Using the Printer in a
Network Environ-
ment
No error message is displayed Solution1: If you are using Windows, select the name of the Chapter 6
printer for Printer in the Print dialog box and Troubleshooting
Problem1: The printer has not been selected as the then try to print again.
destination for the print job output.
Chapter 7
Operation of the
Function Menus
Contents
6- 18
Index
TOP
Solution2: If you are using Mac OS 8/9, make sure that the Solution1: Windows:
correct name of the printer is selected with the 1. Select the icon for the printer in the Printer Chapter 1
Chooser, then try again. folder. Basic Procedures
2. From the File menu select Pause Printing to
release this setting.
Chapter 2
Using a Variety of
Media
Chapter 3
Chapter 4
Solution3: For Mac OS X, select the name of the printer for Solution2: Mac OS 8/9: Maintaining the
Printer in the Print dialog box and then try to 1. Open GARO Printmonitor. Printer
print again. 2. From the File menu select Resume Printing
to release the print pause. Chapter 5
Network Environ-
ment
Chapter 6
Troubleshooting
Chapter 7
Operation of the
Function Menus
Problem2: The print queue has halted.
Contents
6- 19
Index
TOP
Solution3: Mac OS X: Error Message Displayed
1. Open the Printer Setup Utility (Print Center). Chapter 1
Problem1: Media jam has occurred.
2. From the Printers menu select Start Jobs to Basic Procedures
release the print pause.
Error! E02E01
Turn Power Off!! Chapter 2
Using a Variety of
Media
Chapter 3
Problem3: With Mac OS 8/9, the printer is shared via USB. Solution1: Remove the jammed sheets. (→ P.6-35)
Problem2: The printer went offline. Chapter 4
Solution1: Connect the printer directly to the computer to be Maintaining the
used for printing through its USB or IEEE1394 Solution1: After correcting the problem in response to the Printer
port. If you want to share the printer, perform the error message, press the Online button to set
print job from a Windows computer. the printer online. Chapter 5
Solution2: If the operation panel display reads Offline Network Environ-
press the Online button to set the printer online. ment
Problem3: A problem occurred during printing. Chapter 6

Troubleshooting
Solution1: When an error message appears in the printer
operation panel or the Windows display, read the
message in the GARO Status Monitor, or in the Chapter 7
GARO Printmonitor for Macintosh, then correct Operation of the
Function Menus
the problem. (→ P.6-2)
Problem4: No print media loaded.
Solution1: Replenish the print media in the specified media
supply source. Contents
6- 20
Index
TOP
Problem5: The media type in the media source selection is
Printing Halts During Print Job
not selected. Chapter 1
Basic Procedures
Solution1: Use the printer operation panel to select the
Error Message Displayed
correct setting for the media type. (→ P.2-32)
Problem1: An error message is displayed during printing.
Solution2: If the media type selection is incorrect, cancel Chapter 2
the print job in the computer side, open the Solution1: Read the message displayed in the GARO Using a Variety of
Media
printer driver and select the correct setting for Status Monitor or GARO Printmonitor, and
the print media loaded. (→ P.1-46, P.2-4) correct the problem indicated by the error
message. (→ P.6-2) Chapter 3
Problem6: No ink. Printing Methods for
Problem2: Roll media ran out during the print job and the Different Objectives
Solution1: When the ink tank replacement message tape on the trailing edge of the media sheet is
appears, replace the ink tank for the indicated preventing the rest of the sheet from feeding. Chapter 4
color. (→ P.4-2) Maintaining the
Solution1: Follow the procedure for removing a media jam. Printer
Remove the used roll and replace it with a new
Ink initialization operation starts unexpectedly
one. (→ P.6-35) Chapter 5
Problem1: When the printer was switched off previously, Using the Printer in a
this force cancelled a cleaning operation. Network Environ-
ment
Solution1: Wait for the ink initialization operation to finish.
Chapter 6
Ink filling may require up to 10 minutes to Troubleshooting
complete.
Chapter 7
Operation of the
Function Menus
Contents
6- 21
Index
TOP
Ejected Paper Is Blank Cannot Print on Network

Chapter 1
Problem1: A blank page is ejected from the previous print
Basic Procedures
job. Cannot Print from a TCP/IP Network
Solution1: The print job starts after the blank page is
Problem1: The LAN port and network cable are not
ejected. Chapter 2
connected correctly. Using a Variety of
Problem2: The leading edge of the roll media is cut to an Media
Solution1: Confirm that the connection of the cable that
even length.
connects the printer to the network is secure,
Solution1: When the roll was loaded, a plain cut sheet was then press the Power button to cycle the printer Chapter 3
ejected as part of the normal procedure to align off and on again. (→ P.5-5) Different Objectives
the roll media correctly. When the preparation is Problem2: The printer cannot recognize automatically the
finished, the printer is ready to print.
LAN communication method. Chapter 4
Problem3: Printhead nozzles are blocked. Maintaining the
Solution1: Use the printer operation panel to select Printer
Solution1: Print a nozzle check pattern to confirm the Interface Setup > Ethernet Driver then set
condition of the printhead. If a nozzle is blocked, each item for the communication method that is Chapter 5
perform the printhead cleaning procedure. being used on the LAN. (→ P.5-5) Using the Printer in a
(→ P.4-38) Network Environ-
Problem3: The TCP/IP network is not set correctly. ment
Problem4: An ink tank has run out of ink.
Solution1: Confirm that the IP Address is set correctly. Chapter 6
Solution1: Check the ink tanks and replace any empty ink (→ P.5-7) Troubleshooting
tanks. (→ P.4-2)
Problem5: Printer is damaged. Chapter 7
Solution1: Contact a Canon service center. Operation of the
Function Menus
Contents
6- 22
Index
TOP
Problem4: The settings for the computer used for printing Cannot Print on AppleTalk Network
are not set correctly. Chapter 1
Problem1: The LAN port and network cable are not
Basic Procedures
Solution1: Confirm the following points: connected correctly.
1. Correct printer driver installed?
Solution1: Confirm that the connection of the cable that
The printer driver must be installed on every
connects the printer to the network is secure, Chapter 2
computer that will be printing from Windows. Using a Variety of
then press the Power button to cycle the printer
2. Is the output destination port set correctly for Media
off and on again. (→ P.5-5)
every computer that will be used for printing?
Select Printers under Control Panel to Problem2: The printer cannot recognize automatically the Chapter 3
check the output destination. LAN communication method. Printing Methods for
Solution1: Use the printer operation panel to select
Interface Setup > Ethernet Driver then set
Chapter 4
each item for the communication method that is Maintaining the
being used on the LAN. (→ P.5-5) Printer
Problem3: The AppleTalk protocol has not been enabled for
the printer. Chapter 5
Solution1: Follow the procedure below to use the Remote Network Environ-
ment
UI to enable the AppleTalk protocol.
1. Open the Remote UI and log in as an Admin- Chapter 6
istrator. Troubleshooting
2. On the Device Manager menu, click Net-
work.
Problem5: The name of the file you are trying to print is too Chapter 7
3. Click the Edit button under AppleTalk.
long. Operation of the
4. Under Phase Type select Phase 2, then Function Menus
Solution1: Normally, LPR (with Windows NT: Microsoft under Zone select the Zone where the printer
TCP/IP printing) sends the job name based on is located, then click the OK button (if zones
the name of the software application and the have not been set for the network, you will
name of the file. However, if the name of the job see an asterisk (*) displayed).
is more than 255 characters, LPR cannot send 5. Return to the Network page of the Remote
Contents
the job. In such a case, shorten the name of the UI and click the Reset button.
file.
6- 23
Index
TOP
Problem4: The computer and the printer are not on the 3. Under AppleTalk in the Control Panels of
same network. the Apple menu, make sure that the printer is
Chapter 1
selected for connection to the correct port for Basic Procedures
Solution1: If the number of routers are exceeded with the the destination.
Zeroconf function, the computer cannot connect
to the printer if it is on a different network.
Chapter 2
Connect the computer and printer to the same Using a Variety of
network. For more about the network settings, Media
please contact the network manager.
Problem5: The settings for the computer used for printing Chapter 3
4. In Chooser make sure that the GARO Printer Printing Methods for
are not set correctly. Different Objectives
Driver is installed.
Solution1: Mac OS 8.6/9x: 5. In Chooser, select GARO Printer Driver,
1. Open Chooser from the Apple menu. and under Destination select AppleTalk, Chapter 4
2. Under AppleTalk make sure that Active is then select again the name of the printer in Maintaining the
Printer
selected. the printer list.
Chapter 5
Network Environ-
ment
Chapter 6
Troubleshooting
Chapter 7
Operation of the
Function Menus
Contents
6- 24
Index
TOP
Solution2: Mac OS X: Cannot print from the NetWare network.
1. Open Network for System Preferences. Chapter 1
Problem1: The printer LAN port and cable are not
2. Under Show, select the name of the LAN port Basic Procedures
connected correctly.
where the printer is connected.
3. Open the AppleTalk panel and make sure Solution1: Confirm that the connection of the cable that
that Make AppleTalk Active is checked on. connects the printer to the network is secure, Chapter 2
then press the Power button to cycle the printer Using a Variety of
Media
off and on again. (→ P.5-5)
Problem2: The printer cannot recognize automatically the Chapter 3
LAN communication method. Printing Methods for
Solution1: Use the printer operation panel to select
Interface Setup > Ethernet Driver then set
Chapter 4
each item for the communication method that is Maintaining the
being used on the LAN. (→ P.5-5) Printer
Problem3: The NetWare network is not set correctly.
Chapter 5
Solution1: Confirm the following points: Using the Printer in a
1. Make sure that the NetWare file server is run- Network Environ-
ning. ment
2. Is there enough disk space available on the Chapter 6
4. Open Printer Setup Utility (Print Center) NetWare file server? You may not be able to Troubleshooting
and make sure that the name of this printer is perform large print jobs if there is not enough
displayed in the printer list. If the name is not free space available.
displayed, click the Add button to add the 3. Start NWADMIN or PCONSOLE and confirm Chapter 7
name of the printer. Operation of the
(1) that the print service is set correctly, and
5. If the name of the printer does not display Function Menus
(2) that the print queue has been enabled for
after clicking the Add button, use the pro- use. (→ P.5-38)
vided User Software CD-ROM to reinstall the 4. Make sure that the printer network settings
printer driver for the printer. are correct. Especially, confirm that a frame
type is enabled for the Frame Type setting. Contents
(→ P.5-20, P.5-34)
6- 25
Index
TOP
Problem4: The settings for the computer used for printing The printer is not recognized, even with IP Print
are not set correctly. (Auto) selected with Mac OS 8.6. Chapter 1
Basic Procedures
Solution1: Confirm the following points: Problem1: With OS 8.6 when the router on the network
1. Correct printer driver installed? Before print- cannot be recognized, communication cannot be
ing, the printer driver must be installed on performed with TCP/IP. Chapter 2
every computer. (→ P.5-31) Using a Variety of
2. Is the output destination port set correctly for Solution1: With Chooser select Destination > Registering
Media
every computer that will be used for printing? IP Address and register the printer IP address,
Select Printers under Control Panel to then with Chooser select Destination > IP Print
Chapter 3
check the output destination. then select the printer name of the registered IP Printing Methods for
address. Different Objectives
Problem5: A print job data stream cannot be sent from the
NetWare server to a printer in another subnet. Solution2: With Chooser select Destination > AppleTalk
and select the printer name. Chapter 4
Solution1: When data is sent from NetWare to the printer, Maintaining the
Solution3: Use Mac OS 9.0.4 or later if you want to operate Printer
the data is sent in the NCP Burst mode, but in
some network environments data sent to a the printer with IP Print (Auto).
printer on another subnet is lost. If this problem Chapter 5
Solution4: Locate the printer and Macintosh in the same Using the Printer in a
occurs, switch off the NCP Burst mode under the subnet, then assign them fixed IP addresses. Network Environ-
printer protocol settings and try again. ment
Solution5: If there is a DHCP server in the network, locate
Problem6: Parallel is selected for the printer type when Chapter 6
the printer and Macintosh in the same subnet,
using the queue server in the queue server Troubleshooting
then assign the IP addresses from the DHCP
mode.
server.
Solution1: Select Other/Unknown for the printer type. Chapter 7
Operation of the
Function Menus
Contents
6- 26
Index
Unexpected Printing Results
TOP
Unexpected Printing Results Chapter 1

Basic Procedures
If the results you see in the print job are not what you expect, check the items described below.
Poor Quality Abnormal Content Other Problems Chapter 2

Using a Variety of
Printing is faint Broken lines are visible. Ink consumption is exceedingly high. Media
Random, bizarre characters are Chapter 3

Ink Smeared The message MTCart Full Soon
printing. Printing Methods for
does not go off even after replacing a
Length for the media feed method Different Objectives
Edges smeared with ink new maintenance cartridge.
is not correct.
Chapter 4
Back sides of printed sheets are dirty Printing in Monochrome Media is not cutting straight Maintaining the
Printer
Black or white streaks visible Color Tones Uneven Power does not switch on
Chapter 5
Horizontal stripes appear in images Using the Printer in a
Image color borders printing thick Roll media not inserted in feed slot Network Environ-
printed on Synthetic Paper. ment
When printing on Glossy Photo Paper
or Semi-Glossy Photo Paper, you may Chapter 6
Troubleshooting
see differences between light and Image edges are faint.
shaded areas on ripple surfaces of the
media.
Chapter 7
The overall printout appears
Operation of the
reddish or bluish. Function Menus
Contents
6- 27
Index
TOP
Problem5: The ink port needle is stuck and the ink has
Poor Quality
clogged. Chapter 1
Basic Procedures
Solution1: Leave the printer with the ink tanks installed for
Printing is faint
more than 24 hours and then execute Head
Problem1: Printing on the incorrect side of the media. Cleaning B. (→ P.4-38)
Chapter 2
Solution1: Check the front and back side of the media. If Problem6: A piece of jammed sheet remains under the Using a Variety of
Media
you print on the other side of the media, you will upper cover.
not achieve the correct results in printing.
Solution1: Follow the procedure below to remove paper Chapter 3
Problem2: Black ink appears scratchy if black ink type is scraps from under the upper cover. Printing Methods for
switched frequently. 1. Press the Online button to display Offline. Different Objectives
2. Press and hold [ ] for at least 1 sec. to
Solution1: Perform Head Cleaning B. (→ P.4-38)
move the carriage to the center. Chapter 4
Problem3: Printhead nozzles are blocked. 3. Open the upper cover. Maintaining the
Printer
4. Remove all the paper scraps under the upper
Solution1: Print a nozzle check pattern to confirm the
cover.
condition of the printhead. If a print head nozzle Chapter 5
is blocked, perform the printhead cleaning Problem7: The ink was not dry enough for cutting during Using the Printer in a
procedure. (→ P.4-36, P.4-38) borderless printing. Network Environ-
ment
Solution2: If only the yellow colors appear smeared, you Solution1: Select Med. Detail Set. on the operation panel,
Chapter 6
may be able to correct this by selecting on the then select a longer setting for the Drying Time. Troubleshooting
operation panel Med. Detail Set.> Correct
Problem8: You have used the wrong type of black ink tank.
Smear > On. (→ P.1-21)
Solution1: Obtain a new black ink tank then perform the Ink Chapter 7
Problem4: A printout is in the output stacker. Change procedure. (→ P.4-48) Operation of the
Solution1: The capacity of the output stacker is limited to Function Menus
one printout. Start the next print job only after
you have removed the previous printout from the
output stacker.
Contents
6- 28
Index
TOP
Ink Smeared Edges smeared with ink

Chapter 1
Problem1: The selected media type does not match the Problem1: The platen has become dirty after a borderless
Basic Procedures
media loaded in the media supply source. print job or printing a small media size.
Solution1: Load the paper feed source named in the Solution1: Open the upper cover and clean the platen.
message. If the paper is not the same as that (→ P.4-11) Chapter 2
specified for the job, pause the print job Using a Variety of
Problem2: The selected Media Type is not correct for the Media
temporarily, load the correct paper, then print
media loaded in the media supply source.
again. (→ P.2-26, P.2-35)
Solution1: Load the paper feed source named in the Chapter 3
Problem2: The printhead height adjustment lever was Printing Methods for
message. If the paper is not the same as that Different Objectives
moved from the middle to the down position.
specified for the job, pause the print job
Solution1: Set the printhead height adjustment lever to the temporarily, load the correct paper, then print
Chapter 4
center position for normal printing. (→ P.2-40) again. (→ P.2-26, P.2-35) Maintaining the
Printer
Problem3: You are printing on thick paper or paper that Problem3: The media is wrinkled or curled.
buckles easily.
Solution1: Remove the creasing or curling then set the Chapter 5
Solution1: Make sure that the printhead height adjustment media again. Using the Printer in a
lever is set at the up position. (→ P.2-40) Problem4: A line is printed at the cutting position when the
Network Environ-
ment
Problem4: The output assist guides are not pulled out. cutting dust reduction function is set.
Chapter 6
Solution1: Pull out on both sides of the output assist guides. Solution1: If the cutting dust reduction function is not Troubleshooting
(→ P.2-31, P.2-39) needed, use the operation panel to switch off this
feature for the print media in use.
Problem5: The media is wrinkled because it is set Chapter 7
improperly. Operation of the
Function Menus
Solution1: Release the release lever, and then once again
align the media.
Contents
6- 29
Index
TOP
Back sides of printed sheets are dirty Horizontal stripes appear in images printed on
Synthetic Paper. Chapter 1
Problem1: A print job using large size media was executed
Basic Procedures
after a print job on small size media. Problem1: Standard is selected for Print Quality.
Solution1: Clean the part of the platen under the upper Solution1: In the printer driver, select High or Highest for
cover. (→ P.4-11) Print Quality. Chapter 2
Using a Variety of
Problem2: The platen was not cleaned after a borderless Media
print job. When printing on Glossy Photo Paper or Semi-
Solution1: Clean the part of the platen under the upper
Glossy Photo Paper, you may see differences Chapter 3
between light and shaded areas on ripple surfaces Printing Methods for
cover. (→ P.4-11) Different Objectives
of the media.
Problem3: Performed the print job with the media width
detection function switched off. Problem1: You may not be able to achieve a sufficient Chapter 4
image in some print patterns with the printhead Maintaining the
Solution1: Clean the part of the platen under the upper Printer
in the middle (standard) position.
cover. (→ P.4-11)
Solution1: Lower the printhead height adjustment lever to Chapter 5
the low position. However, never print on media Using the Printer in a
Black or white streaks visible Network Environ-
that wrinkles easily such as Coated Paper or
Plain Paper with the printhead height adjustment ment
Problem1: Printhead is out of alignment.
lever in the low position. This could damage the Chapter 6
Solution1: Use the operation panel to adjust the amount of Troubleshooting
printer.
feed for the print media in use. (→ P.4-42)
Problem2: Printing is not proceeding smoothly due to an
interruption in the flow of data from the computer. Chapter 7
Operation of the
Solution1: Close other applications that are open and Function Menus
cancel other jobs that are executing.
Problem3: The Feed Priority item is set for Print Length.
Solution1: For the Feed Priority item, select Band Joint Contents
the adjust the amount of feed. (→ P.4-42)
6- 30
Index
TOP
Abnormal Content Length for the media feed method is not correct.
Chapter 1
Problem1: Band Joint is selected.
Basic Procedures
Broken lines are visible. Solution1: If you want to match size the media feed
direction correctly, select Print Length for the
Problem1: The printhead has not been aligned correctly.
Feed Priority item, then enter the setting for the Chapter 2
Solution1: Use the printer operation panel to align the Adjust Length. The amount of media feed can Using a Variety of
Media
printhead. (→ P.4-40) be adjusted in 0.02% increments.
Problem2: After switching the black ink type, the position of Chapter 3
the printhead occasionally slips. Printing in Monochrome Printing Methods for
Solution1: Align the printhead. Problem1: The printer driver's Color Mode is set to
Monochrome (Photo), Monochrome, or Black
Chapter 4
Random, bizarre characters are printing. Only. Maintaining the
Solution1: Select Color for the Color Mode in the printer Printer
Problem1: Data from the print job data stream has been
driver and try again.
lost.
(→ Printer Driver Online Help) Chapter 5
Solution1: Switch the printer and computer off, then switch
Problem2: Color ink tank nozzle is clogged. Network Environ-
them on again and start the print job again. ment
Solution1: Print a nozzle check pattern to confirm the
Problem2: Another printer driver was selected for the print Chapter 6
condition of the printhead. If a print head nozzle
job. Troubleshooting
is blocked, perform the printhead cleaning
Solution1: Select the correct printer driver for the printer procedure. (→ P.4-36, P.4-38)
and try again. (→ P.1-32) Chapter 7
Problem3: The fonts of the printed data are deranged. Operation of the
Function Menus
Solution1: Make sure that the software application you are
using has the correct type of fonts and that they
have been installed correctly.
(→ Software Application Instructions) Contents
6- 31
Index
TOP
Color Tones Uneven Problem5: Yellow ink is smearing.

Solution1: On the operation panel select Med. Detail Set. > Chapter 1
Problem1: The color adjustment for the printer driver has
Basic Procedures
not been performed. Correct Smear > On. (→ P.1-21)
Solution1: Use the printer driver to adjust the colors with the
settings on the Color Settings of the Color Image color borders printing thick Chapter 2
Mode dialog box. Using a Variety of
Problem1: Ink is clogged in a nozzle. Media
(→ Printer Driver Online Help)
Solution1: On the Layout sheet of the printer driver, under
Problem2: The computer and monitor have not been Special Settings set SSC Adjustment to Level Chapter 3
adjusted correctly for color. 1, then execute the print job again. If printing at Printing Methods for
Solution1: Perform monitor color correction. Level 1 does not solve the problem, select Level
(→ Monitor Instruction) 2 and perform the print again. However, please
remember that using this feature can cause Chapter 4
Solution2: The color management setting in the software Maintaining the
changes in the color hues over the entire image Printer
application is not set correctly. so you should check the hues as you are
(→ Software Application Instructions) printing.
Chapter 5
Problem3: Color ink tank nozzle is clogged. Using the Printer in a
Image edges are faint. Network Environ-
Solution1: Print a nozzle check pattern to confirm the ment
condition of the printhead. If a print head nozzle Problem1: The setting of the vacuum fan is too strong. Chapter 6
is blocked, perform the printhead cleaning Troubleshooting
procedure. (→ P.4-36, P.4-38) Solution1: Select a weaker setting for the vacuum fan.
However, this solution does not apply to printing
Problem4: A color ink tank is inserted in the wrong slot. of a high-precision image.
Chapter 7
Solution1: On the printer operation panel, execute Move Operation of the
Printer, remove the ink tank from the printer, Function Menus
then insert the correct color ink tank.
(→ P.4-32, Quick Start Guide)
Solution2: After performing the above procedure, execute
Nozzle Check. If each color is not printing
Contents
correctly, on the printer operation panel execute
Head Cleaning B (→ P.4-36, P.4-38)
6- 32
Index
TOP
The overall printout appears reddish or bluish. 5. Press [ ] or [ ] to lighten or darken the
selected color by selecting 1 or 3 then press
Chapter 1
Problem1: Color balance is not correct. the OK button. Basic Procedures
Solution1: Follow the procedure below to select Adjust 6. To adjust the other colors, repeat Step 4 and
Printer > Color Adj. and then restore all the 5.
color settings to their factory default settings. Chapter 2
1. Press the Online button to display MAIN Note Using a Variety of
Media
MENU. z If you need to adjust dark colors, adjust the Y, M, C, K
2. Press [ ] or [ ] to select Adjust Printer inks.
then press [ ]. z If you need to adjust bright colors, adjust the PM, PC Chapter 3
3. Press [ ] or [ ] to select Color Adj. then inks. Different Objectives
press [ ].
4. Press [ ] or [ ] to select Return Defaults
Chapter 4
then press [ ]. Maintaining the
5. Press [ ] or [ ] to select Yes, then press Printer
OK.
Solution2: If the procedure above does not correct the color Chapter 5
balance, select Adjust Printer > Color Adj. and Network Environ-
then change the settings for each color. ment
1. Press the Online button to display MAIN Chapter 6
MENU. Troubleshooting
2. Press [ ] or [ ] to select Adjust Printer
then press [ ].
3. Press [ ] or [ ] to select Color Adj. then Chapter 7
press [ ]. Operation of the
4. Press [ ] or [ ] to select the ink color to Function Menus
correct then press [ ].
Contents
6- 33
Index
TOP
Other Problems The message MTCart Full Soon does not go off
even after replacing a new maintenance cartridge. Chapter 1
Basic Procedures
Ink consumption is exceedingly high. Problem1: The printer has not yet recognized the new
maintenance cartridge.
Problem1: There are many sheets with large areas of color.
Solution1: Replace the maintenance cartridge and press Chapter 2
Solution1: Printing photographs or other images that Using a Variety of
the Information button.
Media
require a lot of color fill consumes large amounts
of ink. This is not unusual. Solution2: After replacing a new maintenance cartridge the
message disappears upon executing a print or Chapter 3
Problem2: Executing Head Cleaning B very often. cleaning operation. Printing Methods for
Solution1: Head Cleaning B consumes a large amount of
ink (this is not unusual). It is not recommended Media is not cutting straight Chapter 4
to execute Head Cleaning B unless after the Maintaining the
printer has been moved, after the printer has Problem1: The media is wrinkled at the cutting position. Printer
been stored and not used for a long period, or Solution1: Flatten the media at the cutting position.
having problems with the printhead. Chapter 5
Problem3: The printer consumes ink for the initial ink tank Using the Printer in a
Power does not switch on Network Environ-
filling. ment
Problem1: The power cord was unplugged with the printer
Solution1: The first time the printer used after it is set up or power on. Chapter 6
moved to a new location, the ink level display Troubleshooting
may drop to as low as 80% as a result of filling Solution1: Wait three minutes with the power cord
the printhead and ink tanks with ink (this is not unplugged, then plug in the power cord again
abnormal). and switch the printer on. Chapter 7
Operation of the
Function Menus
Roll media not inserted in feed slot
Problem1: The roll media is curled.
Solution1: Insert either the left or right corner of the media
at a skewed angle into the feed slot, then
Contents
straighten the edge of the media so it is parallel
with the back of the printer.
6- 34
Index
Handling Jams
TOP
Handling Jams Chapter 1

Basic Procedures
The printer stops and a Media Jam or Turn Power Off!!
message appears on the printer display as soon as a jam Removing a Roll Media Jam
occurs. When a jam occurs, use the following procedure to Follow the procedure below to remove a roll media jam. Chapter 2
check the jam points and remove the jammed media.
1
Using a Variety of
Hold down the Power button for more than 1 Media
z Operation Panel
sec. to extinguish the Online lamp and switch
Chapter 3
Information Power the printer off. Printing Methods for
Data Error! E02E01 Different Objectives
Message Turn Power Off!! Information Power
Data
Cleaning Message
Shut Down..
Please Wait..
(3 sec.) Cleaning
(3 sec.)
Stop/Eject Stop/Eject
(1 sec.) Online
Chapter 4
(1 sec.) Online Maintaining the
Offline
Menu
Printer
2
Offline
Menu Chapter 5
Open the upper cover. Using the Printer in a
z GARO StatusMonitor (Windows) Network Environ-
ment
Chapter 6
Troubleshooting
Chapter 7
Operation of the
Function Menus
Important
z Do not touch any areas other than those indicated. Contents
printer.
6- 35
Index
Handling Jams
TOP
3 Move the carriage manually when it is out of 5 Hold the left and right corners of the jammed
its normal park position. media and pull the sheet forward, then above Chapter 1
Move it to the right or left edge of the carriage rail the cutting groove (a), cut at the edge of the Basic Procedures
before attempting to remove the media. printed area or where the media is wrinkled.
Use a pair of scissors if the media is difficult to cut Chapter 2
with a cutter. Using a Variety of
Media
Chapter 3
Chapter 4
Maintaining the
Printer
4 Push the release lever toward the rear to

a Chapter 5
open. Using the Printer in a
6 While gently pulling out the center of the
Network Environ-
ment
leading edge of the roll media, align the right Chapter 6
edge of the media so it is parallel to guideline Troubleshooting
(b), then pull the release lever to the front to
close it.
Chapter 7
Operation of the
Function Menus
b Contents
6- 36
Index
Handling Jams
TOP
Important lock then close the upper cover. Chapter 1
z Do not pull strongly on the roll media when you align it Basic Procedures
with the guideline. The roll media may not feed out
straight in some cases.
z If you pull too much of the roll media out, more of the Chapter 2
leading sheet than is needed will be cut. Using a Variety of
Media
7 Move the carriage manually when it is out of

Chapter 3
its normally parked position. Printing Methods for
Push the carriage to the right until it stops. Different Objectives
9 If the printer is off, press the Power button to

Chapter 4
Maintaining the
switch the printer on. Printer
Information Power
Data
Message
Chapter 5
Cleaning
(3 sec.)
Stop/Eject
(1 sec.) Online
Network Environ-
Offline
ment
Menu
Chapter 6
The media starts to feed, and the printer is ready to Troubleshooting
use after feeding is finished.
Important
Note Chapter 7
z Be sure to push the carriage to the right. If you push it
z If you need to correct the alignment of the leading Operation of the
to the left, the printer will display a carriage error after Function Menus
the printer is switched on. edge, press the Online button to display Offline, press
the [ ] button to feed the media, then select Force
Cutting on MAIN MENU to cut the leading edge.
(→ P.7-3)
z After switching roll media and specifying a new media Contents
type, please set the media type on the printer
operation panel. (→ P.2-32)
6- 37
Index
Handling Jams
TOP
Removing a Cut Sheet Jam 3 Push the release lever toward the rear to
open. Chapter 1
Follow the procedure below to remove a cut sheet jam that Basic Procedures
occurs during printing.
1 Hold down the Power button for more than 1 Chapter 2

Using a Variety of
sec. to extinguish the Online lamp and switch Media
the printer off.
Information Power Chapter 3
Data
Message
Shut Down..
Please Wait.. Printing Methods for
Cleaning
(3 sec.)
Stop/Eject
(1 sec.) Online
4
Offline
Menu Chapter 4
If the sheet is visible, pull the jammed sheet Maintaining the
2 Open the upper cover and if the carriage is forward gently.

Printer
out move it to either the right or the left side. Chapter 5

Network Environ-
ment
Chapter 6
Troubleshooting
Chapter 7
Operation of the
Function Menus
Important
z Do not touch any areas other than those indicated. Contents
printer.
6- 38
Index
Handling Jams
TOP
5 If the sheet is not visible, remove the jammed 7 If the printer is off, press the Power button to
sheet from the back of the printer. switch the printer on. Chapter 1
Basic Procedures
Information Power
Data
Message
Cleaning
(3 sec.)
Stop/Eject
(1 sec.) Online
Chapter 2
Offline Using a Variety of
Menu
Media
8 With the print side of the new sheet facing Chapter 3

up, holding the sheet square between the Printing Methods for
Visually inspect the interior to make sure that no Different Objectives
pieces of the sheet remain in the printer. paper restraints, making sure that the stack
is aligned with the guideline (a) on the right
6 If the carriage is on the left side, push it and aligned with the guideline (b) at the
Chapter 4
Maintaining the
manually to the right side. back. Printer
Push the carriage all the way to the right until it

b a Chapter 5
stops. Using the Printer in a
Network Environ-
ment
Chapter 6
Troubleshooting
Chapter 7
Operation of the
Function Menus
Important
z Be sure to push the carriage to the right. If you push it Contents
to the left, the printer may display a carriage error after
the printer is switched on.
6- 39
Index
Handling Jams
TOP
9 Pull the release lever forward to close, raise
the upper cover stopper and release the Chapter 1
lock, then close the upper cover. Basic Procedures
Chapter 2
Using a Variety of
Media
Chapter 3
Cut sheet preparation begins. When preparation is Chapter 4

finished, the printer is ready to print. Maintaining the
Printer
Chapter 5
Network Environ-
ment
Chapter 6
Troubleshooting
Chapter 7
Operation of the
Function Menus
Contents
6- 40
Index
Updating the Firmware
TOP
Updating the Firmware Chapter 1

By updating the firmware for this printer, you can add on 3 Press [ ] or [ ] to select Information then
Basic Procedures
new functions and improvements for existing functions. press [ ].

Chapter 2
MAIN MENU Using a Variety of
Obtaining the Firmware Update Information ↓
Media
Contact a Canon service center, or the dealer where you

purchased the printer, for details about how to obtain the
4 Press [ ] or [ ] to select S/C: xx.xx.xx. Chapter 3
most recent version of the firmware update. Version Different Objectives
S/C: xx.xx.xx
Chapter 4
Confirming the Firmware Version Maintaining the
Printer
Perform the procedure below to confirm the current version
of the printer firmware before performing a firmware update.
Chapter 5
If the version of the firmware in use is older than the Using the Printer in a
downloaded version, perform the firmware update. Network Environ-
ment
Note Chapter 6
z If the version number of the printer is the same as or Troubleshooting
newer than the firmware update in hand, then you do
not need to update the firmware.
Chapter 7
1 If the printer power is off, press the Power
Operation of the
Function Menus
button to switch the printer on.
After a few seconds Online is displayed in the
operation panel and the Online lamp lights.
Contents
MENU.
6- 41
Index
Reinstalling the USB or IEEE1394 Driver
TOP
Reinstalling the USB or IEEE1394 Driver Chapter 1

If you try to install the USB or IEEE1394 driver with the USB 6 Select only Specify a location then click the
Basic Procedures
or IEEE1394 cable already connected to the printer, the Browse button.

driver may not be installed correctly.
7
Chapter 2
In such a case, follow the procedure below to install the Select the printer driver folder. Using a Variety of
printer driver after reinstalling the USB or IEEE1394 driver. Media
z Windows Me/Windows 98
1 Right click the My Computer icon then Open the CD-ROM Drive, open the appropriate Chapter 3
select Properties. language folder > Drivers > WinMe_9X > Different Objectives
Driver, then click the OK button.
2 On the Hardware sheet, click Device z Windows server 2003/Windows XP/Windows Chapter 4
Manager. Next, in the Device Manager 2000 Maintaining the
Printer
window click the Unknown devices icon Open the CD-ROM, open the appropriate
then click the Properties button. language folder, then Drivers > WinXP_2K >
Chapter 5
Driver > OK.
3
8
Click the Device Manager in the Driver Network Environ-
Confirm that the correct folder has been ment
sheet, the Update Device Driver Wizard
opens, follow the instructions on the screen selected for Specify a location then install Chapter 6
Troubleshooting
to complete the installation. the driver.
4 When the Wizard prompts you to select how Chapter 7

to search for the driver source files, select Operation of the
Function Menus
only CD-ROM drive. Set the User Software
CD-ROM in the CD-ROM drive then follow
the instructions on the screen to install the
interface driver. Contents
5 Next, when the Add New Hardware Wizard
opens, follow the instructions on the screen.
6- 42
Index
Uninstalling Software Applications
TOP
Uninstalling Software Applications Chapter 1

Follow the procedure below to delete the printer driver and 2 Click the printer in the list you wish to delete,
Basic Procedures
software utility installed on the computer. then click the Delete button.
A confirmation message appears. Chapter 2
Important Using a Variety of
z If you uninstall the software from Windows Server
2003, Windows XP, Windows 2000, or Windows NT
3 Click the Yes button.
Media
4.0, you must log in as a member of the Administrators

4
Chapter 3
group before the uninstallation. Confirm that the printer has been deleted Printing Methods for
from the list, then click the Exit button on the
Delete Printer screen.
Deleting the Printer Driver Chapter 4
Maintaining the
Macintosh Printer
Follow the procedure below to delete the printer driver for
this printer.
1 Mount the provided User Software CD-ROM Chapter 5
Windows in the CD-ROM drive. Using the Printer in a
Network Environ-
Important 2 Open the appropriate OS folder on the User

ment
Chapter 6
z If you uninstall the software from Windows Server Software CD-ROM. Troubleshooting
2003, Windows XP, Windows 2000, or Windows NT
For OS 8.6 or OS 9.x, in the OS89 folder, open
4.0, you must log in as a member of the Administrators
GARO Installer for 8/9.
group before the uninstallation.
Chapter 7
For OS X, in the OSX folder, open GARO Installer
1
Operation of the
for X. Function Menus
Click the Start button then select Programs
> Canon Printer Uninstaller >
imagePROGRAF GARO Printer Driver
3 In the upper left menu select Uninstall then
click the Uninstall button.
Uninstaller.
Contents
The Delete Printer screen appears. 4 Follow the messages on the screen to delete
the GARO Printer Driver.
6- 43
Index
Uninstalling Software Applications
TOP
Deleting the GARO Status Monitor Deleting the GARO Device Setup Utility
Chapter 1
Follow this procedure to delete the GARO Status Monitor Follow this procedure to delete the GARO Device Setup Basic Procedures
installed on Windows. Utility installed on Windows.
1 On the desktop click the Start button, point 1 Click the Start button then select Programs Chapter 2
Using a Variety of
to Programs, click GARO Status Monitor, > GARO Device Setup Utility > Uninstaller Media
then select Uninstaller (GARO Device (GARO Device Setup Utility).
Setup Utility).
2 When the selection screen appears, select
Chapter 3
2
When the selection screen appears, select Delete then click the Next button.
then click the Next button.
GARO Status Monitor is deleted. 3 Obey the instructions on the screen to delete Chapter 4
Maintaining the
the GARO Device Setup Utility. Printer
3 Follow the instructions on the screen to
Chapter 5
delete the GARO Status Monitor.
Network Environ-
ment
Chapter 6
Troubleshooting
Chapter 7
Operation of the
Function Menus
Contents
6- 44
Index
TOP
Chapter 7 Operation of the Function Menus

Chapter 1
Basic Procedures
Operating the Function Menus ...................................................................7-2
Cutter Functions .........................................................................................7-3 Chapter 2
When You Need to Cut Media ............................................................................... 7-3 Using a Variety of
Replacing the Cutter .............................................................................................. 7-3 Media
Media Functions .........................................................................................7-4
Changing the Media Type Settings ....................................................................... 7-4 Chapter 3
Printing to the Bottom Margin of the Original ......................................................... 7-5 Printing Methods for
Ink Functions ..............................................................................................7-6 Different Objectives
Replacing an Ink Tank During a Print Job ............................................................. 7-6
Changing the Black Ink Type ................................................................................. 7-7 Chapter 4
Print Quality Functions ...............................................................................7-8 Maintaining the
Determining if the Printhead is Blocked ................................................................. 7-8 Printer
When the Printhead Nozzles Are Clogged ............................................................ 7-8
Correcting Image Offset ........................................................................................ 7-9
Chapter 5
Correcting Horizontal Banding in Images .............................................................. 7-9 Using the Printer in a
Printing to an Accurate Length ............................................................................ 7-10 Network Environ-
Printer Information Functions ...................................................................7-11 ment
Checking the Print Job History ............................................................................ 7-11
Checking the Printer Settings Information ........................................................... 7-11 Chapter 6
Checking the Media Type Settings Information ................................................... 7-12 Troubleshooting
Checking the Printer Functions Menu ................................................................. 7-12
Chapter 7
Operation of the
Function Menus
Contents
Operating the Function Menus
TOP
Operating the Function Menus Chapter 1

Basic Procedures
This chapter introduces the commonly used functions of the printer function menus with task oriented procedures and
message examples. The necessary procedures and various messages shown on the printer display appear in the diagrams.
Chapter 2
Online Press the Online button once. Also, pressing Using a Variety of
the Online button when using the menus Media
Online
Online
Offline
a
Online cancels the setting before the OK button is
MAIN MENU
pressed and returns the printer to the online Chapter 3
b System Setup mode (or offline standby mode for loading Printing Methods for
media). Different Objectives
Change Cutter
c
Yes No f Press [ ] or [ ] repeatedly to display the
Chapter 4
OK OK
items available for selection. Maintaining the
Open UpperCover g Printer
Opening the Upper Cover and Replacing the Cutter Press [ ] once to go to the next level of the
menu. Press [ ] to return to the previous
Closing the Upper Cover h Chapter 5
level of the menu.
Reset Cut Count Using the Printer in a
d OK
Stop/Eject
Press OK once to select the currently Network Environ-

a ment
Online
Resetting displayed value for a setting, or to execute the

selected item. Chapter 6
Online
e Troubleshooting
Stop/Eject
Press Stop/Eject once to cancel execution.
Chapter 7
Operation of the
Denotes a value for a setting. Function Menus
Denotes a message on the display that

appears as the result of an operation.
Contents
Denotes any other action that should be
performed but not on the printer operation
panel.
7- 2 Index
Cutter Functions
TOP
Cutter Functions Chapter 1

Basic Procedures
The following cutter operations are provided in the printer function menus.
Chapter 2
When You Need to Cut Media Replacing the Cutter Using a Variety of
Media
Execute Force Cutting on the operation panel when you Execute Change Cutter on the operation panel when you
need to use the printer cutter to cut the media cleanly. need to replace the cutter. Reset the count for the number
Chapter 3
of sheets cut after the cutter has been replaced. Printing Methods for
Online Different Objectives
Online
Online
Offline Online
Online Offline Chapter 4

MAIN MENU Maintaining the
Online
Printer
MAIN MENU
Force Cutting
System Setup Chapter 5
Yes No Network Environ-
OK OK Change Cutter ment
Online
Cutting.. Chapter 6
Yes No Troubleshooting
OK OK
Online
Open UpperCover
Chapter 7
Opening the Upper Cover and Replacing the Cutter Operation of the
Function Menus
Closing the Upper Cover
Reset Cut Count Stop/Eject
OK
Online
Contents
Resetting
Online
7- 3 Index
Media Functions
TOP
Media Functions Chapter 1

Basic Procedures
The following media settings are provided in the printer function menus.
Chapter 2
Changing the Media Type Settings Using a Variety of
Media
You can change the settings for each media type to match
Online
the print results and finish that you want. Online
Plain Paper, CAD Plain Paper, Plain Paper (High

Chapter 3
Offline Printing Methods for
Quality), Recycled Coated Paper, Coated Paper,
Note Online Heavyweight Coated Paper, Premium Matte Paper, Different Objectives
MAIN MENU Extra Heavyweight Coated Paper, Glossy Photo
z Press the OK button to return to the previous level. Paper, Semi-Glossy Photo Paper, Heavyweight
Glossy Photo Paper, Heavyweight SemiGlos Photo
z Press the Online button to display Online. Med.Detail Set. Paper, Synthetic Paper, Adhesive Synthetic Paper,
Chapter 4
Backlit Film, Flame-Resistant Cloth, Proofing Paper, Maintaining the
Newsprint for Proofing 1 to 3, Fine Art Photo, Printer
(Media Type) Fine Art Heavyweight Photo, Fine Art Textured,
Canvas Semi-Glossy, Japanese Paper Washi,
Colored Coated Paper, CAD Tracing Paper, CAD Chapter 5
Translucent Matte Film, Special 1 to 5
Drying_Time Network Environ-
Off, 30sec., 1min., ment
[Setting Values] 3min., 5min., 10min.,
30min., 60min. Chapter 6
OK
Troubleshooting
Scan Wait Time
Off, 1min., 3min.,
[Setting Values] 5min., 7min.,
OK 9min. Chapter 7
NearEnd RllMrgn Operation of the
Function Menus
[Setting Values] 20mm,5mm
OK
Far End RllMrgn

Online
[Setting Values] 10mm,5mm Contents
OK
Online
Continued Next Page
7- 4 Index
Media Functions
TOP
Start Here Printing to the Bottom Margin of the

Chapter 1
Media Thickness
Thick, Stand-
Original Basic Procedures
[Setting Values]
OK
ard, Thin When printing on standard sizes, the images may
VacuumStrngth
occasionally be cut of at the top, bottom, left, or right
Chapter 2
Weak, Standard, margins, but if Keep Media Size is switched on then this Using a Variety of
[Setting Values] Strong, Strongest ensures that the image will not be cut off at the top or Media
OK
bottom margins. However, the length of the finished image
Standard Cutter
will be sized by the top and bottom margins. Chapter 3
Disable,
[Setting Values] Enable Printing Methods for
OK Online Different Objectives
Online
Cut Speed Offline
Chapter 4
[Setting Values] Standard, Fast Online
Maintaining the
MAIN MENU
OK Printer
CutDustReduct. System Setup
[Setting Values] Off, On Chapter 5
OK Keep Media Size
Network Environ-
Correct Smear ment
Off, On
Online
Off On
[Setting Values] * Printing on Standard Chapter 6
* Printing Without Cutting Off
OK
OK the Top, Bottom Margins Media Sizes Troubleshooting
Online
Skew Check Lv.
[Setting Values] Standard,
Loose,Off Chapter 7
OK
OK
Operation of the
Width Detection Function Menus
On, Off,
[Setting Values]
Media Size?
OK
Return Defaults
Online
Contents
[Setting Values] No, Yes
Online OK
7- 5 Index
Ink Functions
TOP
Ink Functions Chapter 1

Basic Procedures
The following ink operations are provided in the printer function menus.
Chapter 2
Replacing an Ink Tank During a Print Job Using a Variety of
Media
Execute Rep. Ink Tank on the operation panel when you need to replace an ink tank during a print job.
Printing Chapter 3
Online
Pause Different Objectives
Online
MAIN MENU Chapter 4

Maintaining the
Rep. Ink Tank Printer
Yes No Chapter 5
OK OK Using the Printer in a
Network Environ-
Open RightCover ment
Open the upper cover and replace the cutter. Chapter 6

Troubleshooting
Close the right cover.
Online Chapter 7
Operation of the
Function Menus
Printing
* Printing restarts immediately as soon as the upper cover is closed after replacement.
Contents
7- 6 Index
Ink Functions
TOP

Chapter 1
This printer can use two types of black ink: Photo Black (Bk) and Matte Black (MBk). Execute Change BkInk Type to switch Basic Procedures
between the types of black ink and drain the black ink, and then install the new black ink tank.
Online Start Here Chapter 2

Using a Variety of
Online
Offline Remove the black ink tank and install

the type of black ink tank to use. Media
Online
MAIN MENU
Close the right cover. Chapter 3
Change BkInk Type Printing Methods for
For Matte Black Ink For Photo Black Ink Different Objectives
Yes No MBk Ink Tank OK? Bk Ink Tank OK?
OK OK
OK OK Chapter 4
Please Wait.. Maintaining the
Black ink type changed Black ink type not changed Printer
Open Right Cover Ink Filling.. Please Wait..
Online Chapter 5
Online
Open RightCover Using the Printer in a
Rep. BkInk Tank Network Environ-
Online
Align the printhead (P.7-9) ment
Online Continued Next Page Chapter 6
Troubleshooting
Online
Chapter 7
Operation of the
Function Menus
Contents
7- 7 Index
Print Quality Functions
TOP
Print Quality Functions Chapter 1

Basic Procedures
You can use the printer function menus to confirm the print quality settings and change the settings to recover poor printing
results.
Chapter 2
Using a Variety of
Determining if the Printhead is Blocked When the Printhead Nozzles Are Media
You can print a Nozzle Check to check the condition of the Clogged Chapter 3
printheads. Printing Methods for
If the Nozzle Check reveals that the printheads are blocked,
Online you can execute Head Cleaning to clear the blockage and
Online recover operation of the printer. Head Cleaning A is for
Offline Chapter 4
normal, everyday printhead cleaning and Head Cleaning B Maintaining the
Online
is used for scrupulous head cleaning. Head Cleaning B Printer
MAIN MENU
consumes a large amount of ink, so please always use
Test Print Head Cleaning A unless Head Cleaning B is absolutely Chapter 5
required. Using the Printer in a
Network Environ-
Nozzle Check Online ment
OK Online
Chapter 6
Online Offline Troubleshooting
Printing Online
MAIN MENU
Online Chapter 7
Head Cleaning
Operation of the
Function Menus
Head Cleaning A Head Cleaning B
OK
Online
Cleaning..
Contents
Online
7- 8 Index
TOP
Correcting Image Offset Correcting Horizontal Banding in

Chapter 1
If vertical lines are bent, or when colors are faded and Images Basic Procedures
uneven, perform Auto Head Adj. to correct the position of Perform Adjust Band to adjust the amount of line feed and
the printhead. The printer reads the results of a printhead correct undesirable horizontal banding in printouts. The
adjustment pattern as it prints and corrects the position of Chapter 2
printer reads the results of a line feed adjustment pattern as Using a Variety of
the printhead automatically. it prints and corrects the amount of line feed automatically. Media
Online To adjust the amount of feed, select Feed Priority > Band
Online
Joint > then perform Adjust Band. Chapter 3
Offline Printing Methods for
Online Online Different Objectives
MAIN MENU Online
Offline
Chapter 4
Adjust Printer Online
Maintaining the
MAIN MENU
Printer
Auto Head Adj. Adjust Printer
Chapter 5
Feed Priority Using the Printer in a
Advanced Adj. Standard Adj. Network Environ-
* Adjusting Gaps Between * Adjusting Print Direction Band Joint ment
Odd/Even Nozzles, Print-
ing Direction, Color Gaps OK
Chapter 6
Yes No Adjust Band Troubleshooting
OK OK
Standard Adj. Advanced Adj.
Online
Printing * Standard Feed Adjustment * High-Precision Feed Adjustment Chapter 7
Yes No Operation of the
OK OK Function Menus
Online Online
Printing
Online
Contents
7- 9 Index
TOP
Printing to an Accurate Length

Chapter 1
Perform Feed Priority> PrintLength to set the priority in Basic Procedures
the print job for the length when the length of the printout is
very important to you. However, performing this setting may
cause horizontal banding to appear in the prints. To set the Chapter 2
priority for the quality of the print, perform the Band Joint Using a Variety of
Media
setting.
Online Chapter 3
Online
Offline Different Objectives
Online
MAIN MENU Chapter 4

Maintaining the
Adjust Printer Printer
Feed Priority Chapter 5

Network Environ-
Online
Print Length Band Joint ment
* Prints on the selected OK * Gives quality priority in printing Chapter 6
media size Troubleshooting
Online
Chapter 7
Operation of the
Function Menus
Contents
7- 10 Index
Printer Information Functions
TOP
Printer Information Functions Chapter 1

Basic Procedures
You can use the printer function menus to print information about print jobs and printer settings so you can check them.
Chapter 2
Checking the Print Job History Checking the Printer Settings Informa- Using a Variety of
Media
Perform Print Job Log to print information about print jobs tion
so you can confirm how much ink was used for the jobs and Perform Status Print to print basic information about the Chapter 3
other important information. printer and the settings of each function so you can check Printing Methods for
Online them.
Online
Offline Online Chapter 4

Online Maintaining the
Online
Offline Printer
MAIN MENU
Online
Test Print MAIN MENU Chapter 5

Test Print Network Environ-
Print Job Log ment
OK
Status Print Chapter 6
Online
Troubleshooting
Printing OK
Online
Printing
Online Chapter 7
Online Operation of the
Function Menus
Contents
7- 11 Index
Printer Information Functions
TOP
Checking the Media Type Settings Checking the Printer Functions Menu
Chapter 1
Information Perform Menu Map so you can have a handy reference Basic Procedures
that shows you the items, levels, and sublevels of the
Perform Media Details to print the settings for each media
type so you can check them. printer function menus.
Chapter 2
Online Online Using a Variety of
Online Media
Offline
Online
Offline
Online
Chapter 3
MAIN MENU
Online
MAIN MENU Printing Methods for

Test Print Test Print
Chapter 4
Media Details Menu Map Maintaining the
OK
Printer
OK
Online
Printing
Online
Printing Chapter 5
Online Network Environ-
Online ment
Chapter 6
Troubleshooting
Chapter 7
Operation of the
Function Menus
Contents
7- 12 Index
Contents
TOP
Contents Chapter 1
Basic Procedures
How to Use This Guide .................................................................................................................ii
How to Use the Top Page ................................................................................................................................. ii
How to Use the Chapter Contents Pages..........................................................................................................iii Chapter 2
Using a Variety of
Media
Chapter 1 Basic Procedures
Chapter 3
Printer Part Names ................................................................................................................... 1-2 Printing Methods for
Printer Main Unit............................................................................................................................................ 1-2 Different Objectives
Switching the Printer On and Off .............................................................................................. 1-7
Switching the Printer On................................................................................................................................ 1-7 Chapter 4
Switching the Printer Off................................................................................................................................ 1-8 Maintaining the
Printer
Online and Offline.......................................................................................................................................... 1-9
What’s On the Operation Panel? ............................................................................................ 1-11
Chapter 5
Viewing the Display ..................................................................................................................................... 1-11 Using the Printer in a
Using the Operation Panel Buttons ............................................................................................................. 1-12 Network Environ-
Reading Operation Panel Lamps ................................................................................................................ 1-14 ment
Function Menus ...................................................................................................................... 1-15 Chapter 6
Troubleshooting
How to Perform Function Menu Settings..................................................................................................... 1-17
Menu Settings Summary Tables ................................................................................................................. 1-19
Printer Driver ........................................................................................................................... 1-32 Chapter 7
Printer Driver Features ................................................................................................................................ 1-32 Operation of the
Main Sheet .................................................................................................................................................. 1-35 Function Menus
Page Setup Sheet ...................................................................................................................................... 1-37
Layout Sheet ............................................................................................................................................... 1-38
Maintenance Sheet...................................................................................................................................... 1-39
Printing .................................................................................................................................... 1-40 Contents
Printing From Windows ............................................................................................................................... 1-40
Printing from a Macintosh............................................................................................................................ 1-42
C- 1 Index
Contents
TOP
Canceling a Print Job .............................................................................................................. 1-46
Canceling a Print Job from Windows........................................................................................................... 1-46 Chapter 1
Canceling a Print Job from Macintosh......................................................................................................... 1-47 Basic Procedures
Options ................................................................................................................................... 1-52
Consumables .......................................................................................................................... 1-53
Chapter 2
Specifications .......................................................................................................................... 1-56 Using a Variety of
Media
Basic Environmental Performance ......................................................................................... 1-59
Chapter 3
Chapter 2 Using a Variety of Media Different Objectives
Media You Can Use .................................................................................................................. 2-2
Chapter 4
The Suitable Black Ink for Media................................................................................................................... 2-2
Maintaining the
Paper Type .................................................................................................................................................... 2-4 Printer
Media Size................................................................................................................................................... 2-18
Original data the same as the media........................................................................................................... 2-20
Chapter 5
Handling Paper and Other Print Media........................................................................................................ 2-25 Using the Printer in a
Printing with Rolls ................................................................................................................... 2-26 Network Environ-
ment
Loading Roll Media...................................................................................................................................... 2-26
Removing a Roll .......................................................................................................................................... 2-33 Chapter 6
Troubleshooting
Printing with Cut Sheets ......................................................................................................... 2-35
Loading Cut Sheets ..................................................................................................................................... 2-35
Removing a Cut Sheet ................................................................................................................................ 2-39 Chapter 7
Adjusting the Height of the Printhead ..................................................................................... 2-40 Operation of the
Function Menus
Adjusting Printhead Height .......................................................................................................................... 2-40
Aligning the Printhead ................................................................................................................................. 2-42
Re-adjusting Printhead Height..................................................................................................................... 2-42
Contents
C- 2 Index
Contents
TOP
Chapter 3 Printing Methods for Different Objectives

Chapter 1
Printing from Windows .............................................................................................................. 3-2 Basic Procedures
Before You Begin .......................................................................................................................................... 3-2
Enlarging and Reducing the Original............................................................................................................. 3-6
Printing Photos and Illustrations without Borders (Borderless Printing) ...................................................... 3-13 Chapter 2
Rotating the Page 90 Degrees for Printing (Conserve Paper) .................................................................... 3-22 Using a Variety of
Media
Printing Several Pages on One Sheet (Page Layout) ................................................................................. 3-24
Printing Posters (Page Layout).................................................................................................................... 3-26
Using Watermarks ....................................................................................................................................... 3-28 Chapter 3
Vertical and Horizontal Banner Printing (Long Prints) ................................................................................ 3-30 Different Objectives
Printing without Top and Bottom Margins (Conserve Paper) ...................................................................... 3-38
Custom Print Quality.................................................................................................................................... 3-39
Chapter 4
Fine Adjusting Color for Printing.................................................................................................................. 3-42 Maintaining the
About Media Size Options ........................................................................................................................... 3-51 Printer
When the Printout Quality Is Not Clean....................................................................................................... 3-56
Software Provided for Windows .................................................................................................................. 3-56 Chapter 5
Printing from Macintosh .......................................................................................................... 3-59 Using the Printer in a
Network Environ-
Before You Begin ....................................................................................................................................... 3-59
ment
Enlarging and Reducing the Original........................................................................................................... 3-65
Printing Photos and Illustrations without Borders (Borderless Printing) ...................................................... 3-77 Chapter 6
Troubleshooting
Rotating the Page 90 Degrees for Printing (Conserve Paper) .................................................................... 3-86
Printing Several Pages on One Sheet (Page Layout) ................................................................................. 3-89
Printing Posters (Page Layout) ................................................................................................................... 3-92
Chapter 7
Vertical and Horizontal Banner Printing (Long Prints) ................................................................................ 3-94 Operation of the
Printing without Top and Bottom Margins (Conserve Paper) .................................................................... 3-100 Function Menus
Custom Print Quality.................................................................................................................................. 3-103
Fine Adjusting Color for Printing................................................................................................................ 3-107
Custom Sizes (User Print Settings) .......................................................................................................... 3-121
When the Printout Quality Is Not Clean..................................................................................................... 3-125 Contents
Software Provided for Macintosh............................................................................................................... 3-126
C- 3 Index
Contents
TOP
Chapter 4 Maintaining the Printer

Chapter 1
Replacing Ink Tanks ................................................................................................................. 4-2 Basic Procedures
How to Confirm Ink Levels............................................................................................................................. 4-2
When to Replace an Ink Tank ....................................................................................................................... 4-3
Ink Tank Handling Precautions...................................................................................................................... 4-4 Chapter 2
Replacing an Ink Tank................................................................................................................................... 4-5 Using a Variety of
Media
Cautions About Using Refilled Ink Tanks for This Printer ......................................................... 4-8
Switching the Ink Level Detection Function Off ............................................................................................. 4-8
Chapter 3
Executing a Print Job..................................................................................................................................... 4-9 Printing Methods for
Cleaning the Printer ................................................................................................................ 4-10 Different Objectives
Cleaning the Exterior Covers....................................................................................................................... 4-10
Cleaning Inside the Upper Cover ................................................................................................................ 4-11 Chapter 4
Maintaining the
Cleaning the Paper Restraint .................................................................................................. 4-14 Printer
Replacing the Maintenance Cartridge .................................................................................... 4-16
Checking Spacing Remaining in the Maintenance Cartridge ...................................................................... 4-16 Chapter 5
When to Replace the Maintenance Cartridge.............................................................................................. 4-17 Using the Printer in a
Network Environ-
Maintenance Cartridge Handling Precautions ............................................................................................. 4-18
ment
Maintenance Cartridge Replacement Procedure ........................................................................................ 4-18
Chapter 6
Replacing the Printhead ......................................................................................................... 4-23 Troubleshooting
Printhead Handling Precautions .................................................................................................................. 4-23
How to Replace the Printhead..................................................................................................................... 4-24
Replacing the Cutter Blade ..................................................................................................... 4-29 Chapter 7
Operation of the
Transporting the Printer .......................................................................................................... 4-32 Function Menus
Checking the Condition of the Printer ..................................................................................... 4-36
Cleaning the Printhead ........................................................................................................... 4-38
Types of Printhead Cleaning ....................................................................................................................... 4-38
Printhead Cleaning Procedures................................................................................................................... 4-38 Contents
Aligning the Printhead ............................................................................................................. 4-40
C- 4 Index
Contents
TOP
Adjusting Amount of Media Feed ............................................................................................ 4-42
Media Feed Adjustment Procedure ............................................................................................................. 4-42 Chapter 1
Adjusting Line Feed Manually ..................................................................................................................... 4-43 Basic Procedures
Reducing the Amount of Cutting Dust .................................................................................... 4-45
Changing the Black Ink Type .................................................................................................. 4-47
Chapter 2
Black Ink Tank Exchange Procedure .......................................................................................................... 4-48 Using a Variety of
Media
Chapter 5 Using the Printer in a Network Environment Chapter 3

Before Using the Printer ........................................................................................................... 5-2 Different Objectives
Required System Environment...................................................................................................................... 5-2
The Network Environment ............................................................................................................................. 5-3 Chapter 4
TCP/IP Network Settings (Windows, Macintosh, UNIX) ........................................................... 5-5 Maintaining the
Printer
Procedures Required for a TCP/IP Network.................................................................................................. 5-5
Connecting the LAN Cable ............................................................................................................................ 5-5
Setting the Printer IP Address ....................................................................................................................... 5-7 Chapter 5
Performing the TCP/IP Protocol Settings .................................................................................................... 5-15 Network Environ-
Setting the Printer for Sharing ..................................................................................................................... 5-18 ment
Macintosh Network Settings ................................................................................................... 5-20 Chapter 6
Procedures Required for a Macintosh Network........................................................................................... 5-20 Troubleshooting
Setting a Macintosh ..................................................................................................................................... 5-21
Setting AppleTalk Protocol .......................................................................................................................... 5-25
Install the Printer Driver ............................................................................................................................... 5-31 Chapter 7
Operation of the
NetWare Settings (Windows) .................................................................................................. 5-33 Function Menus
Procedures Required for a NetWare Network ............................................................................................. 5-33
Setting the Printer Frame Type ................................................................................................................... 5-34
Setting Up a NetWare Print Service ............................................................................................................ 5-37
Setting NetWare Protocol ............................................................................................................................ 5-40
Setting the Computer for NetWare .............................................................................................................. 5-44
Contents
Printing with UNIX ................................................................................................................... 5-45
Using LPD to Print ....................................................................................................................................... 5-45
C- 5
Using FTP to Print ....................................................................................................................................... 5-46 Index
Contents
TOP
Initializing the Settings ............................................................................................................ 5-47
List of Network Settings .......................................................................................................... 5-48 Chapter 1
Basic Procedures
Software Applications that can be used for Network Settings ................................................ 5-51
Chapter 2
Chapter 6 Troubleshooting Using a Variety of
Media
Responding to Error Messages ................................................................................................ 6-2
Operation Panel Message List ...................................................................................................................... 6-3
Chapter 3
Media Messages ........................................................................................................................................... 6-4 Printing Methods for
Ink Messages .............................................................................................................................................. 6-11 Different Objectives
Other Messages .......................................................................................................................................... 6-14
When You Cannot Print .......................................................................................................... 6-18 Chapter 4
Printing Will Not Start .................................................................................................................................. 6-18 Maintaining the
Printer
Printing Halts During Print Job .................................................................................................................... 6-21
Cannot Print on Network ............................................................................................................................. 6-22
Chapter 5
Unexpected Printing Results .................................................................................................. 6-27 Using the Printer in a
Poor Quality................................................................................................................................................. 6-28 Network Environ-
Abnormal Content........................................................................................................................................ 6-31 ment
Other Problems ........................................................................................................................................... 6-34 Chapter 6
Handling Jams ........................................................................................................................ 6-35 Troubleshooting
Removing a Roll Media Jam........................................................................................................................ 6-35
Removing a Cut Sheet Jam......................................................................................................................... 6-38
Chapter 7
Updating the Firmware ........................................................................................................... 6-41 Operation of the
Obtaining the Firmware Update................................................................................................................... 6-41 Function Menus
Confirming the Firmware Version ................................................................................................................ 6-41
Reinstalling the USB or IEEE1394 Driver ............................................................................... 6-42
Uninstalling Software Applications .......................................................................................... 6-43
Deleting the Printer Driver ........................................................................................................................... 6-43
Contents
Deleting the GARO Status Monitor.............................................................................................................. 6-44
Deleting the GARO Device Setup Utility...................................................................................................... 6-44
C- 6 Index
Contents
TOP
Chapter 7 Operation of the Function Menus

Chapter 1
Operating the Function Menus ................................................................................................. 7-2 Basic Procedures
Cutter Functions ....................................................................................................................... 7-3
When You Need to Cut Media....................................................................................................................... 7-3
Replacing the Cutter...................................................................................................................................... 7-3 Chapter 2
Using a Variety of
Media Functions ....................................................................................................................... 7-4 Media
Changing the Media Type Settings ............................................................................................................... 7-4
Printing to the Bottom Margin of the Original................................................................................................. 7-5 Chapter 3
Ink Functions ............................................................................................................................ 7-6 Printing Methods for
Replacing an Ink Tank During a Print Job ..................................................................................................... 7-6
Changing the Black Ink Type......................................................................................................................... 7-7
Chapter 4
Print Quality Functions .............................................................................................................. 7-8 Maintaining the
Determining if the Printhead is Blocked......................................................................................................... 7-8 Printer
When the Printhead Nozzles Are Clogged .................................................................................................... 7-8
Correcting Image Offset ................................................................................................................................ 7-9 Chapter 5
Correcting Horizontal Banding in Images ...................................................................................................... 7-9 Using the Printer in a
Network Environ-
Printing to an Accurate Length .................................................................................................................... 7-10
ment
Printer Information Functions .................................................................................................. 7-11
Chapter 6
Checking the Print Job History .................................................................................................................... 7-11 Troubleshooting
Checking the Printer Settings Information ................................................................................................... 7-11
Checking the Media Type Settings Information........................................................................................... 7-12
Checking the Printer Functions Menu ......................................................................................................... 7-12 Chapter 7
Operation of the
Contents ............................................................................................................ C-1 Function Menus
Index ....................................................................................................................I-1
Regulations for this product .................................................................................I-7 Contents
C- 7 Index
Index
TOP
Index Chapter 1
Basic Procedures
Numerics C
button ..................................................................1-13 CAD Plain Paper ........................................................2-5
button ..................................................................1-13 CAD Tracing Paper ..................................................2-17 Chapter 2
Using a Variety of
button ..................................................................1-13 CAD Translucent Matte Film ....................................2-17
Media
button ..................................................................1-13 Canceling a Background Print Job ...........................1-47
Canceling a Foreground Print Job ...........................1-50
A Chapter 3
Canceling a Print Job Printing Methods for
Accessory pocket .......................................................1-3
Macintosh .............................................................1-47 Different Objectives
Adhesive Synthetic Paper ........................................2-11
Windows ..............................................................1-46
Adjust Band ..............................................................4-42 Canon imagePROGRAF HDI Printer Driver .............3-58 Chapter 4
Adjusting Printhead Height .......................................2-40 Canvas SemiGlos ....................................................2-15 Maintaining the
Administrator mode ............................... 5-16, 5-26, 5-40 Carriage ......................................... 1-5, 4-31, 6-36, 6-37
Printer
AppleTalk ................................1-43, 5-2, 5-4, 5-21, 6-23 Part names .............................................................1-5
AppleTalk phase .........................................................5-9 Carriage cover ...................................................1-5, 4-25 Chapter 5
AppleTalk settings ....................................................5-49 Using the Printer in a
Carriage rail ................................................................1-4 Network Environ-
ARP/PING command .............................. 5-7, 5-10, 5-51 Chooser ....................................................................1-42 ment
B Cleaner brush ...........................................................4-12 Chapter 6

Backlit Film ...............................................................2-12 Cleaning exterior covers ..........................................4-10 Troubleshooting
Banner printing ............................................... 3-30, 3-94 Coated paper .............................................................2-7
Banners .......................................................... 3-30, 3-94 Color Adjustment ...........................................3-42, 3-107
Color Matching ..............................................3-46, 3-113 Chapter 7
Basic Environmental Performance ...........................1-59 Operation of the
Bindery .....................................................................5-37 Color Mode ....................................................3-43, 3-108 Function Menus
Black Ink .................................................... 2-2, 4-47, 7-7 Colored Coated Paper .............................................2-16
Border line ...................................................... 3-25, 3-91 Confirming print job status .......................................4-36
Borderless Printing ................................ 2-22, 3-13, 3-77 Conserve Paper .......3-22, 3-38, 3-82, 3-86, 3-88, 3-100
Basic operations ......................................... 3-13, 3-78 Consumables ...........................................................1-53 Contents
Fit Roll Paper Width ................................... 3-17, 3-83 Cookies ................................................. 5-15, 5-25, 5-40
Print Image with Actual Size ................................3-20 Custom Media Settings ..........................................3-121
Required settings ....................................... 3-13, 3-77 Custom Size Settings ...............................................3-32
I- 1
Borderless printing ink groove ..................................4-12 Custom Sizes ........................... 3-51, 3-96, 3-121, 3-123 Index
Index
TOP
Cut Sheet .................................................................2-19 Fine Art Heavyweight Photo .....................................2-14
Cut Sheet lamp ............................................... 1-14, 2-35 Fine Art Photo ..........................................................2-14 Chapter 1
Cut Sheets ...................................................... 1-53, 2-35 Fine Art Textured .....................................................2-15 Basic Procedures
Jams .....................................................................6-38 Fit Roll Paper Width ........................................3-30, 3-94
Cutter ..........................................................................7-3 Flame-Resistant Cloth ..............................................2-12
Replace ..................................................................7-3 Function Menu Chapter 2
Cutter Blade ................................... 1-5, 1-55, 4-29, 4-30 Flow Summaries ..................................................1-15 Using a Variety of
Media
Cutter dust reduction function ..................................4-45 Function menus ........................................................7-12
Cutter position adjustment dial .................................4-30
Cutting groove ............................................................1-2 G Chapter 3
GARO Device Setup Utility ............ 3-57, 5-7, 5-34, 5-51 Printing Methods for
D Deleting ................................................................6-44
Data lamp .................................................................1-14 Installing .................................................................5-7
Chapter 4
Default G/W ..............................................................5-14 GARO Printer Driver ................................................1-42
Maintaining the
Device Management .................... 5-16, 5-26, 5-29, 5-41 GARO Printmonitor ................................................3-126 Printer
Device Status Extension ..........................................3-57 GARO Status Monitor .....................................1-46, 3-56
Digital Photo Print Pro ..............................................3-58 Deleting ................................................................6-44 Chapter 5
Display ......................................................................1-11 Gateway address .....................................................5-12 Using the Printer in a
General Controls ......................................................5-48 Network Environ-
Display Series .............................................. 3-55, 3-124
ment
DSE ..........................................................................5-19 Glossy Photo Paper ...................................................2-9
Chapter 6
E H Troubleshooting
Enhance Text With Photos ........................... 3-42, 3-106 Halftones .......................................................3-42, 3-106
Enlarged/Reduced Printing .............................. 3-6, 3-65 HDI Printer Driver .....................................................3-58
Fit Media Size .............................................. 3-7, 3-65 Head Cleaning ...........................................................7-8 Chapter 7
Operation of the
Fit Roll Paper Width ..................................... 3-9, 3-69 Heavyweight coated paper .........................................2-7 Function Menus
Specify Scaling ........................................... 3-11, 3-73 Heavyweight Glossy Photo Paper ............................2-10
Ethernet ................................................. 5-22, 5-23, 5-24 Heavyweight SemiGlos Photo Paper .......................2-10
Expansion board slot ..................................................1-3 Holder stopper ...................................................1-3, 2-27
Extra Heavyweight Coated Paper ..............................2-8 How to Perform Function Menu Settings .................1-17 Contents
F I
Feed adjustment ............................................... 4-42, 7-9 IEEE1394 .................................................................1-52
Feed Priority .............................................................7-10 IEEE1394 Expansion Board .....................................1-52
I- 2
Index
Index
TOP
IIS .............................................................................5-19 Macintosh ................................................ 5-4, 5-21, 6-43
imagePROGRAF Print Plug-In for Photoshop MAIN MENU .............................................................1-16 Chapter 1
..................................................................... 3-58, 3-126 Main Menu ...............................................................1-19 Basic Procedures
imagePROGRAF Printer Driver 2005 ........... 3-56, 3-126 Main Sheet ...............................................................1-35
Information button ....................................................1-13 Maintenance cartridge .......................................1-2, 1-54
Ink capacity ................................................................4-2 Replacement procedure .......................................4-18 Chapter 2
Ink level detection .......................................................4-8 When to replace ...................................................4-17 Using a Variety of
Media
Ink replacement ..........................................................7-6 Maintenance cartridge capacity ...............................4-16
Ink Tank Cover ................................................... 1-6, 4-6 Maintenance cartridge cover ......................................1-2
Chapter 3
Ink Tanks ...................................1-6, 1-54, 4-2, 4-7, 4-33 Maintenance Sheet ..................................................1-39 Printing Methods for
Handling precautions .............................................4-4 Managing the printer ................................................5-15 Different Objectives
Ink replacement time ..............................................4-3 Matching Mode ..............................................3-50, 3-117
Procedures .............................................................4-5 Matte Black Ink ..................................................2-2, 4-47 Chapter 4
IP address ............................................... 5-7, 5-11, 5-13 Media .........................................................................2-2 Maintaining the
Printer
Troubleshooting ...................................................6-35
J
Media Configuration Tool ..............................3-58, 3-127
Jams .........................................................................6-35 Chapter 5
Media Detailed Settings ................................3-56, 3-125
Japanese Paper Washi ............................................2-16 Using the Printer in a
Media Size .............2-18, 2-20, 3-54, 3-55, 3-123, 3-124 Network Environ-
JavaScript .............................................. 5-15, 5-25, 5-40
Media Size Options ............................. 3-32, 3-51, 3-121 ment
L Media size series ...................................................3-124 Chapter 6
LAN cable ...................................................................5-5 Media Type Troubleshooting
LAN port ........................................................... 1-52, 5-5 Settings ............................................... 2-30, 2-38, 7-4
Layout ..................................3-24, 3-26, 3-89, 3-90, 3-92 Media Type details ...................................................7-12
Layout Sheet ............................................................1-38 Menu Map ................................................................7-12 Chapter 7
Operation of the
Lift handles .................................................................1-3 Menu Settings Summary Tables ..............................1-19
Function Menus
Loading Cut Sheets ..................................................2-36 Message lamp ..........................................................1-14
Loading the Roll Media .............................................2-27 Messages ...................................................................6-2
LPR Port ...................................................................3-57 Multicast DNS .................................................5-29, 5-49
M N Contents
MAC address .................................................. 5-10, 5-11 NDS ..........................................................................5-37
Mac OS 8.6/9.x ............................. 1-42, 1-47, 5-21, 5-23 NetSpot Console ......................................................3-57
Mac OS X ..................................... 1-43, 1-49, 5-22, 5-24 NetWare ..........................................................5-37, 6-25
I- 3
Index
Index
TOP
NetWare frame type .................................................5-35 Oversize ..........................................................2-23, 3-55
NetWare print service ...............................................5-37
P Chapter 1
NetWare settings ......................................................5-49 Basic Procedures
Page Setup Sheet ....................................................1-37
Printer operation panel .........................................5-35
Page Size ......................................................3-55, 3-124
Network environment .................................................5-3
PageComposer ..........................................................3-5
Network information settings Chapter 2
Paper Design ................................................3-96, 3-124 Using a Variety of
GARO Device Setup Utility ....................................5-8
Paper restraint ...................................................1-4, 4-14 Media
Printer operation panel ............................... 5-12, 5-30
Network initial settings ..............................................5-47 Paper Source ...........................................................2-35
Paper Source button .......................................1-13, 2-26 Chapter 3
Network settings .......................................................5-48
Paper Type .................................................................2-4 Printing Methods for
Newsprint for Proofing ..............................................2-13 Different Objectives
No Spaces at Top or Bottom (Conserve Paper) PCONSOLE .............................................................5-38
............................................................ 3-38, 3-82, 3-100 Phase Type ..............................................................5-27
Chapter 4
Novell Directory Service ...........................................5-37 Photo Black Ink .................................................2-2, 4-47 Maintaining the
Nozzle Check .............................................................7-8 ping ..........................................................................5-12 Printer
Nozzle check print ....................................................4-36 Plain paper .................................................................2-5
NWADMIN ................................................................5-38 Plain Paper (High Quality) ..........................................2-6 Chapter 5
Platen ...................................................... 1-4, 2-35, 4-12 Using the Printer in a
O Network Environ-
Port settings .............................................................5-44 ment
OK button .................................................................1-13 Poster Printing .................................................3-26, 3-92
Online button ............................................................1-12 Chapter 6
PosterArtist ...............................................................3-57 Troubleshooting
Online lamp ..............................................................1-14 Power button ............................................. 1-7, 1-8, 1-12
Operating the Printer Power connector ........................................................1-3
Macintosh .............................................................1-45 Premium Matte Paper ................................................2-8 Chapter 7
Windows ...............................................................1-40 Preview Operation of the
Operation Panel ............................................... 1-2, 1-11 Function Menus
Print Preview .................................................3-5, 3-64
Operation Panel Buttons ..........................................1-12 Settings Preview ...........................................3-4, 3-62
Operation Panel Lamps ............................................1-14 Print Centered .................................................3-12, 3-76
Options .....................................................................1-52 Print Job Log ............................................................7-11
OS ..............................................................................5-2 Print Media ...............................................................1-53 Contents
Output assist guides ......................................... 1-2, 4-12 Print Plug-In for Photoshop ...........................3-58, 3-126
Output guides ...........................................................4-12 Print quality ....................................... 3-39, 3-103, 3-105
Output stacker ............................................................1-2
I- 4
Index
Index
TOP
Printer
Q
Cleaning ...............................................................4-10 Queue server mode .................................................5-37 Chapter 1
Part Names ............................................................1-2 Basic Procedures
Specifications .......................................................1-56 R
Printer driver ........................1-32, 1-40, 1-42, 5-31, 5-44 Recycled Coated Paper .............................................2-6
Deleting ................................................................6-43 Release lever ................................. 1-3, 2-36, 6-36, 6-38 Chapter 2
Printer Driver 2005 ....................................... 3-56, 3-126 Remote printer mode ...............................................5-37 Using a Variety of
Printer Function Priorities .........................................1-15 Media
Remote UI .......3-57, 3-126, 5-15, 5-25, 5-40, 5-47, 5-51
Printer names ...........................................................5-27 Replaceable Printhead ...............................................1-5
Printer operation panel ............................ 5-7, 5-25, 5-51 Chapter 3
Resolution .....................................................3-41, 3-106 Printing Methods for
Printer protocol settings ................................ 3-120, 5-25 Resume Printing .......................................................1-48 Different Objectives
Printer server ............................................................5-18 Right cover ......................................... 1-2, 1-6, 4-7, 4-48
Printer Setup Utility ...................................................1-43 Roll holder ..................................................................1-3 Chapter 4
Printer sharing ..........................................................5-18 Roll Holder Sets .......................................................1-52 Maintaining the
Printhead ............................................... 1-54, 4-23, 4-26 Printer
Roll holder slot ...........................................................1-3
Adjustment ...........................................................4-40 Roll Media .......................................................2-18, 2-26
Cleaning ...............................................................4-38 Chapter 5
Roll Media lamp ..............................................1-14, 2-26
Handling precautions ...........................................4-23 Using the Printer in a
Roll Media Sizes ......................................................1-53 Network Environ-
Position adjustment ..............................................4-40 Roll Paper ment
Replacement procedure .......................................4-24
Jams ....................................................................6-35 Chapter 6
Printhead adjustment .................................................7-9
Rotate Page 90 Degrees (Conserve Paper) Troubleshooting
Printhead cleaning .............................................................. 3-22, 3-86, 3-88
Procedure .............................................................4-38
Types ...................................................................4-38 S Chapter 7
Printhead height .......................................................2-40 Selecting the Media Type .........................................2-32 Operation of the
Printhead height adjustment lever .................... 1-5, 2-41 Selecting the Paper Source ............................2-26, 2-35 Function Menus
Printhead lock cover ......................................... 1-5, 4-26 Selecting the Printer .................................................1-42
Printhead lock lever .......................................... 1-5, 4-26 SemiGlos Photo Paper ...............................................2-9
Printing multiple pages on 1 sheet ................. 3-24, 3-89 Setup Menu ................................................................5-7
Printing types of jobs ........................................ 3-2, 3-59 Shaft cleaner ............................................................4-21 Contents
Profiles .....................................................................3-61 Sheet holder .............................................................2-37
Proofing Paper .........................................................2-13 Software applications ......................................5-51, 6-43
Proxy server .......................................... 5-15, 5-25, 5-40 Stand ..........................................................................1-2
I- 5
Index
Index
TOP
Status Print ..................................................... 5-10, 7-11 Windows NT .............................................................5-18
Stop button ............................................ 1-46, 1-48, 1-50 Windows XP .............................................................5-18 Chapter 1
Stop/Eject button ......................................................1-13 Basic Procedures
Stopper .......................................................................1-2 Z
Zeroconf ...................................................................5-23
Sub Menus ..................................................... 1-16, 1-31
Zeroconf function .................................. 5-21, 5-29, 5-48
Subnet Mask .................................................. 5-12, 5-13 Chapter 2
Zone .........................................................................5-28 Using a Variety of
Switching the Printer Off .............................................1-8
Media
Switching the Printer On .............................................1-7
Synthetic Paper ........................................................2-11
Chapter 3
T Different Objectives
TCP/IP .............................................. 5-2, 5-3, 5-23, 6-22
TCP/IP settings ........................................................5-48
Chapter 4
Transporting the printer ............................................4-32 Maintaining the
Troubleshooting ........................................................6-27 Printer
Type .........................................................................1-53
Chapter 5
U Using the Printer in a
Upper cover Network Environ-
........... 1-2, 1-5, 2-36, 2-41, 4-11, 4-25, 4-30, 6-35, 6-38 ment
Cleaning inside the printer ...................................4-11 Chapter 6
Names of parts inside the printer ...........................1-4 Troubleshooting
Upper cover handles ................................................4-12
Upper cover rollers ...................................................4-12
Upper cover stopper ...................................................1-4 Chapter 7
Operation of the
USB port .....................................................................1-3 Function Menus
V
Vertical banners ............................................. 3-30, 3-94
W Contents
Watermark printing ...................................................3-28
Web browser ................................ 5-15, 5-25, 5-47, 5-51
Windows .................................................. 1-40, 5-3, 6-43
I- 6 Windows 2000 ..........................................................5-18 Index
Regulations for this product
TOP
Regulations for this product Chapter 1

Basic Procedures
FCC Regulations
Canon Large Format Printer, Model K90049
Chapter 2
IEEE1394 Expansion Board EB-04, Model K90050 Using a Variety of
Media
Network Interface Board NB-15FB, Model K90051
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not
Chapter 3
cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired Printing Methods for
operation. Different Objectives
Note: This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC
Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equip- Chapter 4
Maintaining the
ment generates, uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may Printer
cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular
installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the
Chapter 5
equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures: Using the Printer in a
• Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna. Network Environ-
ment
• Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver.
Chapter 6
• Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected. Troubleshooting
• Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help.
Use of shielded cable is required to comply with Class B limits in Subpart B of Part 15 of FCC Rules. Chapter 7
Operation of the
Do not make any changes or modifications to the equipment unless otherwise specified in the manual. If such changes or modifications Function Menus
should be made, you could be required to stop operation of the equipment.
Canon U.S.A. Inc.
One Canon Plaza, Lake Success, NY 11042, U.S.A.
Contents
Tel No. 516-328-5600
I- 7
Index
TOP
Canadian Radio Interference Regulations
This digital apparatus does not exceed the Class B limits for radio noise emissions from digital apparatus as set out in the interference- Chapter 1
causing equipment standard entitled “Digital Apparatus”, ICES-003 of the Industry and Science Canada. Basic Procedures
Cet appareil numérique respecte les limites de bruits radioélectriques applicables aux appareils numérique de Classe B prescites dans
la norme sur le matériel brouiller: “Appareils Numériques”, NMB-003 édictée par l’Industrie et Sciences Canada. Chapter 2
Using a Variety of
Media
International ENERGY STAR® Program
Chapter 3
As an ENERGY STAR® Partner, Canon Inc. has determined that this product meets the ENERGY STAR® guidelines Printing Methods for
for energy efficiency. The international ENERGY STAR® Office Equipment Program is a global program that Different Objectives
promotes energy saving through the use of computers and other office equipment. The program backs the de-
velopment and dissemination of products with functions that effectively reduce energy consumption. It is an Chapter 4
open system in which businesses can participate voluntarily. The targeted products are office equipment such Maintaining the
as computers, monitors, printers, facsimiles, and copiers. Their standards and logos are uniform among par- Printer
ticipating nations.
Chapter 5
Network Environ-
Trademarks ment
Canon, the Canon logo, imagePROGRAF, imagePROGRAF logo, NetSpot, Font Gallery, and Font Composer are trade- Chapter 6
marks of Canon Inc. Troubleshooting
Microsoft®, Windows®, Windows NT® and MS-DOS® are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United
States and/or other countries. Chapter 7
Apple, AppleTalk, EtherTalk, LocalTalk, and Macintosh are trademarks of Apple Computer, Inc. in the United States. Operation of the
Function Menus
NetWare and Novell are registered trademarks of Novell, Inc. in the United States and/or other countries.
NDS, NDPS, NLM and Novell Client are trademarks of Novell, Inc. in the United States.
Other brand and product names may be trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective companies.
Contents
I- 8
Index
TOP
Chapter 1
Basic Procedures
Chapter 2
Using a Variety of
Media
Chapter 3
Chapter 4
Maintaining the
Printer
Chapter 5
Network Environ-
ment
Chapter 6
Troubleshooting
Chapter 7
Operation of the
Function Menus
Contents
I- 9
Index

W6400UG Us PDF

Caricato da

Informazioni sul documento

Titolo originale

Copyright

Formati disponibili

Condividi questo documento

Condividi o incorpora il documento

Opzioni di condivisione

Hai trovato utile questo documento?

Questo contenuto è inappropriato?

Copyright:

Formati disponibili

W6400UG Us PDF

Caricato da

Copyright:

Formati disponibili

TOP

Unexpected Printing Results Chapter 6

imagePROGRAF HDI Driver Guide

Media Configuration Tool Guide

How to Use This Guide Chapter 1

ii How to Use the Chapter Contents Pages Index

How to Use the Chapter Contents Pages

• Click the contents page to move to

iii How to Use the Top Page Index

Chapter 1 Basic Procedures

Printer Part Names Chapter 1

d Roll holder slot

a Carriage cover Chapter 4

a Y Ink Tank Cover Chapter 3

Switching the Printer On and Off Chapter 1

the instructions in the Quick Start Guide to confirm the Message Bk

setup and operation of the printer. Stop/Eject

If you see an error message displayed, follow the

Online and Offline Note Chapter 1

Press the Online button then select the Stop/Eject

operation mode. Offline

With Online displayed on the operation panel, the Chapter 7

What’s On the Operation Panel? Chapter 1

Viewing the Display Chapter 5

A setting prefixed with an equals sign (=) indicates the b

Information Power Information Power

Function Menus Chapter 1

*8 Displayed only when Manual is selected as the IP Mode.

Counter Cut Count

Time Zone Y Ink Tank

Best Head Hght (L/M/H)

Head Height (L/M/H)

Move Printer Spanning Tree

NetWare NetWare Subnet Mask

Remaining : (Paper Remaining) m

Width : (Paper Width)

z Sub Menus (Information Button)

Rep. Ink Tank Return Defaults

display the menus, then use the [ ], [ ], [ ], [ ], and (3 sec.)

The setting value for the selected item appears.

Menu Settings Summary Tables

 MAIN MENU Chapter 2

Head Cleaning Head Cleaning A Cleans the printhead.

Ink: Displays in the center the ink capacity in 7

Printer Driver Chapter 1

Printing with Custom Sizes

Printhead Printhead Adjusting

Main Sheet Standard:

Printing From Windows

Printing from a Macintosh 1 From the Apple menu, select Chooser.

3 Close the Chooser window and click the OK

The print job starts.

Canceling a Print Job Chapter 1

the print job, click the GARO Status Monitor

1 In the Printers folder, double-click the icon

1 In the GARO Printer Extra folder installed

1 Select Finder, then select Utilities or Chapter 2

4 Select the print job to cancel, then select

2 Open the Utilities folder then open Printer

Setup Utility (Print Center). Chapter 5

If the Data lamp goes off and you cannot Chapter 6

button for at least 1 second to display Shut Menu

Yellow Ink BCI-1451Y  Replaceable Printhead Chapter 5

MAIN MENU Chapter 2

Yellow Ink BCI-1451Y Replaceable Printhead Chapter 5

Loading Roll Media Selecting the Paper Source

Loading Cut Sheets Selecting the Paper Source